مِن
Appears 653 times in Quran
Occurrences in Quran
Found 50 verses containing "مِن".
وَٱلَّذِينَ يُؤْمِنُونَ بِمَآ أُنزِلَ إِلَيْكَ وَمَآ أُنزِلَ مِن قَبْلِكَ وَبِٱلْءَاخِرَةِ هُمْ يُوقِنُونَ
2:137, 286; 3:200; 4:61, 137, 163; 5:60.
6:93; 27:4; 31:5.
就相信主的众先知而言, 相信穆圣, 是信仰的中心 (2:286; 4:66, 137)。
伊斯兰教要他的信者们必须相信所有以前的先知所教导的安拉的起源, 因为安拉向所有民族都派遣了使者。(13:8; 35:25)
اَلْاٰخِرَة (Al-Akhirah): «古兰经» 包罗万象, 内涵丰富, 具有许多义理。本节中اَلْاٰخِرَة 一字的字意是后者; 后来者。属于形容词。其所形容的词被省略了。有几个字在这里可以做其所形容的名词。把它所形容的那个省略的名词认为只能是 يَوْم (yaum, 日子) 或 اَلْحَيَاة (Al-Hayat, 生命), 并限定日子或生命只是指示死后时期和日子或死后的生命。اَلْاٰخِرَة 这个形容词只能译为 “死后的日子” 、“死后的世界” 、 “死后的生命” 、或 “复生日”, 是错误的。真主向穆圣说:
وَ لَلْاٰخِرَةُ خَیْرٌ لَّكَ مِنَ الْاُوْلٰی
“看啊!你后来的每一时刻都将好过其先前的时刻。” (93:5) 这里 اَلْاٰخِرَة 一字不能作死后的生命解。否则, 不能作为穆圣今世成功的客观证据。在17:105 中真主说:
فَاِذَا جَآءَ وَعْدُ الْاٰخِرَةِ جِئْنَا بِكُمْ لَفِیْفًا
我向犹太人作了许约, 当后者的语言实现时, 我将把他们带到巴勒斯坦。在这里 اَلْاٰخِرَة (后者) 一字所形容的名词不可能是 اَلْحَيَاةْ (生命)。否则, 这句的意思将是: 当今世将毁灭时, 真主把犹太人集合起来带到巴勒斯坦的许约才将完成。这是明显违反理智的。因为当这个世界将不存在, 犹太人如何还能到巴勒斯坦。所以这里 اَلْاٰخِرَة 所形容的名词不可能是 اَلْحَيَاةْ (生命), 要依照前后文气采取适当的其他名词。
وَبِالْاٰخِرَةِ هُمْ يُوْقِنُوْنَ 一句中 اَلْاٰخِرَة 一字能有几个被其形容的名词。例如: (1) اَلدَّارُ الْاٰخِرَة (最后的归宿); (2) اَلْحَيَاةُ الْاٰخِرَة (死后的生命); (3) اَلْبَعْثَةُ الْاٰخِرَة (复生日和穆圣的第二期使命)。(请阅拙著 «对我编译阿汉对照 «古兰经» 及其注释方面之积极性与消极性评论»第二章第五节关于穆圣的第二期使命和 «古兰经» 第62章第3节有关注释。 (4) اَلنَّشْاَةُ الْاٰخِرَة (伊斯
1兰教的复兴), (5) اَلرِّسَالَةُ الْاٰخِرَة (后来的启示) تَاجُ الْعُرُوْس 记载 اَلرِّسَالَةُ 的意思是 اَلْوَحْیُ (启示),所以 اَلْاٰخِرَة 一字可以指后来的启示而这句的意思是敬畏者坚信启示在穆圣以后直到复生日将继续下降。
从上述形容词 اَلْاٰخِرَة和它的五个被形容的名词的说明, 可知从 وَبِالْاٰخِرَةِ هُمْ يُوْقِنُوْنَ 一句的意思不仅是敬畏者坚信死后的世界、死后的生命、死后的日子或复生日, 同时也能有其他几种意思, 特别是意指«古兰经» 62章中所预言的穆圣的后期使命和他的代理人主许迈喜合将在今世的 اَلْاٰخِرَة (后期) 于 اٰخَرِيْن (另一群人) 中到来的喜讯, 而敬畏者应坚信这项诺言在今世的后期完成。这是敬畏者的象征。敬畏者应当依照经训和阿文理解 اَلْاٰخِرَة 一字包括一切将来或后来的事物。要特别注意到«古兰经»中每次叙述 اٰخَرِيْن (后者或后来者) 总是指今世的后来者。后来者与先来者在其所存在时期有先后之别。今世先期来的人称为先来者, 今世后期来的人称为后来者。两世之间相对之下有今世、后世之称, 今世的两个时期之间相对之下也有先后世代之称。今世后期的人称为后来者, 死后的世界称为 اَلْاٰخِرَة。今世的后来世界为什么不可称为今世的 اَلْاٰخِرَة (后者)? «古兰经» 说:
ثُلَّةٌ مِّنَ الْاَوَّلِیْنَ۔ وَ ثُلَّةٌ مِّنَ الْاٰخِرِیْنَ
(有一大部分是先前的人们。还有一大部分是后来的人们)。这两部分人在今世中是先后两期的人。后来的人阿文叫 اٰخَرِيْن, 做为形容词的 اَلْاٰخِرَة (后者) 其所形容的词可以是死后的日子, 也可以是今世的后来日子。穆圣在今世的后来的一夥人中于今世的后期再次来临的预言«古兰经» 有明文记载。«古兰经» 说:
هُوَ الَّذِیْ بَعَثَ فِی الْاُمِّیّٖنَ رَسُوْلًا مِّنْهُمْ…وَّ اٰخَرِیْنَ مِنْهُمْ لَمَّا یَلْحَقُوْا بِهِمْؕ وَ هُوَ الْعَزِیْزُ الْحَكِیْمُ
“他 (安拉) 就在文盲中派遣了他们同夥的一位使者 (穆圣) ……他 (安拉) 将派遣他 (穆圣) 到他们中另外一群人那里去, 那一群人还没有与他们会合。” (62:3-4)
这项预言明显指出穆圣是今世先后两个世代的使者, 后代的人称为 اٰخَرِيْن, 由于他们生于今世的后期与前期的人们不能彼此会面。但所有信仰伊斯兰教、信仰 «古兰经» 的人们应当坚信这一预言和许约。这项许约包括以下四点: (1) 在今世的时期中将有一个 اَلْاٰخِرَة (后者) 即后来的世代, 这个世代的人类称其为 اٰخَرِيْن (后来者); (2) 穆圣的第二使命便在这个后期 (后-世代) 完成; (3) 穆圣不能重来今世, 依照经训的预言, 这使命将由主许迈喜合、受道教长完成。 (4) 在穆圣后期使命时代里也必有真主下降的启示, 所以 اَلْاٰخِرَة 顺理成章地可以解为真主认为敬畏的人必坚信穆圣的后期 (后-世代) 来临并根据经训中的预言坚信主许迈喜合和受道教长的来临和将来的启示。
可是有些短见的学者以为我把 اَلْاٰخِرَة 译为 “将来的-切受约事物” 是纂改«古兰经»。其实如上所述 “将来的-切受约事物” 包括坚信死后的生命、穆圣后期的使命和后期的启示。并没有纂改 «古兰经»。可是我们避免由于他们的寡识短见可能在穆民大众中造成的误解, 将本书中 اَلْاٰخِرَة 一词译为” 将来的-切受约事物” 改为后世。但在此要说明者:我们这里所用后世这个词的意思是死后的日子和生命, 也指在今世的后期中穆圣复兴伊斯兰教的使命、他的代理人主许迈喜合和真主为完成伊斯兰教的后期的使命而下降的一切启示。因为根据汉语, 后世这个词古来就有以下两个意义: (1) 后代、以后的时代。«易•辞下»: “上古穴居而野处, 后世圣人易之以宫室。” (2) 后裔。«史记: 秦始皇纪»:” (大义休明, 垂于后世, 师承勿革。” 所以我们所用的后世一词: 指穆斯林共知的死后的日子和生命, 也指穆圣是后期使者和人类的后代作为穆圣的另一群人参加伊斯兰教。而且这个译词有助于中国文化和伊斯兰教的文化交流。
آیت میں واؤ ہے جس کے معنے ’’اور‘‘کے ہیں۔ ہم نے ’’اور‘‘کی بجائے ’’یا ‘‘استعمال کیا ہے تاکہ مفہوم آسانی سے سمجھ آ سکے۔
6:93; 27:4; 31:5.
2:137, 286; 3:200; 4:61, 137, 163; 5:60.
Belief in the Holy Prophet is the central point so far as belief in the Prophets of God is concerned (2:286; 4:66, 4:137).
Islam makes it obligatory upon its followers to believe in the Divine origin of the teachings of all previous Prophets because God sent His Messengers to all peoples (13:8; 35:25).
Al-Akhirah means, (a) the Last Abode, i.e. the next life; (b) it may also signify the revelation which is to follow. This second meaning of the word finds further exposition in 62:3, 4 where the Qur’an speaks of two advents of the Holy Prophet. His first advent took place among the Arabs in the 7th century of the Christian era when the Qur’an was revealed to him; and his second advent was to take place in the Latter Days in the person of one of his followers. This prophecy found its fulfilment in the person of Ahmad, the Promised Messiah and Founder of the Ahmadiyya Movement.
2:137, 286; 3:200; 4:61, 137, 163; 5:60.
4:70; 7:36; 61:7; 62:4.
Important Words:
انزل (has been revealed) is derived from نزل which means, he descended; or he came down. The literal meaning of the transitive form انزل would, therefore, be, he sent down, or he caused to descend. Figuratively, however, the word has come to be used about anything bestowed by God on man. God being high, everything that comes from Him may be said to descend from above. When used with reference to God’s Word, انزل would mean, He revealed. Thus we say, انزل الله كلامه in the sense of اوحی i.e. God revealed His word (Aqrab).
الآخرة (what is yet to come) is derived from اخر. They say اخرہ i.e. he put it back; he put it behind; he postponed it. The word الآخرة which is the feminine of الآخر i.e. the last one or the latter one, is used as an epithet or an adjective opposed to الاول i.e. the first one. الآخر with a different vowel-point in the central letter, means, "the other" or "another" (Aqrab). The object which the adjective الآخرة in the verse qualifies is understood, most commentators taking it to be الدار, the full expression thus being الدار الآخرة (the last abode). The context, however, shows that here the word understood is not الدارbut الرسالة i.e. الرسالة الآخرة (the message or revelation which is to come). The word; الآخرة has, therefore, been rightly translated here as "that (i.e. the revelation) which is yet to come".
یوقنون (they have firm faith) is derived from ایقن which again is derived from یقن i.e. it became clear and established. ایقن الامر means, he knew the matter well and made sure of it; he was certain about it. یقین means, certainty; becoming sure of a thing beyond doubt; anything sure and established (Aqrab).
Commentary:
This verse describes three more qualities of a متقی i.e. a righteous person. In the previous verse mention was made of faith in general. But as a true believer seeks to know the details of تقوی (righteousness) in order to perfect his faith, he is told here that for its consummation he must believe in the Holy Prophet and through him in the previous Prophets, and must at the same time believe in "what is yet to come". Thus, belief in the Holy Prophet is the central point so far as belief in the Prophets of God is concerned, and no person can become متقی (a truly righteous person) unless he believes in the Holy Prophet.
From the words, that which has been revealed to thee, quite an erroneous inference is sometimes drawn to the effect that it is belief in the Quran and not belief in the Holy Prophet that is enjoined. This view the Quran forcefully contradicts. Besides making it clear in several places that belief in the Prophet is as essential as belief in the Book (e.g.2:286; 4:66; 4:137), the Quran makes the point clear in another way also. At one place we have, He it is Who has sent down to you the Book clearly explained (6:115), and at another, and in like manner have We sent down the Book to thee(O Prophet) (29:48). The fact that God sometimes speaks of the Quran as having been sent to the people and sometimes to the Prophet is not without point. In fact, the difference in construction is full of meaning; for where the Quran is spoken of as having been sent to the people, the intention is to point out that the Quranic teaching is suitable and appropriate for them and is meant for their good; and where the Quran is spoken of as having been sent to the Prophet, the intention is to emphasize that he is not merely the bearer of a message but is the person best fitted to explain the message he has brought and to become an exemplar of the teaching contained in the message. Elsewhere God says, Allah knows best where to place His message (6:125), which is a clear proof of the fact that a Prophet is not merely the bearer of a message, but is selected by God for a higher purpose, i.e. to become a model for his followers; otherwise, anybody can be sent as a bearer of a message and the question of special selection does not arise.
The words, and that which was revealed before thee, illustrate a special characteristic of Islam, i.e. it not only recognizes the truth of all previous Prophets but makes it obligatory upon its followers to believe in the Divine origin of the teachings they brought with them (see also 13:8; 35:25). But it must be remembered that Islam is a complete and final teaching which has superseded all previous teachings. Belief in them, therefore, is only in the sense of reverence for them and not in the sense that a Muslim should act upon them. That is why in the verse under comment God mentions the earlier Scriptures after the Quran and not before it, as the chronological order required, so that the attention of the believers may be drawn to the fact that belief in the previous books is based on the Quran and is not independent of it.
According to the Quran (35:25), Prophets have appeared among all peoples and all nations and we are commanded to believe in all previous revelations, and thus an effective step has been taken to promote peace and harmony among the followers of different religions. The verse applies to no particular Book. Any earlier Book which claims Divine origin and has been accepted for a long time and by a large section of mankind to be the Word of God falls within the meaning of this verse.
The word الآخرة (what is yet to come) means either "the message or revelation which is to follow" or "the Last Abode", i.e. the next life. Of these two meanings the first is more applicable here; for it fits in with the other two parts of the verse which speak of God’s revelations. In this connection it is also noteworthy that while the word ایمان has been used in reference to the past and present revelations, the word یقین has been used in reference to the future ones. This is because ایمان relates to something definite and determined, and as the future revelation was not yet definite and determined at the time when the verse was revealed, so the word یقین was used for it.
The subject of the latter part of this verse, referred to in the words, what is yet to come, finds further exposition in 62:3, 4 where the Quran speaks of two advents of the Holy Prophet. His first advent took place among the Arabs in the 7th century of the Christian era when the Quran was revealed to him; and his second advent was to take place in the latter days of the world in the person of one of his followers who was to come in his spirit and power. This prophecy found its fulfilment in the person of Ahmad, the Promised Messiah and Founder of the Ahmadiyya Movement in Islam, in whose advent have been fulfilled also the prophecies of other Prophets regarding the appearance of a World-Messenger in the Latter Days.
a
2:137, 286; 3:200; 4:61, 137, 163; 5:60.
b
6:93; 27:4; 31:5.
24
就相信主的众先知而言, 相信穆圣, 是信仰的中心 (2:286; 4:66, 137)。
25
伊斯兰教要他的信者们必须相信所有以前的先知所教导的安拉的起源, 因为安拉向所有民族都派遣了使者。(13:8; 35:25)
26
اَلْاٰخِرَة (Al-Akhirah): «古兰经» 包罗万象, 内涵丰富, 具有许多义理。本节中اَلْاٰخِرَة 一字的字意是后者; 后来者。属于形容词。其所形容的词被省略了。有几个字在这里可以做其所形容的名词。把它所形容的那个省略的名词认为只能是 يَوْم (yaum, 日子) 或 اَلْحَيَاة (Al-Hayat, 生命), 并限定日子或生命只是指示死后时期和日子或死后的生命。اَلْاٰخِرَة 这个形容词只能译为 “死后的日子” 、“死后的世界” 、 “死后的生命” 、或 “复生日”, 是错误的。真主向穆圣说:
وَ لَلْاٰخِرَةُ خَیْرٌ لَّكَ مِنَ الْاُوْلٰی
“看啊!你后来的每一时刻都将好过其先前的时刻。” (93:5) 这里 اَلْاٰخِرَة 一字不能作死后的生命解。否则, 不能作为穆圣今世成功的客观证据。在17:105 中真主说:
فَاِذَا جَآءَ وَعْدُ الْاٰخِرَةِ جِئْنَا بِكُمْ لَفِیْفًا
我向犹太人作了许约, 当后者的语言实现时, 我将把他们带到巴勒斯坦。在这里 اَلْاٰخِرَة (后者) 一字所形容的名词不可能是 اَلْحَيَاةْ (生命)。否则, 这句的意思将是: 当今世将毁灭时, 真主把犹太人集合起来带到巴勒斯坦的许约才将完成。这是明显违反理智的。因为当这个世界将不存在, 犹太人如何还能到巴勒斯坦。所以这里 اَلْاٰخِرَة 所形容的名词不可能是 اَلْحَيَاةْ (生命), 要依照前后文气采取适当的其他名词。
وَبِالْاٰخِرَةِ هُمْ يُوْقِنُوْنَ 一句中 اَلْاٰخِرَة 一字能有几个被其形容的名词。例如: (1) اَلدَّارُ الْاٰخِرَة (最后的归宿); (2) اَلْحَيَاةُ الْاٰخِرَة (死后的生命); (3) اَلْبَعْثَةُ الْاٰخِرَة (复生日和穆圣的第二期使命)。(请阅拙著 «对我编译阿汉对照 «古兰经» 及其注释方面之积极性与消极性评论»第二章第五节关于穆圣的第二期使命和 «古兰经» 第62章第3节有关注释。 (4) اَلنَّشْاَةُ الْاٰخِرَة (伊斯
1兰教的复兴), (5) اَلرِّسَالَةُ الْاٰخِرَة (后来的启示) تَاجُ الْعُرُوْس 记载 اَلرِّسَالَةُ 的意思是 اَلْوَحْیُ (启示),所以 اَلْاٰخِرَة 一字可以指后来的启示而这句的意思是敬畏者坚信启示在穆圣以后直到复生日将继续下降。
从上述形容词 اَلْاٰخِرَة和它的五个被形容的名词的说明, 可知从 وَبِالْاٰخِرَةِ هُمْ يُوْقِنُوْنَ 一句的意思不仅是敬畏者坚信死后的世界、死后的生命、死后的日子或复生日, 同时也能有其他几种意思, 特别是意指«古兰经» 62章中所预言的穆圣的后期使命和他的代理人主许迈喜合将在今世的 اَلْاٰخِرَة (后期) 于 اٰخَرِيْن (另一群人) 中到来的喜讯, 而敬畏者应坚信这项诺言在今世的后期完成。这是敬畏者的象征。敬畏者应当依照经训和阿文理解 اَلْاٰخِرَة 一字包括一切将来或后来的事物。要特别注意到«古兰经»中每次叙述 اٰخَرِيْن (后者或后来者) 总是指今世的后来者。后来者与先来者在其所存在时期有先后之别。今世先期来的人称为先来者, 今世后期来的人称为后来者。两世之间相对之下有今世、后世之称, 今世的两个时期之间相对之下也有先后世代之称。今世后期的人称为后来者, 死后的世界称为 اَلْاٰخِرَة。今世的后来世界为什么不可称为今世的 اَلْاٰخِرَة (后者)? «古兰经» 说:
ثُلَّةٌ مِّنَ الْاَوَّلِیْنَ۔ وَ ثُلَّةٌ مِّنَ الْاٰخِرِیْنَ
(有一大部分是先前的人们。还有一大部分是后来的人们)。这两部分人在今世中是先后两期的人。后来的人阿文叫 اٰخَرِيْن, 做为形容词的 اَلْاٰخِرَة (后者) 其所形容的词可以是死后的日子, 也可以是今世的后来日子。穆圣在今世的后来的一夥人中于今世的后期再次来临的预言«古兰经» 有明文记载。«古兰经» 说:
هُوَ الَّذِیْ بَعَثَ فِی الْاُمِّیّٖنَ رَسُوْلًا مِّنْهُمْ…وَّ اٰخَرِیْنَ مِنْهُمْ لَمَّا یَلْحَقُوْا بِهِمْؕ وَ هُوَ الْعَزِیْزُ الْحَكِیْمُ
“他 (安拉) 就在文盲中派遣了他们同夥的一位使者 (穆圣) ……他 (安拉) 将派遣他 (穆圣) 到他们中另外一群人那里去, 那一群人还没有与他们会合。” (62:3-4)
这项预言明显指出穆圣是今世先后两个世代的使者, 后代的人称为 اٰخَرِيْن, 由于他们生于今世的后期与前期的人们不能彼此会面。但所有信仰伊斯兰教、信仰 «古兰经» 的人们应当坚信这一预言和许约。这项许约包括以下四点: (1) 在今世的时期中将有一个 اَلْاٰخِرَة (后者) 即后来的世代, 这个世代的人类称其为 اٰخَرِيْن (后来者); (2) 穆圣的第二使命便在这个后期 (后-世代) 完成; (3) 穆圣不能重来今世, 依照经训的预言, 这使命将由主许迈喜合、受道教长完成。 (4) 在穆圣后期使命时代里也必有真主下降的启示, 所以 اَلْاٰخِرَة 顺理成章地可以解为真主认为敬畏的人必坚信穆圣的后期 (后-世代) 来临并根据经训中的预言坚信主许迈喜合和受道教长的来临和将来的启示。
可是有些短见的学者以为我把 اَلْاٰخِرَة 译为 “将来的-切受约事物” 是纂改«古兰经»。其实如上所述 “将来的-切受约事物” 包括坚信死后的生命、穆圣后期的使命和后期的启示。并没有纂改 «古兰经»。可是我们避免由于他们的寡识短见可能在穆民大众中造成的误解, 将本书中 اَلْاٰخِرَة 一词译为” 将来的-切受约事物” 改为后世。但在此要说明者:我们这里所用后世这个词的意思是死后的日子和生命, 也指在今世的后期中穆圣复兴伊斯兰教的使命、他的代理人主许迈喜合和真主为完成伊斯兰教的后期的使命而下降的一切启示。因为根据汉语, 后世这个词古来就有以下两个意义: (1) 后代、以后的时代。«易•辞下»: “上古穴居而野处, 后世圣人易之以宫室。” (2) 后裔。«史记: 秦始皇纪»:” (大义休明, 垂于后世, 师承勿革。” 所以我们所用的后世一词: 指穆斯林共知的死后的日子和生命, 也指穆圣是后期使者和人类的后代作为穆圣的另一群人参加伊斯兰教。而且这个译词有助于中国文化和伊斯兰教的文化交流。
3
آیت میں واؤ ہے جس کے معنے ’’اور‘‘کے ہیں۔ ہم نے ’’اور‘‘کی بجائے ’’یا ‘‘استعمال کیا ہے تاکہ مفہوم آسانی سے سمجھ آ سکے۔
a
2:137, 286; 3:200; 4:61, 137, 163; 5:60.
b
4:70; 7:36; 61:7; 62:4.
11
Important Words:
انزل (has been revealed) is derived from نزل which means, he descended; or he came down. The literal meaning of the transitive form انزل would, therefore, be, he sent down, or he caused to descend. Figuratively, however, the word has come to be used about anything bestowed by God on man. God being high, everything that comes from Him may be said to descend from above. When used with reference to God’s Word, انزل would mean, He revealed. Thus we say, انزل الله كلامه in the sense of اوحی i.e. God revealed His word (Aqrab).
الآخرة (what is yet to come) is derived from اخر. They say اخرہ i.e. he put it back; he put it behind; he postponed it. The word الآخرة which is the feminine of الآخر i.e. the last one or the latter one, is used as an epithet or an adjective opposed to الاول i.e. the first one. الآخر with a different vowel-point in the central letter, means, "the other" or "another" (Aqrab). The object which the adjective الآخرة in the verse qualifies is understood, most commentators taking it to be الدار, the full expression thus being الدار الآخرة (the last abode). The context, however, shows that here the word understood is not الدارbut الرسالة i.e. الرسالة الآخرة (the message or revelation which is to come). The word; الآخرة has, therefore, been rightly translated here as "that (i.e. the revelation) which is yet to come".
یوقنون (they have firm faith) is derived from ایقن which again is derived from یقن i.e. it became clear and established. ایقن الامر means, he knew the matter well and made sure of it; he was certain about it. یقین means, certainty; becoming sure of a thing beyond doubt; anything sure and established (Aqrab).
Commentary:
This verse describes three more qualities of a متقی i.e. a righteous person. In the previous verse mention was made of faith in general. But as a true believer seeks to know the details of تقوی (righteousness) in order to perfect his faith, he is told here that for its consummation he must believe in the Holy Prophet and through him in the previous Prophets, and must at the same time believe in "what is yet to come". Thus, belief in the Holy Prophet is the central point so far as belief in the Prophets of God is concerned, and no person can become متقی (a truly righteous person) unless he believes in the Holy Prophet.
From the words, that which has been revealed to thee, quite an erroneous inference is sometimes drawn to the effect that it is belief in the Quran and not belief in the Holy Prophet that is enjoined. This view the Quran forcefully contradicts. Besides making it clear in several places that belief in the Prophet is as essential as belief in the Book (e.g.2:286; 4:66; 4:137), the Quran makes the point clear in another way also. At one place we have, He it is Who has sent down to you the Book clearly explained (6:115), and at another, and in like manner have We sent down the Book to thee(O Prophet) (29:48). The fact that God sometimes speaks of the Quran as having been sent to the people and sometimes to the Prophet is not without point. In fact, the difference in construction is full of meaning; for where the Quran is spoken of as having been sent to the people, the intention is to point out that the Quranic teaching is suitable and appropriate for them and is meant for their good; and where the Quran is spoken of as having been sent to the Prophet, the intention is to emphasize that he is not merely the bearer of a message but is the person best fitted to explain the message he has brought and to become an exemplar of the teaching contained in the message. Elsewhere God says, Allah knows best where to place His message (6:125), which is a clear proof of the fact that a Prophet is not merely the bearer of a message, but is selected by God for a higher purpose, i.e. to become a model for his followers; otherwise, anybody can be sent as a bearer of a message and the question of special selection does not arise.
The words, and that which was revealed before thee, illustrate a special characteristic of Islam, i.e. it not only recognizes the truth of all previous Prophets but makes it obligatory upon its followers to believe in the Divine origin of the teachings they brought with them (see also 13:8; 35:25). But it must be remembered that Islam is a complete and final teaching which has superseded all previous teachings. Belief in them, therefore, is only in the sense of reverence for them and not in the sense that a Muslim should act upon them. That is why in the verse under comment God mentions the earlier Scriptures after the Quran and not before it, as the chronological order required, so that the attention of the believers may be drawn to the fact that belief in the previous books is based on the Quran and is not independent of it.
According to the Quran (35:25), Prophets have appeared among all peoples and all nations and we are commanded to believe in all previous revelations, and thus an effective step has been taken to promote peace and harmony among the followers of different religions. The verse applies to no particular Book. Any earlier Book which claims Divine origin and has been accepted for a long time and by a large section of mankind to be the Word of God falls within the meaning of this verse.
The word الآخرة (what is yet to come) means either "the message or revelation which is to follow" or "the Last Abode", i.e. the next life. Of these two meanings the first is more applicable here; for it fits in with the other two parts of the verse which speak of God’s revelations. In this connection it is also noteworthy that while the word ایمان has been used in reference to the past and present revelations, the word یقین has been used in reference to the future ones. This is because ایمان relates to something definite and determined, and as the future revelation was not yet definite and determined at the time when the verse was revealed, so the word یقین was used for it.
The subject of the latter part of this verse, referred to in the words, what is yet to come, finds further exposition in 62:3, 4 where the Quran speaks of two advents of the Holy Prophet. His first advent took place among the Arabs in the 7th century of the Christian era when the Quran was revealed to him; and his second advent was to take place in the latter days of the world in the person of one of his followers who was to come in his spirit and power. This prophecy found its fulfilment in the person of Ahmad, the Promised Messiah and Founder of the Ahmadiyya Movement in Islam, in whose advent have been fulfilled also the prophecies of other Prophets regarding the appearance of a World-Messenger in the Latter Days.
a
6:93; 27:4; 31:5.
b
2:137, 286; 3:200; 4:61, 137, 163; 5:60.
23
Belief in the Holy Prophet is the central point so far as belief in the Prophets of God is concerned (2:286; 4:66, 4:137).
24
Islam makes it obligatory upon its followers to believe in the Divine origin of the teachings of all previous Prophets because God sent His Messengers to all peoples (13:8; 35:25).
25
Al-Akhirah means, (a) the Last Abode, i.e. the next life; (b) it may also signify the revelation which is to follow. This second meaning of the word finds further exposition in 62:3, 4 where the Qur’an speaks of two advents of the Holy Prophet. His first advent took place among the Arabs in the 7th century of the Christian era when the Qur’an was revealed to him; and his second advent was to take place in the Latter Days in the person of one of his followers. This prophecy found its fulfilment in the person of Ahmad, the Promised Messiah and Founder of the Ahmadiyya Movement.
يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلنَّاسُ ٱعْبُدُوا۟ رَبَّكُمُ ٱلَّذِى خَلَقَكُمْ وَٱلَّذِينَ مِن قَبْلِكُمْ لَعَلَّكُمْ تَتَّقُونَ
4:2, 37; 5:73, 118; 16:37; 22:78; 51:57.
This verse contains the first commandment of God given in the Qur’an. As the words show the commandment is addressed to all mankind and not to Arabs only, which indicates that Islam, from the very beginning, claimed to be a universal religion. It abolished the ideal of national religion and conceived mankind as one brotherhood.
4:2, 37; 5:73, 118; 16:37; 22:78; 51:57.
Important Words:
رب (Lord). For the meaning of this word see note on 1:2. In the present verse God Himself explains the meaning of the word رب by saying ربكم الذی خلقكم i.e. your Rabb is He Who has created you. This meaning, though absolutely correct, is not found in the ordinary lexicons, which interpret it simply as Lord and Sustainer. The full meaning of the word thus turns out to be "Lord, Creator and Sustainer".
لعل (so that) is generally used to denote expectation, or doubt combined with expectation. That is why Christian translators have generally rendered it as, haply or peradventure or perhaps. But this rendering is clearly wrong in the present context; for, as explained by Lane, the word when used by God generally signifies not doubt but certainty. In fact, God’s announcements are in the nature of royal proclamations in which such words are used not to express doubt resulting from ignorance but to express hope born of certainty. The word has therefore been rightly rendered here as, that or so that. Sometimes it may be rendered as, may be.
Commentary:
As we have seen, the Quran began with the claim that the best Book of guidance can only come from a Being Who is All-Knowing and that such a being is Allah, the Creator and Sustainer of the world, Who has sent down the Quran for the guidance and perfection of mankind. This Book is (1) a perfect treasure-house of all that is good and valuable, (2) is free from all defects, and (3) does not stop short at any stage of spiritual progress but carries men and women of all grades of righteousness to higher and still higher stages, and so on to unlimited progress. Having made this claim, the Quran proceeds to give a brief description of the three classes: believers, disbelievers and hypocrites.
Attention is then drawn to the fact that as the Quran enables the righteous to make greater and greater spiritual progress, everybody should try to become one of the righteous and earn the spiritual benefits of the Quran. Says the Quran: O ye men! worship your Lord (i.e. enter into His service)…that you may become righteous.
Worship demands complete subjection, and the sense of subjection is generated in its perfection only when one and one’s forefathers are all under obligation. History tells us that lives have been sacrificed for the sake of cruel kings simply because the ancestors of those kings had done some good to the ancestors of the people making the sacrifice. The feeling of obligation becomes stronger as generation after generation is laid under obligation. Therefore, it is a perfectly natural appeal which is made in the verse in the words: O ye men, worship your Lord Who created you and those who were before you.
The verse then proceeds to make it clear that the object of worship is not merely recognising and acknowledging God. If it were so, the worship of idols, however unjust, would not be so injurious. God is worshipped for the sake of attaining righteousness and spiritual perfection. How can false gods make man perfect spiritually, when they have not created him and have no knowledge of his powers or limitations?
The words لعلكم تتقون (that you may become righteous) clearly point out that the command to worship is not for the benefit of God. It is for the benefit of man himself. Those who regard the Law as a curse look upon it only as a mere show of authority on the part of God. But the Quran clearly states that God’s commands are for the guidance of man. They help to nurture all his latent powers. Such a teaching cannot be a curse. He who warns a blind person of a pit lying in front of him does not curse him. A doctor who prescribes for a suffering patient does no wrong to him.
There is another point to be remembered. The word رب means, He Who creates and then develops by degrees. At the birth of man, the foundation is laid for his perfect future development. If worship, on his part, does not lead to the perfection of his latent powers, it is no worship at all. It is a mere facade or a lifeless form.
The clause لعلكم تتقون (that you may become righteous) teaches us to avoid not only those things which impair man’s relation with God but also those which impair the relation between man and man. He who regards God as his Creator and Sustainer will look to Him for his needs and will not cast greedy looks at the wealth of others. He can never be untrue to his fellow men, and will remain always at peace with them. The Companions of the Holy Prophet lived for God and looked up only to Him. The peace which the world witnessed in their time remains unparalleled. Indeed there can be no peace, unless we are devoted to God. If Europe had been so devoted, she would not have been suffering from the mortal disease now eating into her vitals—the hunger for land and wealth.
This verse contains the first command of God given in the Quran. As the words, O ye men, indicate, this command to worship God is addressed to all mankind and not to Arabs only, which shows that Islam, from the very beginning, claimed to be universal. It abolished the idea of national religion and conceived mankind as one brotherhood.
The question "Who is to be worshipped" is answered by the word رب (Creator) in order to disavow false gods who have created nothing and are themselves created.
Men are actuated either by love or fear. In this verse appeal is made to both motives. Love either springs from حسن i.e. beauty of the beloved, or from a feeling of احسان i.e. favour received from same one. God is beauty and the source of all beauty. One aspect of His beauty is that He creates man in a very low condition and then by degrees develops and raises him to the highest mark of perfection. The feeling of obligation is appealed to by saying "Your Lord is He Who created you and your fathers".
It is curious that when Jesus was asked, "Which is the great commandment in the law?" he said, "Thou shalt love the Lord thy God with all thy heart, with all thy soul, and with all thy mind. This is the great and first commandment" (Matt. 22:36, 37). But this commandment which Jesus calls the great commandment in the Law is not presented in the beginning of the New Testament. It comes much later and then only when people asked Jesus about it, although as regards importance it should have been given the first place. In the Old Testament also this commandment occurs in later chapters. So is the case with other Scriptures. None gives it the first place. Only the Quran does so.
a
4:2, 37; 5:73, 118; 16:37; 22:78; 51:57.
29O
这节经文包含 «古兰经» 中主的第一条命谕。由于这些话表明这一命谕不只是对阿拉伯人而是对全人类发出的, 这就指出伊斯兰教从一开始就声称是一门全世界的宗教。它就取消了国教这一种观念, 相信人类彼此是兄弟关系。
a
4:2, 37; 5:73, 118; 16:37; 22:78; 51:57.
28
Important Words:
رب (Lord). For the meaning of this word see note on 1:2. In the present verse God Himself explains the meaning of the word رب by saying ربكم الذی خلقكم i.e. your Rabb is He Who has created you. This meaning, though absolutely correct, is not found in the ordinary lexicons, which interpret it simply as Lord and Sustainer. The full meaning of the word thus turns out to be "Lord, Creator and Sustainer".
لعل (so that) is generally used to denote expectation, or doubt combined with expectation. That is why Christian translators have generally rendered it as, haply or peradventure or perhaps. But this rendering is clearly wrong in the present context; for, as explained by Lane, the word when used by God generally signifies not doubt but certainty. In fact, God’s announcements are in the nature of royal proclamations in which such words are used not to express doubt resulting from ignorance but to express hope born of certainty. The word has therefore been rightly rendered here as, that or so that. Sometimes it may be rendered as, may be.
Commentary:
As we have seen, the Quran began with the claim that the best Book of guidance can only come from a Being Who is All-Knowing and that such a being is Allah, the Creator and Sustainer of the world, Who has sent down the Quran for the guidance and perfection of mankind. This Book is (1) a perfect treasure-house of all that is good and valuable, (2) is free from all defects, and (3) does not stop short at any stage of spiritual progress but carries men and women of all grades of righteousness to higher and still higher stages, and so on to unlimited progress. Having made this claim, the Quran proceeds to give a brief description of the three classes: believers, disbelievers and hypocrites.
Attention is then drawn to the fact that as the Quran enables the righteous to make greater and greater spiritual progress, everybody should try to become one of the righteous and earn the spiritual benefits of the Quran. Says the Quran: O ye men! worship your Lord (i.e. enter into His service)…that you may become righteous.
Worship demands complete subjection, and the sense of subjection is generated in its perfection only when one and one’s forefathers are all under obligation. History tells us that lives have been sacrificed for the sake of cruel kings simply because the ancestors of those kings had done some good to the ancestors of the people making the sacrifice. The feeling of obligation becomes stronger as generation after generation is laid under obligation. Therefore, it is a perfectly natural appeal which is made in the verse in the words: O ye men, worship your Lord Who created you and those who were before you.
The verse then proceeds to make it clear that the object of worship is not merely recognising and acknowledging God. If it were so, the worship of idols, however unjust, would not be so injurious. God is worshipped for the sake of attaining righteousness and spiritual perfection. How can false gods make man perfect spiritually, when they have not created him and have no knowledge of his powers or limitations?
The words لعلكم تتقون (that you may become righteous) clearly point out that the command to worship is not for the benefit of God. It is for the benefit of man himself. Those who regard the Law as a curse look upon it only as a mere show of authority on the part of God. But the Quran clearly states that God’s commands are for the guidance of man. They help to nurture all his latent powers. Such a teaching cannot be a curse. He who warns a blind person of a pit lying in front of him does not curse him. A doctor who prescribes for a suffering patient does no wrong to him.
There is another point to be remembered. The word رب means, He Who creates and then develops by degrees. At the birth of man, the foundation is laid for his perfect future development. If worship, on his part, does not lead to the perfection of his latent powers, it is no worship at all. It is a mere facade or a lifeless form.
The clause لعلكم تتقون (that you may become righteous) teaches us to avoid not only those things which impair man’s relation with God but also those which impair the relation between man and man. He who regards God as his Creator and Sustainer will look to Him for his needs and will not cast greedy looks at the wealth of others. He can never be untrue to his fellow men, and will remain always at peace with them. The Companions of the Holy Prophet lived for God and looked up only to Him. The peace which the world witnessed in their time remains unparalleled. Indeed there can be no peace, unless we are devoted to God. If Europe had been so devoted, she would not have been suffering from the mortal disease now eating into her vitals—the hunger for land and wealth.
This verse contains the first command of God given in the Quran. As the words, O ye men, indicate, this command to worship God is addressed to all mankind and not to Arabs only, which shows that Islam, from the very beginning, claimed to be universal. It abolished the idea of national religion and conceived mankind as one brotherhood.
The question "Who is to be worshipped" is answered by the word رب (Creator) in order to disavow false gods who have created nothing and are themselves created.
Men are actuated either by love or fear. In this verse appeal is made to both motives. Love either springs from حسن i.e. beauty of the beloved, or from a feeling of احسان i.e. favour received from same one. God is beauty and the source of all beauty. One aspect of His beauty is that He creates man in a very low condition and then by degrees develops and raises him to the highest mark of perfection. The feeling of obligation is appealed to by saying "Your Lord is He Who created you and your fathers".
It is curious that when Jesus was asked, "Which is the great commandment in the law?" he said, "Thou shalt love the Lord thy God with all thy heart, with all thy soul, and with all thy mind. This is the great and first commandment" (Matt. 22:36, 37). But this commandment which Jesus calls the great commandment in the Law is not presented in the beginning of the New Testament. It comes much later and then only when people asked Jesus about it, although as regards importance it should have been given the first place. In the Old Testament also this commandment occurs in later chapters. So is the case with other Scriptures. None gives it the first place. Only the Quran does so.
a
4:2, 37; 5:73, 118; 16:37; 22:78; 51:57.
42
This verse contains the first commandment of God given in the Qur’an. As the words show the commandment is addressed to all mankind and not to Arabs only, which indicates that Islam, from the very beginning, claimed to be a universal religion. It abolished the ideal of national religion and conceived mankind as one brotherhood.
وَبَشِّرِ ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ وَعَمِلُوا۟ ٱلصَّٰلِحَٰتِ أَنَّ لَهُمْ جَنَّٰتٍ تَجْرِى مِن تَحْتِهَا ٱلْأَنْهَٰرُ ۖ كُلَّمَا رُزِقُوا۟ مِنْهَا مِن ثَمَرَةٍ رِّزْقًا ۙ قَالُوا۟ هَٰذَا ٱلَّذِى رُزِقْنَا مِن قَبْلُ ۖ وَأُتُوا۟ بِهِۦ مُتَشَٰبِهًا ۖ وَلَهُمْ فِيهَآ أَزْوَٰجٌ مُّطَهَّرَةٌ ۖ وَهُمْ فِيهَا خَٰلِدُونَ
3:16, 134, 196, 199; 4:14, 58, 123; 5:13, 86; 7:44; 9:72, 89, 100; 10:10; 13:36; 22:15, 24; 25:11; 2:18; 47:16; 58:23; 61:13; 64:10.
3:16; 4:58.
古兰经» 教导说, 每一种被创造出来的东西, 为了它充分的发展都需要一个配偶。天园中, 正直的男女将有纯洁的配偶来完成他们的精神发展, 成全他们的幸福。他们将成为哪种配偶, 只是在后世才能真正认识。
这节经文简单描绘了信教者后世将受得的酬报。批评伊斯兰教的人对这一描绘提出了各种各样的异议。这种批评的基础是, 完全误解了伊斯兰教对后世赐福的教导。«古兰经» 着重地声言人们是无法知道那些赐福的性质的 (32:18)。相传穆圣曾经说过: “没有眼睛看到过它们, 也没有耳朵听到过它们, 也没有人们的头脑能想象它们” (布哈里)。自然会产生这样一个问题:为什么后世赐福的名称要用这个世界的物质东西来称呼?这是因为 «古兰经» 中的话不是仅对智力高的人们说的, 因此要用大家都能懂得的简单的语言。在描绘后世赐福时, «古兰经» 中用的一般都是这个世界上看来是好的东西的名称, 并告诉信教者他们将在后世以较好的形式来得到所有这些东西。为了显示这种重要对照, 才使用熟悉的用词, 否则, 在今世欢乐与来生赐福之间就会没有共同的东西。而且, 根据伊斯兰教教义, 将来的生命在这种意义上并不是精神的, 即:并不只是由内心状态组成的, 即使在将来的生命, 人的灵魂也还有一个身体, 不过那个身体不是物质的。人们可由梦境形成一些这种观念。一个人在梦中见到的许多景象不能称为内心的或纯精神的, 因为在那种状态下他也有身体。有时发现他自己在流着河水的天园中, 吃着果实、喝着牛奶。很难说梦中的情况只是内心的状态。在梦中快活地喝着牛奶, 无疑是一种经验, 但没有人能说这是他在这个世界上喝的物质的牛奶。来生的精神幸福不会只是我们今世享受的主的馈赠的主观现实。我们今生有的东西仅是人们在来生将看到的主的真实馈赐的一种表现。此外,”天园” 代表信仰,”河流” 代表善行。天园无河流则不能旺盛, 信仰也不可无善行。因此, 为达到灵魂的拯救, 信仰与善行不可分离。在后世, 天园将提醒信教者们今生的信仰而河流将提醒他们的善行。他们会知道, 信仰与善行不是徒劳的。如果从 “这是我们以前受赐的” 这句话中得出结论说: 在天园中信教者将会得到他们在今生享受的这样的果实, 那是错误的。因为, 正如已说明了的那样, 这两种赏赐并不是等同的。后世的果实, 实际上是他们自身信仰品质的形象。当他们在吃这些果实时, 他们立刻认识到也记起这是他们今生信仰的果实; 他们为了感激这种情况, 就说: “这是我们以前受赐的。” 这句话也可意味着,”这是过去答应给我们的东西。”
تَجْرِیْ مِنْ تَحْتِھَا الْاَنْھٰرُ سے مراد یہ ہے کہ وہ نہریں ان باغوں سے تعلق رکھتی ہیں اور یہ ظاہر ہے کہ جس شخص کا باغ ہوگا اس میں بہنے والی نہر بھی اسی کی ملکیت ہوگی۔ پس تَجْرِیْ مِنْ تَحْتِھَا الْاَنْھٰرُ کے الفاظ رکھ کر یہ بتانا مقصود ہے کہ جنت میں بہنے والی نہریں مومنوں کی ملکیت ہوں گی۔
اَزْوَاجٌ جوڑے یعنی ایسے وجود جن کے ساتھ مل کر ان کی تمام ترقیات اور تمام آرام مکمل ہوں گے۔ قرآن کریم سے معلوم ہوتا ہے کہ سوائے ذات باری کے ہر چیز ایک جوڑے کی محتاج ہے۔ اس قاعدہ کے تحت جنتی بھی جوڑے کے محتاج ہوں گے خواہ مرد ہوں خواہ عورتیں۔ باقی رہا یہ سوال کہ وہ جوڑے کس قسم کے ہوں گے یہ تفصیل اللہ تعالیٰ کے علم میں ہے انسان اس کو تفصیلاً اسی وقت معلوم کرے گا جب وہ جنت میں جائے گا۔
3:16, 134, 196, 199; 4:14, 58, 123; 5:13, 86; 7:44; 9:72, 89, 100; 10:10; 13:36; 22:15, 24; 25:11; 2:18; 47:16; 58:23; 61:13; 64:10.
3:16; 4:58.
The Qur’an teaches that every created thing stands in need of a mate for its full development. In Paradise righteous men and women will have pure mates for perfecting their spiritual development and completing their happiness. What kind of mates these will be, will be realized only in the Hereafter.
This verse gives a brief description of the rewards which the believers will have in the next world. Critics of Islam have raised all sorts of objections to this description. The criticism is based upon a complete misunderstanding of the Islamic teaching about heavenly blessings. The Qur’an emphatically declares that it is beyond human mind to comprehend their nature (32:18). The Holy Prophet is reported to have said: "No eye has seen them, nor has any ear heard of them, nor can the mind of man conceive of them" (Bukhari). The question naturally arises, why have the blessings of Heaven been given the names used for material things in this world? This is because the address of the Qur’an is not merely to those people who are intellectually advanced. Therefore, it has used simple words which can be understood by all. While describing the heavenly blessings, the Qur’an has used the names of things generally looked upon as good in this world, and believers are told that they would get all these thi
3:16, 134, 196, 199; 4:14, 58, 123; 5:13, 86; 7:44; 9:72, 89, 100; 10:10; 13:36; 22:15, 24; 25:11; 32:20; 47:16; 58:23; 61:13; 64:10.
3:16; 4:58.
Important Words:
بشر (give glad tidings) is derived from بشر (bashshara), i.e. he gave glad tidings, which again is derived from بشر(bashara). They say بشر i.e. he laid bare its skin. Thus البشرة means, the outer and visible part of the skin. So بشر(bashshara) means, he gave or imparted news which changed the colour of the listener. The word has generally come to be used in connection with good or happy news. But it is also sometimes used in connection with bad news (e.g. 3:22). بشیر means, one who announces good news to a people or a person. All Prophets are spoken of as بشیر and نذیر i.e. givers of good news to those who believe in them and givers of bad news to those who reject them (Aqrab & Mufradat).
الصالحات (good works) is the plural of الصالحة which is derived from the verb صلح (the opposite of فسد) meaning, he or it became good or suitable and proper. ھذا الشیء یصلح لك means, this thing is suitable to you or is fit or meet for you (Aqrab). So الصالحات would be used about all those deeds and actions which are not only good intrinsically but are also meet and suitable. See also under 2:12.
جنات (gardens) which is the plural of جنة (a garden) is derived from جن meaning, it veiled, concealed, or covered a thing. So جنة means, any garden having trees by which the ground is covered or concealed; an orchard or garden having luxuriousness and denseness of verdure (Aqrab & Lane). Heaven has been called جنة or garden, because: (1) the mercy of God will 'cover' its dwellers just as trees in an orchard cover the ground thereof; or (2) because the blessings of Heaven are 'hidden' from the eyes of man"; or again (3) because Heaven is like a garden in which the trees represent good faith and the streams good actions.
الانھار (streams) is the plural of نھر (nahr) or نھر (nahar). They say نھرالماء i.e. the water flowed on the earth and cut out a channel for itself. Thus نھر (nahr) or نھر (nahar) means, a channel through which a stream or a river flows; a stream or river itself. نھر (nahar) also means, abundance (Aqrab).
ازواج (mates) is the plural of زوج which signifies, anything that is one of a pair or couple; it does not mean a pair but only one of a pair, whether male or female (Aqrab). The word زوج also means, a comrade (Lane).
خالدون (shall abide) is derived fromخلد which means, he remained and lived on. خلدبمکان means, he stayed or abided in a place. خلود means, staying on, or living without change or deterioration for a long time but not necessarily forever (Aqrab & Mufradat).
Commentary:
This verse gives a brief description of the rewards which the believers will have in the next world.
Critics of Islam have raised all sorts of objections to this description. They say that: (1) The promise of such rewards is only an appeal to greed and a faith based upon greed is not worth the name. (2) The Quran promises material rewards to the believers and this is objectionable. (3) If the rewards of the next world are going to be material, then it must be supposed that the same body which one has in this life will be resurrected after death and this is against all reason, because this body perishes and the particles of one body are used in the making of several other bodies. To whom and to how many will then the same body be given in the next world? (4) Believers are promised wives in Heaven which shows that sex relations will continue in the next world. An appeal to sex is very objectionable for spiritual ends. Sex relations are necessary only for the continuation of the race in this world. Why should there be such a thing in the next? (5) The Quranic Paradise appears to be a place of luxury and sensual pleasures. There is thus nothing spiritual about the Islamic conception of the next life.
This criticism is based on a failure to understand the real Islamic teaching. The Quran has made it clear that in this life it is not possible for man to comprehend the nature of the rewards of the next. It says: No soul knows what joy of the eyes is kept hidden for them, as a reward for their actions (32:18). That is to say, whatever the Quran says about Heaven and Hell is only metaphorical. The descriptions are not to be taken in the sense in which they are ordinarily taken in this world. The Holy Prophet says of the blessings of the next world: "No eye has seen them, nor has any ear heard of them; nor can the mind of man form any conception of them" (Bukhari). If the blessings of the next life are to be like the joys of this life, we should be able to form some idea of them, no matter how remote they may be. The blessings of the next life, therefore, must be quite different from the blessings of this life.
At another place in the Quran we read: The similitude of the Heaven promised to the God-fearing is that through it flow streams; its fruit is everlasting, and so is its shade. That is the reward of those who are righteous, and the reward of the disbelievers is Fire (13:36). Now the fruit of this world is not everlasting, so in order to be everlasting the fruit of the next world as well as its streams will have to be taken as something other than material. Again we read: A similitude of the Paradise promised to the righteous: Therein are rivers of water which corrupts not; and rivers of milk of which the taste changes not; and rivers of wine, a delight to those who drink; and rivers of clarified honey (47:16). There is nothing material in this. About the wine of Heaven we read: Wherein there will be no intoxication, nor will they be exhausted thereby (37:48). Again, And their Lord will give them to drink a beverage that is pure (76:22). Thus, wine in Heaven will not only be pure itself but will purify the drinkers as well. Elsewhere the Quran says that the pure wine of Paradise will be tempered with Tasnim (83:28), which means 'abundance' and 'height '. In the cup of wine that will pass from hand to hand in Heaven God says there will be neither vanity nor sin (52:24). As against this, the wine of this world is described in the Quran as: Wine and the game of hazard and idols and divining arrows are only an abomination of Satan’s handiwork. So shun each one of them that you may prosper. Satan desires only to create enmity and hatred among you by means of wine and the game of hazard and to keep you back from the remembrance of Allah and from Prayer (5:91, 92). This proves that the wine of the next world is quite different; it is pure and purifying and nothing material.
The blessings of Heaven have indeed nothing in common with their counterparts of this world except the name. Ibn ‘Abbas, the Prophet’s cousin, also says the same thing (Jarir).
Now the question arises: Why have the blessings of Heaven been given the names used of material things in this world? This is so because Islam is meant for all kinds of people. It does not address only the intellectually advanced but also all others. Therefore it uses simple words which can be understood by all. The disbelievers used to say that the Prophet disallowed the good things of the world, and his followers were thus deprived of all blessings. Therefore, while describing the blessings in store for the Muslims, God used the names of things generally looked upon as good in this world and told the believers that they would get all these things in a better form. The water of this world spoils, but believers would have water in the next which will not spoil. Gardens are blessings but they decay; so believers will have gardens which will last forever. The unbelievers drank intoxicating wine which made them drunk and which dulled their senses; but the wine which the believers will get in Heaven will be pure and purifying. It is to bring out this important contrast that familiar words are used; otherwise there is nothing common between the delights of this world and the blessings of the next.
It may be added here that, according to Islam, the next life is not spiritual in the sense that it will just consist of a mental state and nothing else. Even in the next life the human soul will have a kind of body; only, it will not be material. One can glean some idea of this from the phenomenon of dreams. The Quran says: Allah takes the souls of human beings at the time of their death; and (He also takes the souls of), those that have not died, during their sleep. Then He retains those against which He has decreed death, and sends (back) the others till an appointed term. In that surely are signs for a people who reflect (39:43). Death and sleep resemble each other, the difference being that whereas in death the human soul is completely and permanently severed from the body, in sleep the severance is only temporary and partial. Now the scenes which a man witnesses in a dream cannot be called purely mental or spiritual, because he has a body also in his dreams and finds himself sometimes in gardens and streams, and eats fruits and drinks milk. It is hard to say that the contents of dreams are only mental states. The milk enjoyed in a dream is no doubt a real experience, but no one can say that it is the material milk found in this world. Dreams have a meaning of their own. For instance, eating mangoes in a dream symbolizes a righteous child or a righteous heart; eating grapes signifies love and fear of God; and eating bananas, a good and lawful subsistence which is also easy of attainment. In short, the spiritual blessings of the next life will not be a mere subjective realization of the gifts of God with which we become familiar in this world. As a matter of fact, what we enjoy here is just a representation of the real and true gifts of God which man will find in the next world.
Again, gardens represent faith; and streams, good actions. Gardens cannot prosper without streams, nor faith without good actions. Therefore faith and actions are inseparable for the attainment of salvation. In the next world, gardens will remind the believers of their faith in this life and streams will remind them of their good works. They will know, then, that their faith and good works have not gone in vain.
The flowing of streams or rivers beneath the gardens also implies that every person in Heaven will have a free and unrestricted enjoyment of his portion. In this world, a single stream often serves several gardens and there is the possibility of a quarrel over it; but in Heaven each garden will have its own stream exclusively meant for itself. See also 10:10.
It is wrong to conclude from the words, This is what was given us before, that in Heaven the believers will be given such fruit as they will have enjoyed in this world, because, as already explained, the two are not the same. The fruit of the next world will, in fact, be the image of the quality of their own faith. When they will eat it, they will at once recognize and remember that it is the fruit of the faith they had in this world; and it will be out of gratitude for this that they will say: This is what was given us before.
The expression rendered as, was given us, may also mean, 'was promised us'; and in this sense it would mean, this is what was promised to us in the world.
The word متشابھا (mutually resembling) refers to the resemblance between the acts of worship performed by believers in this world and the fruits thereof in Heaven. The acts of worship performed in this life will appear to believers as fruit in the next. The more sincere and the more appropriate a man’s worship, the more will he enjoy his portion of the fruit in Paradise and the better in quality will it be. It, therefore, lies in one’s own power to improve the quality of one’s fruit as one likes.
The expression, mutually resembling, also implies that in Paradise one spiritual food will completely harmonize with the other, so that the possibility of spiritual disease will be eliminated altogether. It also means that the food in Heaven will be suited to each and every individual and to his stage of progress and degree of development.
The words, they will abide, signify that the believers will go on abiding in Heaven and will not be subject to any change or decay. Man dies only when he cannot assimilate food or when someone kills him. But since the food of Paradise will be perfectly suited to every individual and since man will have pure and peaceful companions, death and decay will automatically disappear.
The Faithful will also have pure mates in Heaven. A good wife is a joy and a comfort. The Faithful try to have good wives in this world, and they will have good and virtuous company in the next. Yet these joys of Heaven are not physical.
A typical Christian comment on this subject is made by Sir William Muir: "It is very remarkable that the notices in the Coran of this voluptuous paradise are almost entirely confined to a time when, whatever the tendency of his desires, Mohammad was living chaste and temperate with a single wife of three score years of age. It is noteworthy that in the Medina Surahs, that is, in all the voluminous revelations of the ten years following the Hegira women are only twice referred to as constituting one of the delights of paradise and on both occasions in these simple words: 'And to them (believers) there shall be therein pure wives'. Was it that the soul of Mohammad had at that period no longings after what he had then to satiety the enjoyment of? Or that a closer contact with Jewish principles and morality repressed the budding pruriency of the revelation, and covered with merited confusion the picture of his sensual paradise which had been drawn at Mecca?" (Muir, page 76).
It is amazing how these Christian critics with pretensions to culture and learning will draw on sheer speculation to attack the honour of a Teacher who is held in the deepest reverence and devotion by many millions of men and women all over the world. They seem emboldened to do so, because Christians today hold political sway over the Muslims. A few centuries of power have made them forget that Muslims ruled over Christendom for a full 1,000 years, and during this time they never said anything unbecoming about Jesus. They respected Christian susceptibilities when Christians were quite unprotected and were much weaker than Muslims are today. Would to God Christians did not feel so elated!
Sir William conveniently ignores the fact that there are other things besides women which are mentioned in the Meccan chapters and to which there is no reference in the Medinite chapters. We read in the Meccan chapters that there will be wine, honey and rivers of milk in Paradise. Was the Holy Prophet deprived even of these things at Mecca that he should have compensated himself by imagining them in Paradise? Nothing could be more absurd than this. Personally the Holy Prophet was much better off at Mecca than he was at Medina. His rich wife Khadijah was then alive and she had placed all her wealth at his disposal. By the time he reached Medina, most of this wealth had been spent in good works and the Holy Prophet was left a poor man with little to live on. If the picture of Paradise was an imaged compensation for his wants, it should have emerged at Medina instead of at Mecca.
Supposing Sir William is right, cannot critics of Christianity say justifiably that Jesus imagined himself the king of the Jews because he was persecuted everywhere? Could they not also say that as Jesus saw nothing of sex life in this world, he remained obsessed with the idea of a second advent and imagined himself a bridegroom taking no less than five virgins for wives? In the words of the New Testament, he is reported to have said: "Then shall the kingdom of heaven be likened unto ten virgins which took their lamps, and went forth to meet the bridegroom. And five of them were foolish, and five were wise. For the foolish, when they took their lamps, took no oil with them: but the wise took oil in their vessels with their lamps…And the foolish said unto the wise, Give us of your oil; for our lamps are going out. But the wise answered, saying, Peradventure there will not be enough for us and you: go ye rather to them that sell, and buy for yourselves. And while they went away to buy, the bridegroom came; and they that were ready went in with him to the marriage feast; and the door was shut" (Matt. 25:1-10). A bridegroom surrounded by a bevy of virgins—is not this the Heaven of Jesus’ imagination?
But to revert to the subject; the disbelievers at Mecca used to taunt the Muslims about their poverty, saying they had nothing of the good things which they had, so God took over their own phrases and said that the rewards which believers would have in Paradise would be even better. When Islam was established at Medina, the disbelievers gave up their taunts. So God also dropped the earlier descriptions of Paradise. The descriptions in their deep significance, however, hold for all time.
At Mecca, moreover, it was necessary to explain and emphasize the basic belief of Islam. Therefore, greater detail of doctrine is found in the Meccan chapters, and as Paradise, the abode of believers in the afterlife, is an important item of belief, it is dealt with in detail in them. At Medina, on the contrary, practical matters like personal ethics and social legislation became more important. Therefore, greater attention was given to them in the Medinite chapters. The Meccan Surahs also abound in descriptions of Hell. What are they a compensation for?
Sir William Muir also suggests that the Holy Prophet changed his views about Paradise under the influence of the Jews and the Christians of Medina. But he forgets that the stock criticism made by Christian writers is that some Christian slaves had taught the Holy Prophet the Christian scriptures, the substance of which was incorporated in the Quran. Sir William himself alleges that the Holy Prophetlearnt Christianity from Suhaib, a Roman slave at Mecca (The Life of Mahomet, p.67). If the Holy Prophet at Mecca already knew the Christian teachings, he need not have waited for their influence until his arrival at Medina. In point of fact, in the Jewish and the Christian scriptures, there are no descriptions of Paradise. The Jews and the Christians have remained so engrossed in the affairs of this life that their Books do not say much about the life to come. The promises made by their Prophets about the next life have always been taken by them to pertain only to this life. It cannot be imagined that anybody could be influenced by such a teaching.
b
3:16, 134, 196, 199; 4:14, 58, 123; 5:13, 86; 7:44; 9:72, 89, 100; 10:10; 13:36; 22:15, 24; 25:11; 2:18; 47:16; 58:23; 61:13; 64:10.
c
3:16; 4:58.
29T
古兰经» 教导说, 每一种被创造出来的东西, 为了它充分的发展都需要一个配偶。天园中, 正直的男女将有纯洁的配偶来完成他们的精神发展, 成全他们的幸福。他们将成为哪种配偶, 只是在后世才能真正认识。
29U
这节经文简单描绘了信教者后世将受得的酬报。批评伊斯兰教的人对这一描绘提出了各种各样的异议。这种批评的基础是, 完全误解了伊斯兰教对后世赐福的教导。«古兰经» 着重地声言人们是无法知道那些赐福的性质的 (32:18)。相传穆圣曾经说过: “没有眼睛看到过它们, 也没有耳朵听到过它们, 也没有人们的头脑能想象它们” (布哈里)。自然会产生这样一个问题:为什么后世赐福的名称要用这个世界的物质东西来称呼?这是因为 «古兰经» 中的话不是仅对智力高的人们说的, 因此要用大家都能懂得的简单的语言。在描绘后世赐福时, «古兰经» 中用的一般都是这个世界上看来是好的东西的名称, 并告诉信教者他们将在后世以较好的形式来得到所有这些东西。为了显示这种重要对照, 才使用熟悉的用词, 否则, 在今世欢乐与来生赐福之间就会没有共同的东西。而且, 根据伊斯兰教教义, 将来的生命在这种意义上并不是精神的, 即:并不只是由内心状态组成的, 即使在将来的生命, 人的灵魂也还有一个身体, 不过那个身体不是物质的。人们可由梦境形成一些这种观念。一个人在梦中见到的许多景象不能称为内心的或纯精神的, 因为在那种状态下他也有身体。有时发现他自己在流着河水的天园中, 吃着果实、喝着牛奶。很难说梦中的情况只是内心的状态。在梦中快活地喝着牛奶, 无疑是一种经验, 但没有人能说这是他在这个世界上喝的物质的牛奶。来生的精神幸福不会只是我们今世享受的主的馈赠的主观现实。我们今生有的东西仅是人们在来生将看到的主的真实馈赐的一种表现。此外,”天园” 代表信仰,”河流” 代表善行。天园无河流则不能旺盛, 信仰也不可无善行。因此, 为达到灵魂的拯救, 信仰与善行不可分离。在后世, 天园将提醒信教者们今生的信仰而河流将提醒他们的善行。他们会知道, 信仰与善行不是徒劳的。如果从 “这是我们以前受赐的” 这句话中得出结论说: 在天园中信教者将会得到他们在今生享受的这样的果实, 那是错误的。因为, 正如已说明了的那样, 这两种赏赐并不是等同的。后世的果实, 实际上是他们自身信仰品质的形象。当他们在吃这些果实时, 他们立刻认识到也记起这是他们今生信仰的果实; 他们为了感激这种情况, 就说: “这是我们以前受赐的。” 这句话也可意味着,”这是过去答应给我们的东西。”
2
تَجْرِیْ مِنْ تَحْتِھَا الْاَنْھٰرُ سے مراد یہ ہے کہ وہ نہریں ان باغوں سے تعلق رکھتی ہیں اور یہ ظاہر ہے کہ جس شخص کا باغ ہوگا اس میں بہنے والی نہر بھی اسی کی ملکیت ہوگی۔ پس تَجْرِیْ مِنْ تَحْتِھَا الْاَنْھٰرُ کے الفاظ رکھ کر یہ بتانا مقصود ہے کہ جنت میں بہنے والی نہریں مومنوں کی ملکیت ہوں گی۔
3
اَزْوَاجٌ جوڑے یعنی ایسے وجود جن کے ساتھ مل کر ان کی تمام ترقیات اور تمام آرام مکمل ہوں گے۔ قرآن کریم سے معلوم ہوتا ہے کہ سوائے ذات باری کے ہر چیز ایک جوڑے کی محتاج ہے۔ اس قاعدہ کے تحت جنتی بھی جوڑے کے محتاج ہوں گے خواہ مرد ہوں خواہ عورتیں۔ باقی رہا یہ سوال کہ وہ جوڑے کس قسم کے ہوں گے یہ تفصیل اللہ تعالیٰ کے علم میں ہے انسان اس کو تفصیلاً اسی وقت معلوم کرے گا جب وہ جنت میں جائے گا۔
a
3:16, 134, 196, 199; 4:14, 58, 123; 5:13, 86; 7:44; 9:72, 89, 100; 10:10; 13:36; 22:15, 24; 25:11; 32:20; 47:16; 58:23; 61:13; 64:10.
b
3:16; 4:58.
32
Important Words:
بشر (give glad tidings) is derived from بشر (bashshara), i.e. he gave glad tidings, which again is derived from بشر(bashara). They say بشر i.e. he laid bare its skin. Thus البشرة means, the outer and visible part of the skin. So بشر(bashshara) means, he gave or imparted news which changed the colour of the listener. The word has generally come to be used in connection with good or happy news. But it is also sometimes used in connection with bad news (e.g. 3:22). بشیر means, one who announces good news to a people or a person. All Prophets are spoken of as بشیر and نذیر i.e. givers of good news to those who believe in them and givers of bad news to those who reject them (Aqrab & Mufradat).
الصالحات (good works) is the plural of الصالحة which is derived from the verb صلح (the opposite of فسد) meaning, he or it became good or suitable and proper. ھذا الشیء یصلح لك means, this thing is suitable to you or is fit or meet for you (Aqrab). So الصالحات would be used about all those deeds and actions which are not only good intrinsically but are also meet and suitable. See also under 2:12.
جنات (gardens) which is the plural of جنة (a garden) is derived from جن meaning, it veiled, concealed, or covered a thing. So جنة means, any garden having trees by which the ground is covered or concealed; an orchard or garden having luxuriousness and denseness of verdure (Aqrab & Lane). Heaven has been called جنة or garden, because: (1) the mercy of God will 'cover' its dwellers just as trees in an orchard cover the ground thereof; or (2) because the blessings of Heaven are 'hidden' from the eyes of man"; or again (3) because Heaven is like a garden in which the trees represent good faith and the streams good actions.
الانھار (streams) is the plural of نھر (nahr) or نھر (nahar). They say نھرالماء i.e. the water flowed on the earth and cut out a channel for itself. Thus نھر (nahr) or نھر (nahar) means, a channel through which a stream or a river flows; a stream or river itself. نھر (nahar) also means, abundance (Aqrab).
ازواج (mates) is the plural of زوج which signifies, anything that is one of a pair or couple; it does not mean a pair but only one of a pair, whether male or female (Aqrab). The word زوج also means, a comrade (Lane).
خالدون (shall abide) is derived fromخلد which means, he remained and lived on. خلدبمکان means, he stayed or abided in a place. خلود means, staying on, or living without change or deterioration for a long time but not necessarily forever (Aqrab & Mufradat).
Commentary:
This verse gives a brief description of the rewards which the believers will have in the next world.
Critics of Islam have raised all sorts of objections to this description. They say that: (1) The promise of such rewards is only an appeal to greed and a faith based upon greed is not worth the name. (2) The Quran promises material rewards to the believers and this is objectionable. (3) If the rewards of the next world are going to be material, then it must be supposed that the same body which one has in this life will be resurrected after death and this is against all reason, because this body perishes and the particles of one body are used in the making of several other bodies. To whom and to how many will then the same body be given in the next world? (4) Believers are promised wives in Heaven which shows that sex relations will continue in the next world. An appeal to sex is very objectionable for spiritual ends. Sex relations are necessary only for the continuation of the race in this world. Why should there be such a thing in the next? (5) The Quranic Paradise appears to be a place of luxury and sensual pleasures. There is thus nothing spiritual about the Islamic conception of the next life.
This criticism is based on a failure to understand the real Islamic teaching. The Quran has made it clear that in this life it is not possible for man to comprehend the nature of the rewards of the next. It says: No soul knows what joy of the eyes is kept hidden for them, as a reward for their actions (32:18). That is to say, whatever the Quran says about Heaven and Hell is only metaphorical. The descriptions are not to be taken in the sense in which they are ordinarily taken in this world. The Holy Prophet says of the blessings of the next world: "No eye has seen them, nor has any ear heard of them; nor can the mind of man form any conception of them" (Bukhari). If the blessings of the next life are to be like the joys of this life, we should be able to form some idea of them, no matter how remote they may be. The blessings of the next life, therefore, must be quite different from the blessings of this life.
At another place in the Quran we read: The similitude of the Heaven promised to the God-fearing is that through it flow streams; its fruit is everlasting, and so is its shade. That is the reward of those who are righteous, and the reward of the disbelievers is Fire (13:36). Now the fruit of this world is not everlasting, so in order to be everlasting the fruit of the next world as well as its streams will have to be taken as something other than material. Again we read: A similitude of the Paradise promised to the righteous: Therein are rivers of water which corrupts not; and rivers of milk of which the taste changes not; and rivers of wine, a delight to those who drink; and rivers of clarified honey (47:16). There is nothing material in this. About the wine of Heaven we read: Wherein there will be no intoxication, nor will they be exhausted thereby (37:48). Again, And their Lord will give them to drink a beverage that is pure (76:22). Thus, wine in Heaven will not only be pure itself but will purify the drinkers as well. Elsewhere the Quran says that the pure wine of Paradise will be tempered with Tasnim (83:28), which means 'abundance' and 'height '. In the cup of wine that will pass from hand to hand in Heaven God says there will be neither vanity nor sin (52:24). As against this, the wine of this world is described in the Quran as: Wine and the game of hazard and idols and divining arrows are only an abomination of Satan’s handiwork. So shun each one of them that you may prosper. Satan desires only to create enmity and hatred among you by means of wine and the game of hazard and to keep you back from the remembrance of Allah and from Prayer (5:91, 92). This proves that the wine of the next world is quite different; it is pure and purifying and nothing material.
The blessings of Heaven have indeed nothing in common with their counterparts of this world except the name. Ibn ‘Abbas, the Prophet’s cousin, also says the same thing (Jarir).
Now the question arises: Why have the blessings of Heaven been given the names used of material things in this world? This is so because Islam is meant for all kinds of people. It does not address only the intellectually advanced but also all others. Therefore it uses simple words which can be understood by all. The disbelievers used to say that the Prophet disallowed the good things of the world, and his followers were thus deprived of all blessings. Therefore, while describing the blessings in store for the Muslims, God used the names of things generally looked upon as good in this world and told the believers that they would get all these things in a better form. The water of this world spoils, but believers would have water in the next which will not spoil. Gardens are blessings but they decay; so believers will have gardens which will last forever. The unbelievers drank intoxicating wine which made them drunk and which dulled their senses; but the wine which the believers will get in Heaven will be pure and purifying. It is to bring out this important contrast that familiar words are used; otherwise there is nothing common between the delights of this world and the blessings of the next.
It may be added here that, according to Islam, the next life is not spiritual in the sense that it will just consist of a mental state and nothing else. Even in the next life the human soul will have a kind of body; only, it will not be material. One can glean some idea of this from the phenomenon of dreams. The Quran says: Allah takes the souls of human beings at the time of their death; and (He also takes the souls of), those that have not died, during their sleep. Then He retains those against which He has decreed death, and sends (back) the others till an appointed term. In that surely are signs for a people who reflect (39:43). Death and sleep resemble each other, the difference being that whereas in death the human soul is completely and permanently severed from the body, in sleep the severance is only temporary and partial. Now the scenes which a man witnesses in a dream cannot be called purely mental or spiritual, because he has a body also in his dreams and finds himself sometimes in gardens and streams, and eats fruits and drinks milk. It is hard to say that the contents of dreams are only mental states. The milk enjoyed in a dream is no doubt a real experience, but no one can say that it is the material milk found in this world. Dreams have a meaning of their own. For instance, eating mangoes in a dream symbolizes a righteous child or a righteous heart; eating grapes signifies love and fear of God; and eating bananas, a good and lawful subsistence which is also easy of attainment. In short, the spiritual blessings of the next life will not be a mere subjective realization of the gifts of God with which we become familiar in this world. As a matter of fact, what we enjoy here is just a representation of the real and true gifts of God which man will find in the next world.
Again, gardens represent faith; and streams, good actions. Gardens cannot prosper without streams, nor faith without good actions. Therefore faith and actions are inseparable for the attainment of salvation. In the next world, gardens will remind the believers of their faith in this life and streams will remind them of their good works. They will know, then, that their faith and good works have not gone in vain.
The flowing of streams or rivers beneath the gardens also implies that every person in Heaven will have a free and unrestricted enjoyment of his portion. In this world, a single stream often serves several gardens and there is the possibility of a quarrel over it; but in Heaven each garden will have its own stream exclusively meant for itself. See also 10:10.
It is wrong to conclude from the words, This is what was given us before, that in Heaven the believers will be given such fruit as they will have enjoyed in this world, because, as already explained, the two are not the same. The fruit of the next world will, in fact, be the image of the quality of their own faith. When they will eat it, they will at once recognize and remember that it is the fruit of the faith they had in this world; and it will be out of gratitude for this that they will say: This is what was given us before.
The expression rendered as, was given us, may also mean, 'was promised us'; and in this sense it would mean, this is what was promised to us in the world.
The word متشابھا (mutually resembling) refers to the resemblance between the acts of worship performed by believers in this world and the fruits thereof in Heaven. The acts of worship performed in this life will appear to believers as fruit in the next. The more sincere and the more appropriate a man’s worship, the more will he enjoy his portion of the fruit in Paradise and the better in quality will it be. It, therefore, lies in one’s own power to improve the quality of one’s fruit as one likes.
The expression, mutually resembling, also implies that in Paradise one spiritual food will completely harmonize with the other, so that the possibility of spiritual disease will be eliminated altogether. It also means that the food in Heaven will be suited to each and every individual and to his stage of progress and degree of development.
The words, they will abide, signify that the believers will go on abiding in Heaven and will not be subject to any change or decay. Man dies only when he cannot assimilate food or when someone kills him. But since the food of Paradise will be perfectly suited to every individual and since man will have pure and peaceful companions, death and decay will automatically disappear.
The Faithful will also have pure mates in Heaven. A good wife is a joy and a comfort. The Faithful try to have good wives in this world, and they will have good and virtuous company in the next. Yet these joys of Heaven are not physical.
A typical Christian comment on this subject is made by Sir William Muir: "It is very remarkable that the notices in the Coran of this voluptuous paradise are almost entirely confined to a time when, whatever the tendency of his desires, Mohammad was living chaste and temperate with a single wife of three score years of age. It is noteworthy that in the Medina Surahs, that is, in all the voluminous revelations of the ten years following the Hegira women are only twice referred to as constituting one of the delights of paradise and on both occasions in these simple words: 'And to them (believers) there shall be therein pure wives'. Was it that the soul of Mohammad had at that period no longings after what he had then to satiety the enjoyment of? Or that a closer contact with Jewish principles and morality repressed the budding pruriency of the revelation, and covered with merited confusion the picture of his sensual paradise which had been drawn at Mecca?" (Muir, page 76).
It is amazing how these Christian critics with pretensions to culture and learning will draw on sheer speculation to attack the honour of a Teacher who is held in the deepest reverence and devotion by many millions of men and women all over the world. They seem emboldened to do so, because Christians today hold political sway over the Muslims. A few centuries of power have made them forget that Muslims ruled over Christendom for a full 1,000 years, and during this time they never said anything unbecoming about Jesus. They respected Christian susceptibilities when Christians were quite unprotected and were much weaker than Muslims are today. Would to God Christians did not feel so elated!
Sir William conveniently ignores the fact that there are other things besides women which are mentioned in the Meccan chapters and to which there is no reference in the Medinite chapters. We read in the Meccan chapters that there will be wine, honey and rivers of milk in Paradise. Was the Holy Prophet deprived even of these things at Mecca that he should have compensated himself by imagining them in Paradise? Nothing could be more absurd than this. Personally the Holy Prophet was much better off at Mecca than he was at Medina. His rich wife Khadijah was then alive and she had placed all her wealth at his disposal. By the time he reached Medina, most of this wealth had been spent in good works and the Holy Prophet was left a poor man with little to live on. If the picture of Paradise was an imaged compensation for his wants, it should have emerged at Medina instead of at Mecca.
Supposing Sir William is right, cannot critics of Christianity say justifiably that Jesus imagined himself the king of the Jews because he was persecuted everywhere? Could they not also say that as Jesus saw nothing of sex life in this world, he remained obsessed with the idea of a second advent and imagined himself a bridegroom taking no less than five virgins for wives? In the words of the New Testament, he is reported to have said: "Then shall the kingdom of heaven be likened unto ten virgins which took their lamps, and went forth to meet the bridegroom. And five of them were foolish, and five were wise. For the foolish, when they took their lamps, took no oil with them: but the wise took oil in their vessels with their lamps…And the foolish said unto the wise, Give us of your oil; for our lamps are going out. But the wise answered, saying, Peradventure there will not be enough for us and you: go ye rather to them that sell, and buy for yourselves. And while they went away to buy, the bridegroom came; and they that were ready went in with him to the marriage feast; and the door was shut" (Matt. 25:1-10). A bridegroom surrounded by a bevy of virgins—is not this the Heaven of Jesus’ imagination?
But to revert to the subject; the disbelievers at Mecca used to taunt the Muslims about their poverty, saying they had nothing of the good things which they had, so God took over their own phrases and said that the rewards which believers would have in Paradise would be even better. When Islam was established at Medina, the disbelievers gave up their taunts. So God also dropped the earlier descriptions of Paradise. The descriptions in their deep significance, however, hold for all time.
At Mecca, moreover, it was necessary to explain and emphasize the basic belief of Islam. Therefore, greater detail of doctrine is found in the Meccan chapters, and as Paradise, the abode of believers in the afterlife, is an important item of belief, it is dealt with in detail in them. At Medina, on the contrary, practical matters like personal ethics and social legislation became more important. Therefore, greater attention was given to them in the Medinite chapters. The Meccan Surahs also abound in descriptions of Hell. What are they a compensation for?
Sir William Muir also suggests that the Holy Prophet changed his views about Paradise under the influence of the Jews and the Christians of Medina. But he forgets that the stock criticism made by Christian writers is that some Christian slaves had taught the Holy Prophet the Christian scriptures, the substance of which was incorporated in the Quran. Sir William himself alleges that the Holy Prophetlearnt Christianity from Suhaib, a Roman slave at Mecca (The Life of Mahomet, p.67). If the Holy Prophet at Mecca already knew the Christian teachings, he need not have waited for their influence until his arrival at Medina. In point of fact, in the Jewish and the Christian scriptures, there are no descriptions of Paradise. The Jews and the Christians have remained so engrossed in the affairs of this life that their Books do not say much about the life to come. The promises made by their Prophets about the next life have always been taken by them to pertain only to this life. It cannot be imagined that anybody could be influenced by such a teaching.
a
3:16, 134, 196, 199; 4:14, 58, 123; 5:13, 86; 7:44; 9:72, 89, 100; 10:10; 13:36; 22:15, 24; 25:11; 2:18; 47:16; 58:23; 61:13; 64:10.
b
3:16; 4:58.
46A
The Qur’an teaches that every created thing stands in need of a mate for its full development. In Paradise righteous men and women will have pure mates for perfecting their spiritual development and completing their happiness. What kind of mates these will be, will be realized only in the Hereafter.
47
This verse gives a brief description of the rewards which the believers will have in the next world. Critics of Islam have raised all sorts of objections to this description. The criticism is based upon a complete misunderstanding of the Islamic teaching about heavenly blessings. The Qur’an emphatically declares that it is beyond human mind to comprehend their nature (32:18). The Holy Prophet is reported to have said: "No eye has seen them, nor has any ear heard of them, nor can the mind of man conceive of them" (Bukhari). The question naturally arises, why have the blessings of Heaven been given the names used for material things in this world? This is because the address of the Qur’an is not merely to those people who are intellectually advanced. Therefore, it has used simple words which can be understood by all. While describing the heavenly blessings, the Qur’an has used the names of things generally looked upon as good in this world, and believers are told that they would get all these thi
۞ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ لَا يَسْتَحْىِۦٓ أَن يَضْرِبَ مَثَلًا مَّا بَعُوضَةً فَمَا فَوْقَهَا ۚ فَأَمَّا ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ فَيَعْلَمُونَ أَنَّهُ ٱلْحَقُّ مِن رَّبِّهِمْ ۖ وَأَمَّا ٱلَّذِينَ كَفَرُوا۟ فَيَقُولُونَ مَاذَآ أَرَادَ ٱللَّهُ بِهَٰذَا مَثَلًا ۘ يُضِلُّ بِهِۦ كَثِيرًا وَيَهْدِى بِهِۦ كَثِيرًا ۚ وَمَا يُضِلُّ بِهِۦٓ إِلَّا ٱلْفَٰسِقِينَ
عربی زبان میں فَوْقٌ دونوں معنے رکھتا ہے۔ اگر بڑائی کا مقابلہ ہو تو اس کے معنے زیادہ بڑی کے ہو سکتے ہیں اگر چھوٹے ہونے کا ذکر ہو تو زیادہ چھوٹے کے معنے دے سکتا ہے۔ پس اس آیت کے دونوں ہی معنے کیے جا سکتے ہیں۔ یہ بھی کہ مچھر سے بڑی بات، یا یہ کہ اس سے بھی چھوٹی بات (مفردات راغب)
یُضِلُّ بِہٖ کَثِیْرًا کے معنے کیے گئے ہیں ’’وہ گمراہ قرار دیتا ہے‘‘ یہ عربی لغت کے مطابق ہے۔ چنانچہ مفردات میں اَ لْاِضْلَالُ کے معنی کرتے ہوئے لکھا ہے اَنْ تَحْکُمَ بِضَـلَا لَۃٍ کہ تو اس کے گمراہ ہونے کا فیصلہ کر دے۔ پس یُضِلُّ بِہٖ کَثِیْرًا کے معنی ہوں گے یَحْکُمُ اللّٰہُ بِالضَّـلَالِ عَلَیْھِمْ یعنی اللہ ان کے گمراہ ہونے کا فیصلہ کرتا ہے۔
فَسَقَ کے معنے ہوتے ہیں تَرَکَ اَمْرَ اللّٰہِ یعنی اللہ تعالیٰ کے حکم کو ردّ کر دیا (اقرب) پس فاسق کے معنے ہوں گے نافرمان۔ اللہ کے حکم کو ردّ کرنے والا۔
33:54.
14:25; 16:76, 112; 47:4; 66:12.
6:118; 7:187; 13:28; 16:94; 40:35.
Darabal-Mathala means, he gave an illustration or a description; he made a statement; he propounded a parable (Lane, Taj & 14:46).
God has described Heaven and Hell in the Qur’an in metaphors and similes. Metaphors and similes express depths of meaning which cannot adequately be expressed otherwise, and in things of the spirit they provide perhaps the only method by which ideas can be properly conveyed. The words used for describing Heaven may be as inadequate and insignificant as a gnat; which is considered by the Arabs and, in fact is, a very, very weak creature. The Arabs say: Ad‘afu min Ba‘udatin, i.e. he is weaker than a gnat. Nevertheless they help to conjure up the picture. The believers know the words are only metaphorical and try to get to the depth of their meaning; but the disbelievers begin to find fault with them and increase in error and misguidance.
Fauq means, above and signifies both 'greater' and 'smaller' and is used in the sense which befits the context (Mufradat).
Adallallahu means, (1) God adjudged him to be in error; (2) God forsook or abandoned him so that he went astray (Kashshaf); (3) God found or left him in error or let him go astray (Lane).
33:54.
14:25; 16:76, 113; 47:4; 66:12.
6:118; 7:187; 13:28; 16:94; 40:35.
Important Words:
یستحیٖ (disdains) is derived from حیی which means: (1) he lived or had life; (2) he felt or had a sense of shame or shyness or bashfulness. The infinitive حیاء means, sense of shame or modesty or shyness or bashfulness; or keeping back from a thing through fear of blame. استحیا means, he felt a sense of shame or shyness; he kept back, or he forbore, or he shrank from. استحیی من کذا means, he disdained it, or he refused to do it by reason of pride, or he kept far from it (Lane).
یضل (He adjudges to be erring) is from اضل which is derived from ضل which means, he went astray; he lost his way; he erred; he was lost; he perished. اضل is the transitive form of ضل. They say اضله i.e. he led him astray; he caused him to err; he lost him or it; he caused him to perish. اضله also means, he found him to be erring or straying or lost, etc. (Lane). اضله اللهmay also mean, (1) God adjudged him to be erring or He adjudged him to have gone astray; (2) God forsook or abandoned him and he went astray (Kashshaf). See also 1:7.
الفاسقین (the disobedient) is the plural of فاسق which is derived from the verb فسق which means, he left the right course, or he declined from the right path. فسق عن امرربه means, he departed from the command of his Lord; he disobeyed his Lord. فاسقis thus one who departs from the right course or from the way of truth, or from the limits of the law, or from the bounds of obedience. The word is generally applied to one who first takes upon himself to obey an authority or to observe the ordinances of a law and then falls short of it (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
If, as described in the previous verse, there is not much in common between the gifts of this world and those of the next, why has the Quran given a description of Heaven at all? This question is answered in the present verse. Even if the picture of Heaven and Hell given in the Quran is not exact, it cannot be denied that the imagery used enlightens and helps us to form an idea of the next life. God has, no doubt, described Heaven and Hell by using metaphors and similes, but no one can say that they are useless. Metaphors and similes are used in all languages, and they express depths of meaning which cannot be reached otherwise, and in things of the spirit they afford perhaps the only method by which ideas can be conveyed. The words used for describing Heaven may be as inadequate and insignificant as a gnat; nevertheless they help to conjure up the picture. The believers know the words are only metaphorical and try to get to the depth of their meaning; but the disbelievers begin to find fault with them and increase in error and misguidance.
The words یضل به کثیرا (lit. many does He misguide) have been translated in the text as, many does He adjudge by it to be erring. This, as shown under Important Words above, is a perfectly correct rendering, for though misguidance springs from one’s own self, as the verse itself makes clear in the concluding clause, yet it is God, the final Judge, Who declares or adjudges the misguided to be so.
a
33:54.
b
14:25; 16:76, 112; 47:4; 66:12.
c
6:118; 7:187; 13:28; 16:94; 40:35.
1
عربی زبان میں فَوْقٌ دونوں معنے رکھتا ہے۔ اگر بڑائی کا مقابلہ ہو تو اس کے معنے زیادہ بڑی کے ہو سکتے ہیں اگر چھوٹے ہونے کا ذکر ہو تو زیادہ چھوٹے کے معنے دے سکتا ہے۔ پس اس آیت کے دونوں ہی معنے کیے جا سکتے ہیں۔ یہ بھی کہ مچھر سے بڑی بات، یا یہ کہ اس سے بھی چھوٹی بات (مفردات راغب)
2
یُضِلُّ بِہٖ کَثِیْرًا کے معنے کیے گئے ہیں ’’وہ گمراہ قرار دیتا ہے‘‘ یہ عربی لغت کے مطابق ہے۔ چنانچہ مفردات میں اَ لْاِضْلَالُ کے معنی کرتے ہوئے لکھا ہے اَنْ تَحْکُمَ بِضَـلَا لَۃٍ کہ تو اس کے گمراہ ہونے کا فیصلہ کر دے۔ پس یُضِلُّ بِہٖ کَثِیْرًا کے معنی ہوں گے یَحْکُمُ اللّٰہُ بِالضَّـلَالِ عَلَیْھِمْ یعنی اللہ ان کے گمراہ ہونے کا فیصلہ کرتا ہے۔
3
فَسَقَ کے معنے ہوتے ہیں تَرَکَ اَمْرَ اللّٰہِ یعنی اللہ تعالیٰ کے حکم کو ردّ کر دیا (اقرب) پس فاسق کے معنے ہوں گے نافرمان۔ اللہ کے حکم کو ردّ کرنے والا۔
a
33:54.
b
14:25; 16:76, 113; 47:4; 66:12.
c
6:118; 7:187; 13:28; 16:94; 40:35.
33
Important Words:
یستحیٖ (disdains) is derived from حیی which means: (1) he lived or had life; (2) he felt or had a sense of shame or shyness or bashfulness. The infinitive حیاء means, sense of shame or modesty or shyness or bashfulness; or keeping back from a thing through fear of blame. استحیا means, he felt a sense of shame or shyness; he kept back, or he forbore, or he shrank from. استحیی من کذا means, he disdained it, or he refused to do it by reason of pride, or he kept far from it (Lane).
یضل (He adjudges to be erring) is from اضل which is derived from ضل which means, he went astray; he lost his way; he erred; he was lost; he perished. اضل is the transitive form of ضل. They say اضله i.e. he led him astray; he caused him to err; he lost him or it; he caused him to perish. اضله also means, he found him to be erring or straying or lost, etc. (Lane). اضله اللهmay also mean, (1) God adjudged him to be erring or He adjudged him to have gone astray; (2) God forsook or abandoned him and he went astray (Kashshaf). See also 1:7.
الفاسقین (the disobedient) is the plural of فاسق which is derived from the verb فسق which means, he left the right course, or he declined from the right path. فسق عن امرربه means, he departed from the command of his Lord; he disobeyed his Lord. فاسقis thus one who departs from the right course or from the way of truth, or from the limits of the law, or from the bounds of obedience. The word is generally applied to one who first takes upon himself to obey an authority or to observe the ordinances of a law and then falls short of it (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
If, as described in the previous verse, there is not much in common between the gifts of this world and those of the next, why has the Quran given a description of Heaven at all? This question is answered in the present verse. Even if the picture of Heaven and Hell given in the Quran is not exact, it cannot be denied that the imagery used enlightens and helps us to form an idea of the next life. God has, no doubt, described Heaven and Hell by using metaphors and similes, but no one can say that they are useless. Metaphors and similes are used in all languages, and they express depths of meaning which cannot be reached otherwise, and in things of the spirit they afford perhaps the only method by which ideas can be conveyed. The words used for describing Heaven may be as inadequate and insignificant as a gnat; nevertheless they help to conjure up the picture. The believers know the words are only metaphorical and try to get to the depth of their meaning; but the disbelievers begin to find fault with them and increase in error and misguidance.
The words یضل به کثیرا (lit. many does He misguide) have been translated in the text as, many does He adjudge by it to be erring. This, as shown under Important Words above, is a perfectly correct rendering, for though misguidance springs from one’s own self, as the verse itself makes clear in the concluding clause, yet it is God, the final Judge, Who declares or adjudges the misguided to be so.
a
33:54.
b
14:25; 16:76, 112; 47:4; 66:12.
c
6:118; 7:187; 13:28; 16:94; 40:35.
48
Darabal-Mathala means, he gave an illustration or a description; he made a statement; he propounded a parable (Lane, Taj & 14:46).
48A
God has described Heaven and Hell in the Qur’an in metaphors and similes. Metaphors and similes express depths of meaning which cannot adequately be expressed otherwise, and in things of the spirit they provide perhaps the only method by which ideas can be properly conveyed. The words used for describing Heaven may be as inadequate and insignificant as a gnat; which is considered by the Arabs and, in fact is, a very, very weak creature. The Arabs say: Ad‘afu min Ba‘udatin, i.e. he is weaker than a gnat. Nevertheless they help to conjure up the picture. The believers know the words are only metaphorical and try to get to the depth of their meaning; but the disbelievers begin to find fault with them and increase in error and misguidance.
48B
Fauq means, above and signifies both 'greater' and 'smaller' and is used in the sense which befits the context (Mufradat).
49
Adallallahu means, (1) God adjudged him to be in error; (2) God forsook or abandoned him so that he went astray (Kashshaf); (3) God found or left him in error or let him go astray (Lane).
فَتَلَقَّىٰٓ ءَادَمُ مِن رَّبِّهِۦ كَلِمَٰتٍ فَتَابَ عَلَيْهِ ۚ إِنَّهُۥ هُوَ ٱلتَّوَّابُ ٱلرَّحِيمُ
یعنی اللہ تعالیٰ۔
7:24.
20:123.
Important Words:
تلقی (learnt) is derived from لقی. They say لقی فلانا i.e. he came face to face with him; he met him or he saw him; he found him. لقی الشیء means, he threw or pushed the thing towards him; he made him meet it or he made him experience it. القاهmeans, he threw it or put it or let it fall. القا الیه القول means, he told or communicated to him the word. القا علیه رحمته means, he bestowed his mercy on him. تلقی الشیء means, he came face to face with it; or he met it or saw it. تلقی منه الشیء means, he received the thing from him; or he learnt it from him (Aqrab).
کلمات (words) is, like کلم, the plural of کلمة which is derived from the verb کلم. They say کلمه meaning, he wounded him; کلمه (Kallamahu) means, he wounded him; he spoke to him. کالمه means, he spoke to him; the latter expression being generally used of two or more persons speaking to one another. تکلم means, he spoke, he uttered words. کلام means, saying or speech having some meaning; idea occurring in the mind even if it is not expressed; a writing. کلمة means, word; anything uttered; speech (Aqrab). کلمة also means, a decree; a commandment (Mufradat).
تاب (he turned) and تواب (Oft-Returning) are both derived from the same root. تاب means, he repented. تاب الی الله means, he returned to God with repentance after being disobedient or sinful. تاب الله علیه means, God turned to him with forgiveness and mercy. تائب means, one who repents or turns towards God after being disobedient or sinful. توبة means, repentance; turning towards God for forgiveness with the resolve to be obedient and righteous in future. تواب is intensive adjective from تاب. When applied to man it means, one who is always ready to repent, one who turns to God much for forgiveness and with promise to reform. When applied to God, it means, He Who is ready to accept repentance; He Who turns (much and often) with forgiveness and mercy towards His servants (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
This verse tells us that when 'Satan' deceived Adam, and God informed him of his mistake, he prayed to God for forgiveness in words which he learnt from God Himself. These words have been mentioned by the Quran elsewhere and they run thus: Our Lord, we have wronged ourselves; and if Thou forgive us not and have not mercy on us, we shall surely be of the lost (7:24).
This was the prayer that Adam learnt from God. The prayer was heard and Adam was forgiven. The fact that God Himself taught Adam the words of this prayer shows that he was a chosen one of God and was a recipient of divine revelation. The verse also tells us that on special occasions, God Himself teaches His servants the words in which they should pray to Him, and it is evident that the words of prayer chosen by God are sure to find ready acceptance with Him. It is in fact a way of honouring holy men and expediting their reconciliation with Him that God sometimes teaches them the words in which they should pray to Him. It is, in other words, saying to them, "Come to Me with a request and I will grant it." Strange indeed are the ways of the Lord Whose mercy and forgiveness are, as it were, always eager to descend on man, if he only cares to turn towards Him with repentance. Says the Holy Prophet, "God has spoken to me saying: Whoso does a good deed will have a tenfold reward and even more, and whoso does an evil deed will have a punishment only equal to it or will have his sin forgiven altogether. And whoso approaches Me by half a cubit, I will go to him by one cubit and whoso approaches Me by one cubit, I will go to him by four cubits; and whoso comes to Me walking, I will go to him running" (Muslim).
a
7:24.
b
20:123.
1
یعنی اللہ تعالیٰ۔
a
7:24.
b
20:123.
44
Important Words:
تلقی (learnt) is derived from لقی. They say لقی فلانا i.e. he came face to face with him; he met him or he saw him; he found him. لقی الشیء means, he threw or pushed the thing towards him; he made him meet it or he made him experience it. القاهmeans, he threw it or put it or let it fall. القا الیه القول means, he told or communicated to him the word. القا علیه رحمته means, he bestowed his mercy on him. تلقی الشیء means, he came face to face with it; or he met it or saw it. تلقی منه الشیء means, he received the thing from him; or he learnt it from him (Aqrab).
کلمات (words) is, like کلم, the plural of کلمة which is derived from the verb کلم. They say کلمه meaning, he wounded him; کلمه (Kallamahu) means, he wounded him; he spoke to him. کالمه means, he spoke to him; the latter expression being generally used of two or more persons speaking to one another. تکلم means, he spoke, he uttered words. کلام means, saying or speech having some meaning; idea occurring in the mind even if it is not expressed; a writing. کلمة means, word; anything uttered; speech (Aqrab). کلمة also means, a decree; a commandment (Mufradat).
تاب (he turned) and تواب (Oft-Returning) are both derived from the same root. تاب means, he repented. تاب الی الله means, he returned to God with repentance after being disobedient or sinful. تاب الله علیه means, God turned to him with forgiveness and mercy. تائب means, one who repents or turns towards God after being disobedient or sinful. توبة means, repentance; turning towards God for forgiveness with the resolve to be obedient and righteous in future. تواب is intensive adjective from تاب. When applied to man it means, one who is always ready to repent, one who turns to God much for forgiveness and with promise to reform. When applied to God, it means, He Who is ready to accept repentance; He Who turns (much and often) with forgiveness and mercy towards His servants (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
This verse tells us that when 'Satan' deceived Adam, and God informed him of his mistake, he prayed to God for forgiveness in words which he learnt from God Himself. These words have been mentioned by the Quran elsewhere and they run thus: Our Lord, we have wronged ourselves; and if Thou forgive us not and have not mercy on us, we shall surely be of the lost (7:24).
This was the prayer that Adam learnt from God. The prayer was heard and Adam was forgiven. The fact that God Himself taught Adam the words of this prayer shows that he was a chosen one of God and was a recipient of divine revelation. The verse also tells us that on special occasions, God Himself teaches His servants the words in which they should pray to Him, and it is evident that the words of prayer chosen by God are sure to find ready acceptance with Him. It is in fact a way of honouring holy men and expediting their reconciliation with Him that God sometimes teaches them the words in which they should pray to Him. It is, in other words, saying to them, "Come to Me with a request and I will grant it." Strange indeed are the ways of the Lord Whose mercy and forgiveness are, as it were, always eager to descend on man, if he only cares to turn towards Him with repentance. Says the Holy Prophet, "God has spoken to me saying: Whoso does a good deed will have a tenfold reward and even more, and whoso does an evil deed will have a punishment only equal to it or will have his sin forgiven altogether. And whoso approaches Me by half a cubit, I will go to him by one cubit and whoso approaches Me by one cubit, I will go to him by four cubits; and whoso comes to Me walking, I will go to him running" (Muslim).
a
7:24.
b
20:123.
وَظَلَّلْنَا عَلَيْكُمُ ٱلْغَمَامَ وَأَنزَلْنَا عَلَيْكُمُ ٱلْمَنَّ وَٱلسَّلْوَىٰ ۖ كُلُوا۟ مِن طَيِّبَٰتِ مَا رَزَقْنَٰكُمْ ۖ وَمَا ظَلَمُونَا وَلَٰكِن كَانُوٓا۟ أَنفُسَهُمْ يَظْلِمُونَ
7:161; 20:82.
7:161; 20:81.
مَنّ (Mann, 吗哪) 的意思是赏赐或礼物; 不经周折或困难所获得的任何东西; 蜂蜜或露水 (اَقْرَبْ)。吗哪在穆圣的一句话中也曾被提到: “松露也是一种吗哪” (布哈理)。也可参阅 (Lane) 的 “تَرَنْجَبِيْن” (Turanjabin) 条目。
سَلْوٰی (Salwa, 萨耳瓦) 是 (1) 像鹌鹑那样一种略带白色的鸟, 在阿拉伯半岛及其邻近国家的某些地区可以见到; (2) 凡是使人得到满足和快乐的东西; 蜜 (اَقْرَبْ, Aqrab)。吗哪和萨耳瓦的恩赐在 «古兰经» 中有三处提到 (本节及2:58与7:161), 而在这三处提及这一事实之后都有这样的命令: “吃我供应给你们的好东西吧。” 这表明提供给西奈半岛荒野中的古以色列人的食物是有益健康的、可口而美味的, 这种食物不只是一种而是包括好几种东西; 吗哪 (松露) 和鹌鹑构成其中的主要部分。见 («出埃及记»16:13-15)。
مَنّ کے معنے عربی زبان میں احسان کے ہوتے ہیں۔ پس جو چیز بفضلِ الٰہی مل جائے اس کو مَنّ کہتے ہیں۔ حدیث میں آتا ہے اَلْکَمْأَۃُ مِنَ الْمَنِّ یعنی کھمب بھی مَنّ میں سے ہے۔ اسی طرح ترنجبین کو بھی مَنَّ کہتے ہیں۔ اور سَلْوٰی کے معنے عربی زبان میں بٹیر کی قسم کے پرندوں کے ہیں۔ پس مطلب یہ ہے کہ ہم نے تمہارے لئے کثرت سے ترنجبین اور کھمبیں اس علاقہ میں پیدا کردیں اور بٹیرکی قسم کے جانور بھیج دئیے۔
7:161.
7:161; 20:81.
See Exodus, 40: 34-38.
Mann means a favour or gift; anything obtained without trouble or difficulty; honey or dew (Aqrab). The Manna has also been referred to in a saying of the Holy Prophet as: "The truffle is one of the things included in the Manna" (Bukhari). See also Lane under "Turanjabin."
Salwa is (1) a whitish bird resembling a quail and found in some parts of Arabia and the neighbouring countries; (2) whatever renders a person contented and happy; honey (Aqrab). The sending down of Manna and Salwa has been mentioned at three places in the Qur’an, in the present verse and in vv. 2:58 and 7:161, and at all these three places the fact has been followed by the injunction: 'Eat of the good things that We have provided for you.' This shows that whereas the food which was provided to the Israelites in the wilderness of Sinai was wholesome, palatable and of good taste, it consisted not of one but of several things; Manna (truffle) and Salwa (quails) forming the major part of them. See Exodus, 16: 13-15.
7:161.
7:161; 20:81.
Important Words:
من (Manna). The infinitive من signifies bestowing favour on or doing good to. They say من علیه i.e. he bestowed a favour on him without his labouring for it. من means: (1) a favour; (2) anything obtained without trouble or difficulty; (3) honey-dew (Aqrab).
سلوی (Salwa) is derived from سلا. They say سلا عن الشیء i.e. he was satisfied with it سلاه عن الشیء means, he satisfied him with it; he removed his grief and worry through it. سلوی is (1) a whitish bird resembling a quail and found in some parts of Arabia and the neighbouring countries. It also means, (2) whatever renders a person contented and happy; (3) honey (Aqrab).
Commentary:
As the Israelites were camping in hot and open country, God speaks of the clouds having been sent to give them shade. We learn from Exod. 40:34-38, that clouds spread and shaded the spot where the Israelites encamped, and that they dispersed on the day when it was time for them to resume their journey. But the verse under comment shows that the clouds meant not only shadow but also rainfall because, firstly, it is rain-clouds that are generally dark and dense; and, secondly, along with the "clouds," the Quran also mentions two eatables, Manna and Salwa, which served as complement to the favour mentioned in the shadowing clouds. In fact, there was scarcity of both water and food in that arid country, and God used to quench their thirst by sending clouds, and satisfy their hunger by providing Manna and Salwa. And, no wonder, for God shows special favours to His servants in order to remove their difficulties and promote their comfort.
The sending down of Manna and Salwa has been mentioned in Exod. 16:11-15, where we read: "And the Lord spoke unto Moses, saying, I have heard the murmurings of the children of Israel: speak unto them, saying, At even ye shall eat flesh, and in the morning ye shall be filled with bread; and ye shall know that I am the Lord your God. And it came to pass that at even the quails came up, and covered the camp: and in the morning the dew lay round about the host. And when the dew that lay was gone up, behold, upon the face of the wilderness there lay a small round thing, as small as the hoar frost on the ground. And when the children of Israel saw it, they said one to another, It is manna: for they wist not what it was. And Moses said unto them, This is the bread which the Lord hath given you to eat."
When the children of Israel got no food in the wilderness and death stared them in the face, they began to murmur against Moses and Aaron. They said to them: "Would to God we had died by the hand of the Lord in the land of Egypt, when we sat by the flesh pots and when we did eat bread to the full; for ye have brought us forth into this wilderness to kill this whole assembly with hunger" (Exod. 16:3). These murmurings of the Israelites were answered in the passage quoted above.
The Holy Prophet refers to the Manna bestowed on the Israelites in the following, hadith. Says he: "The mushroom is one of the things included in the Manna, and the sap of it heals the eye" (Bukhari). He is also reported to have said: "The mushroom is among the things which God bestowed upon Moses, as a free gift" (Muhit). This shows that God provided the Israelites with a number of things in the wilderness, sometimes with one thing and sometimes with another.
The verse does not mention how the Israelites "wronged themselves". But as God speaks here of the favours bestowed upon them, it is evident that they wronged themselves by showing ingratitude and by murmuring and complaining of their lot in spite of God’s special favours. By doing so, however, they did no harm to God or His Messenger, but only harmed their own souls.
a
7:161; 20:82.
c
7:161; 20:81.
55
مَنّ (Mann, 吗哪) 的意思是赏赐或礼物; 不经周折或困难所获得的任何东西; 蜂蜜或露水 (اَقْرَبْ)。吗哪在穆圣的一句话中也曾被提到: “松露也是一种吗哪” (布哈理)。也可参阅 (Lane) 的 “تَرَنْجَبِيْن” (Turanjabin) 条目。
56
سَلْوٰی (Salwa, 萨耳瓦) 是 (1) 像鹌鹑那样一种略带白色的鸟, 在阿拉伯半岛及其邻近国家的某些地区可以见到; (2) 凡是使人得到满足和快乐的东西; 蜜 (اَقْرَبْ, Aqrab)。吗哪和萨耳瓦的恩赐在 «古兰经» 中有三处提到 (本节及2:58与7:161), 而在这三处提及这一事实之后都有这样的命令: “吃我供应给你们的好东西吧。” 这表明提供给西奈半岛荒野中的古以色列人的食物是有益健康的、可口而美味的, 这种食物不只是一种而是包括好几种东西; 吗哪 (松露) 和鹌鹑构成其中的主要部分。见 («出埃及记»16:13-15)。
1
مَنّ کے معنے عربی زبان میں احسان کے ہوتے ہیں۔ پس جو چیز بفضلِ الٰہی مل جائے اس کو مَنّ کہتے ہیں۔ حدیث میں آتا ہے اَلْکَمْأَۃُ مِنَ الْمَنِّ یعنی کھمب بھی مَنّ میں سے ہے۔ اسی طرح ترنجبین کو بھی مَنَّ کہتے ہیں۔ اور سَلْوٰی کے معنے عربی زبان میں بٹیر کی قسم کے پرندوں کے ہیں۔ پس مطلب یہ ہے کہ ہم نے تمہارے لئے کثرت سے ترنجبین اور کھمبیں اس علاقہ میں پیدا کردیں اور بٹیرکی قسم کے جانور بھیج دئیے۔
a
7:161.
b
7:161; 20:81.
64
Important Words:
من (Manna). The infinitive من signifies bestowing favour on or doing good to. They say من علیه i.e. he bestowed a favour on him without his labouring for it. من means: (1) a favour; (2) anything obtained without trouble or difficulty; (3) honey-dew (Aqrab).
سلوی (Salwa) is derived from سلا. They say سلا عن الشیء i.e. he was satisfied with it سلاه عن الشیء means, he satisfied him with it; he removed his grief and worry through it. سلوی is (1) a whitish bird resembling a quail and found in some parts of Arabia and the neighbouring countries. It also means, (2) whatever renders a person contented and happy; (3) honey (Aqrab).
Commentary:
As the Israelites were camping in hot and open country, God speaks of the clouds having been sent to give them shade. We learn from Exod. 40:34-38, that clouds spread and shaded the spot where the Israelites encamped, and that they dispersed on the day when it was time for them to resume their journey. But the verse under comment shows that the clouds meant not only shadow but also rainfall because, firstly, it is rain-clouds that are generally dark and dense; and, secondly, along with the "clouds," the Quran also mentions two eatables, Manna and Salwa, which served as complement to the favour mentioned in the shadowing clouds. In fact, there was scarcity of both water and food in that arid country, and God used to quench their thirst by sending clouds, and satisfy their hunger by providing Manna and Salwa. And, no wonder, for God shows special favours to His servants in order to remove their difficulties and promote their comfort.
The sending down of Manna and Salwa has been mentioned in Exod. 16:11-15, where we read: "And the Lord spoke unto Moses, saying, I have heard the murmurings of the children of Israel: speak unto them, saying, At even ye shall eat flesh, and in the morning ye shall be filled with bread; and ye shall know that I am the Lord your God. And it came to pass that at even the quails came up, and covered the camp: and in the morning the dew lay round about the host. And when the dew that lay was gone up, behold, upon the face of the wilderness there lay a small round thing, as small as the hoar frost on the ground. And when the children of Israel saw it, they said one to another, It is manna: for they wist not what it was. And Moses said unto them, This is the bread which the Lord hath given you to eat."
When the children of Israel got no food in the wilderness and death stared them in the face, they began to murmur against Moses and Aaron. They said to them: "Would to God we had died by the hand of the Lord in the land of Egypt, when we sat by the flesh pots and when we did eat bread to the full; for ye have brought us forth into this wilderness to kill this whole assembly with hunger" (Exod. 16:3). These murmurings of the Israelites were answered in the passage quoted above.
The Holy Prophet refers to the Manna bestowed on the Israelites in the following, hadith. Says he: "The mushroom is one of the things included in the Manna, and the sap of it heals the eye" (Bukhari). He is also reported to have said: "The mushroom is among the things which God bestowed upon Moses, as a free gift" (Muhit). This shows that God provided the Israelites with a number of things in the wilderness, sometimes with one thing and sometimes with another.
The verse does not mention how the Israelites "wronged themselves". But as God speaks here of the favours bestowed upon them, it is evident that they wronged themselves by showing ingratitude and by murmuring and complaining of their lot in spite of God’s special favours. By doing so, however, they did no harm to God or His Messenger, but only harmed their own souls.
a
7:161.
b
7:161; 20:81.
97
See Exodus, 40: 34-38.
98
Mann means a favour or gift; anything obtained without trouble or difficulty; honey or dew (Aqrab). The Manna has also been referred to in a saying of the Holy Prophet as: "The truffle is one of the things included in the Manna" (Bukhari). See also Lane under "Turanjabin."
99
Salwa is (1) a whitish bird resembling a quail and found in some parts of Arabia and the neighbouring countries; (2) whatever renders a person contented and happy; honey (Aqrab). The sending down of Manna and Salwa has been mentioned at three places in the Qur’an, in the present verse and in vv. 2:58 and 7:161, and at all these three places the fact has been followed by the injunction: 'Eat of the good things that We have provided for you.' This shows that whereas the food which was provided to the Israelites in the wilderness of Sinai was wholesome, palatable and of good taste, it consisted not of one but of several things; Manna (truffle) and Salwa (quails) forming the major part of them. See Exodus, 16: 13-15.
۞ وَإِذِ ٱسْتَسْقَىٰ مُوسَىٰ لِقَوْمِهِۦ فَقُلْنَا ٱضْرِب بِّعَصَاكَ ٱلْحَجَرَ ۖ فَٱنفَجَرَتْ مِنْهُ ٱثْنَتَا عَشْرَةَ عَيْنًا ۖ قَدْ عَلِمَ كُلُّ أُنَاسٍ مَّشْرَبَهُمْ ۖ كُلُوا۟ وَٱشْرَبُوا۟ مِن رِّزْقِ ٱللَّهِ وَلَا تَعْثَوْا۟ فِى ٱلْأَرْضِ مُفْسِدِينَ
7:161.
اِضْرِبْ بِّعَصَاکَ الْحَجَر اس جگہ اَلْحَجَر ہے اور اَلْ کے معنے خاص چیز کے ہوتے ہیں۔ پس آیت کا صحیح ترجمہ یہ نہیں کہ ’’پتھر پر مار‘‘ بلکہ یہ ہے کہ ’’فلاں پتھر پر مار‘‘۔
7:161.
That at present there is no trace of the springs at that spot is nothing to be wondered at, because it is not yet definitely known in what particular region Moses performed his journey. Moreover, it is a matter of common experience that springs sometimes cease to flow and their mouths become closed abruptly in the mountains. The event referred to here occurred thousands of years ago and it is well known that sometimes a spring gushes forth, but soon the flow of water ceases and the spring runs dry. Often springs once flowing become so dry that no trace of them is left. Even as late as the end of the 15th century twelve springs actually flowed at this place. "The rock stands within the border of Arabia and some of his (the Prophet’s) countrymen must needs (sic) have seen it if he himself had not, as it is most probable he had. And in effect he seems to be in the right. For one, who went into those parts in the end of the fifteenth century, tells us expressly that the water issued from twelve places of the
7:161.
Important Words:
عصا (rod). عصا الرجل means, he beat the man with a rod. عصا القوم means, he brought together the people, or he made them agree on some matter of common concern. عصا means: (1) a rod strong enough to support the weight of a man; (2) communal and family life; (3) a community; (4) the shin-bone (Aqrab).
الحجر (rock) is from حجر i.e. it prevented or resisted. الحجر means, a stone; a great mass of stone; a rock (Lane).
Commentary:
This verse mentions another favour bestowed on the Israelites. When once they were hard pressed by thirst and no water was procurable in the desert, God saved them by revealing to Moses the knowledge of a rock from which water flowed out when struck with a rod.
The demand of the Israelites for water and their being supplied with it is mentioned at two places in the Bible. At one place mention is made of the twelve springs of Elim, but nothing is said there of Moses’ striking the rock with his rod (Exod. 15:27). At the other place, Moses, by divine command, struck the rock Horeb with his rod, and there flowed out abundant water with which the Israelites and their animals slaked their thirst (Exod. 17:1-7 Numb. 20:2-11). Here no mention is made of the number of springs. It appears that the Quran refers to the occurrence relating to the rock of Horeb because, with the only difference that the Bible does not give the number of springs whereas the Quran gives a definite number, almost all the details narrated in the Bible concur with the narrative of the Quran. As for the slight difference with regard to the number of springs, reason favours the narrative of the Quran. The Israelites numbered several thousands besides riding animals and beasts of burden, and one spring was certainly insufficient for such a large number, especially when we take into consideration the fact that the thirsty Israelites were, according to the Bible, in a state of extreme exasperation at that time and were prepared even to stone Moses to death. It is possible, however, that at the source there was only one mouth of the spring, but it divided into twelve channels as it flowed down the rock, the number being in conformity with the number of the Israelite tribes.
If at present there is no trace of the twelve springs at that spot, it is no wonder; for it is a matter of common experience that sometimes several springs rising at the same spot have some of their openings closed and cease to flow. From a testimony quoted by Sale, however, it appears that even as late as the end of the fifteenth century, twelve springs actually flowed there. He says: "The rock stands within the border of Arabia and some of his (the Prophet’s) countrymen must needs have seen it if he himself had not, as it is most probable he had. And in effect he seems to be in the right. For one who went into those parts in the end of the fifteenth century tells us expressly that the water issued from twelve places of the rock, according to the number of the tribes of Israel" (Al-Koran by Sale, page 8).
The miracle of Moses on this occasion did not lie in bringing about a thing against the known laws of nature, but in the fact that God revealed to him the specific spot where water was just ready to flow at a blow of his rod. It is within the experience of those who study geological conditions in rocky districts that sometimes water flows underneath small hillocks or rocks and gushes forth when the rock is struck with something heavy or pointed.
As Manna and Salwa had already been bestowed on the Israelites, God now fittingly asks them to eat and drink of what Allah has provided. But as a life of ease and independence is likely to make men arrogant and mischievous, God at the same time warns the Israelites to exercise self-restraint and refrain from creating trouble and disorder in the land.
d
7:161.
1
اِضْرِبْ بِّعَصَاکَ الْحَجَر اس جگہ اَلْحَجَر ہے اور اَلْ کے معنے خاص چیز کے ہوتے ہیں۔ پس آیت کا صحیح ترجمہ یہ نہیں کہ ’’پتھر پر مار‘‘ بلکہ یہ ہے کہ ’’فلاں پتھر پر مار‘‘۔
b
7:161.
67
Important Words:
عصا (rod). عصا الرجل means, he beat the man with a rod. عصا القوم means, he brought together the people, or he made them agree on some matter of common concern. عصا means: (1) a rod strong enough to support the weight of a man; (2) communal and family life; (3) a community; (4) the shin-bone (Aqrab).
الحجر (rock) is from حجر i.e. it prevented or resisted. الحجر means, a stone; a great mass of stone; a rock (Lane).
Commentary:
This verse mentions another favour bestowed on the Israelites. When once they were hard pressed by thirst and no water was procurable in the desert, God saved them by revealing to Moses the knowledge of a rock from which water flowed out when struck with a rod.
The demand of the Israelites for water and their being supplied with it is mentioned at two places in the Bible. At one place mention is made of the twelve springs of Elim, but nothing is said there of Moses’ striking the rock with his rod (Exod. 15:27). At the other place, Moses, by divine command, struck the rock Horeb with his rod, and there flowed out abundant water with which the Israelites and their animals slaked their thirst (Exod. 17:1-7 Numb. 20:2-11). Here no mention is made of the number of springs. It appears that the Quran refers to the occurrence relating to the rock of Horeb because, with the only difference that the Bible does not give the number of springs whereas the Quran gives a definite number, almost all the details narrated in the Bible concur with the narrative of the Quran. As for the slight difference with regard to the number of springs, reason favours the narrative of the Quran. The Israelites numbered several thousands besides riding animals and beasts of burden, and one spring was certainly insufficient for such a large number, especially when we take into consideration the fact that the thirsty Israelites were, according to the Bible, in a state of extreme exasperation at that time and were prepared even to stone Moses to death. It is possible, however, that at the source there was only one mouth of the spring, but it divided into twelve channels as it flowed down the rock, the number being in conformity with the number of the Israelite tribes.
If at present there is no trace of the twelve springs at that spot, it is no wonder; for it is a matter of common experience that sometimes several springs rising at the same spot have some of their openings closed and cease to flow. From a testimony quoted by Sale, however, it appears that even as late as the end of the fifteenth century, twelve springs actually flowed there. He says: "The rock stands within the border of Arabia and some of his (the Prophet’s) countrymen must needs have seen it if he himself had not, as it is most probable he had. And in effect he seems to be in the right. For one who went into those parts in the end of the fifteenth century tells us expressly that the water issued from twelve places of the rock, according to the number of the tribes of Israel" (Al-Koran by Sale, page 8).
The miracle of Moses on this occasion did not lie in bringing about a thing against the known laws of nature, but in the fact that God revealed to him the specific spot where water was just ready to flow at a blow of his rod. It is within the experience of those who study geological conditions in rocky districts that sometimes water flows underneath small hillocks or rocks and gushes forth when the rock is struck with something heavy or pointed.
As Manna and Salwa had already been bestowed on the Israelites, God now fittingly asks them to eat and drink of what Allah has provided. But as a life of ease and independence is likely to make men arrogant and mischievous, God at the same time warns the Israelites to exercise self-restraint and refrain from creating trouble and disorder in the land.
b
7:161.
101
That at present there is no trace of the springs at that spot is nothing to be wondered at, because it is not yet definitely known in what particular region Moses performed his journey. Moreover, it is a matter of common experience that springs sometimes cease to flow and their mouths become closed abruptly in the mountains. The event referred to here occurred thousands of years ago and it is well known that sometimes a spring gushes forth, but soon the flow of water ceases and the spring runs dry. Often springs once flowing become so dry that no trace of them is left. Even as late as the end of the 15th century twelve springs actually flowed at this place. "The rock stands within the border of Arabia and some of his (the Prophet’s) countrymen must needs (sic) have seen it if he himself had not, as it is most probable he had. And in effect he seems to be in the right. For one, who went into those parts in the end of the fifteenth century, tells us expressly that the water issued from twelve places of the
وَلَمَّا جَآءَهُمْ كِتَٰبٌ مِّنْ عِندِ ٱللَّهِ مُصَدِّقٌ لِّمَا مَعَهُمْ وَكَانُوا۟ مِن قَبْلُ يَسْتَفْتِحُونَ عَلَى ٱلَّذِينَ كَفَرُوا۟ فَلَمَّا جَآءَهُم مَّا عَرَفُوا۟ كَفَرُوا۟ بِهِۦ ۚ فَلَعْنَةُ ٱللَّهِ عَلَى ٱلْكَٰفِرِينَ
یہاں فَاء کا ترجمہ چھوڑا گیا ہے کیونکہ اردو میں ایسے موقع پر کوئی لفظ استعمال نہیں ہوتا۔
2:147.
2:42, 92, 98, 102; 3:82; 4:48; 35:32; 46:13.
The verse signifies that Jews used to disclose to the pagan Arabs the fact that there were prophecies in their Scriptures about the advent of a Prophet who would spread the truth all over the world (Deut. 18: 18 & 28: 1-2). But when that Prophet actually appeared, even those of them who had seen the Signs of God being fulfilled in his person turned away from him. Or the meaning may be that before the advent of the Holy Prophet the Jews used to pray fervently to God to raise a Prophet who should cause the true Faith to triumph over false Faiths (Hisham, i. 150). But when the Prophet for whom they had prayed actually came and the ascendancy of truth over falsehood became manifest, they refused to accept him; consequently bringing on their heads the curse of God.
2:42, 92, 98, 102; 3:82; 4:48; 35:32; 46:13.
2:147.
Important Words:
یستفتحون (they prayed for victory) is derived from فتح meaning (1) he opened a thing, or he disclosed a thing; (2) he conquered or gained victory over. The word یستفتحون would, therefore, have two meanings: (1) they disclose; and (2) they ask or pray for victory (Aqrab).
Commentary:
According to the first meaning of یستفتحون the verse would signify that Jews used to disclose to the pagan Arabs the fact that there was foretold in their Scriptures the appearance of a Prophet who would spread the truth all over the world. But when that Prophet actually appeared, even those of them who had seen the signs of God fulfilled in his person turned away from him.
Taking the second meaning of the word, the verse would signify that before the advent of the Holy Prophet, the Jews used to pray fervently to God to raise a Prophet who would cause the true faith to triumph over the false ones (Hisham, i. 150). But when the Prophet for whom they prayed actually came and the ascendancy of truth over falsehood became manifest, they refused to accept him. This naturally brought on their heads the curse of God.
It may be repeated here that the word "curse" is not used in the Quran as abuse but as indicative of the actual state or condition of a person or a people. As explained under the preceding verse, the literal meaning of the word لعنة is "to be driven away from God" and hence all who stand in opposition to God and His Prophets incur لعنة and are spoken of as being under the curse of God; i.e. driven away from God’s presence and deprived of His mercy.
b
2:42, 92, 98, 102; 3:82; 4:48; 35:32; 46:13.
c
2:147.
2
یہاں فَاء کا ترجمہ چھوڑا گیا ہے کیونکہ اردو میں ایسے موقع پر کوئی لفظ استعمال نہیں ہوتا۔
a
2:42, 92, 98, 102; 3:82; 4:48; 35:32; 46:13.
b
2:147.
96
Important Words:
یستفتحون (they prayed for victory) is derived from فتح meaning (1) he opened a thing, or he disclosed a thing; (2) he conquered or gained victory over. The word یستفتحون would, therefore, have two meanings: (1) they disclose; and (2) they ask or pray for victory (Aqrab).
Commentary:
According to the first meaning of یستفتحون the verse would signify that Jews used to disclose to the pagan Arabs the fact that there was foretold in their Scriptures the appearance of a Prophet who would spread the truth all over the world. But when that Prophet actually appeared, even those of them who had seen the signs of God fulfilled in his person turned away from him.
Taking the second meaning of the word, the verse would signify that before the advent of the Holy Prophet, the Jews used to pray fervently to God to raise a Prophet who would cause the true faith to triumph over the false ones (Hisham, i. 150). But when the Prophet for whom they prayed actually came and the ascendancy of truth over falsehood became manifest, they refused to accept him. This naturally brought on their heads the curse of God.
It may be repeated here that the word "curse" is not used in the Quran as abuse but as indicative of the actual state or condition of a person or a people. As explained under the preceding verse, the literal meaning of the word لعنة is "to be driven away from God" and hence all who stand in opposition to God and His Prophets incur لعنة and are spoken of as being under the curse of God; i.e. driven away from God’s presence and deprived of His mercy.
a
2:147.
f
2:42, 92, 98, 102; 3:82; 4:48; 35:32; 46:13.
120
The verse signifies that Jews used to disclose to the pagan Arabs the fact that there were prophecies in their Scriptures about the advent of a Prophet who would spread the truth all over the world (Deut. 18: 18 & 28: 1-2). But when that Prophet actually appeared, even those of them who had seen the Signs of God being fulfilled in his person turned away from him. Or the meaning may be that before the advent of the Holy Prophet the Jews used to pray fervently to God to raise a Prophet who should cause the true Faith to triumph over false Faiths (Hisham, i. 150). But when the Prophet for whom they had prayed actually came and the ascendancy of truth over falsehood became manifest, they refused to accept him; consequently bringing on their heads the curse of God.
بِئْسَمَا ٱشْتَرَوْا۟ بِهِۦٓ أَنفُسَهُمْ أَن يَكْفُرُوا۟ بِمَآ أَنزَلَ ٱللَّهُ بَغْيًا أَن يُنَزِّلَ ٱللَّهُ مِن فَضْلِهِۦ عَلَىٰ مَن يَشَآءُ مِنْ عِبَادِهِۦ ۖ فَبَآءُو بِغَضَبٍ عَلَىٰ غَضَبٍ ۚ وَلِلْكَٰفِرِينَ عَذَابٌ مُّهِينٌ
3:113; 5:61.
3:113; 5:61.
3:113; 5:61.
Important Words:
بغیا (grudging) is derived from بغی. They say بغی الشیء i.e. he wished or desired or sought the thing. بغی الرجل means, the man transgressed or turned away from the truth, or he disobeyed or revolted against a lawful authority. بغی علیه means, he wronged him and continued long in the act (Aqrab). بغی علی اخیه means, he envied his brother; he wished that a blessing might become transferred from his brother to himself (Lane). In the text the word has been translated as "grudging" which is the same as "envying".
باؤا (they incurred) is derived from باء which means, he returned. باء به means, he returned with it. باء بغضب من الله means, he returned with anger from God, i.e. the anger of God came upon him; he incurred His anger (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
In this verse, we are told that the Jews rejected the Holy Prophet solely because he was of different nationality. The verse means that the Jews upon whom the truth has dawned and who have come to recognize the Quran as the very Book mentioned in their Scriptures are, out of sheer pride and obstinacy, impiously rejecting it, little knowing that, by so doing, they are hastening the ruin of their own souls. The truth is that they cannot bear to see a Prophet raised from among any people other than their own. They fail to realize that all alike are the creatures of God and there is no earthly reason why Prophets should appear only from among the Israelites.
The words باؤا بغضب translated here as, they incurred wrath, literally mean "they returned with (God’s) wrath" which points to the fact that though God called them to His presence in order to bestow on them His favours, they, instead of receiving favours, returned from His presence loaded with His displeasure and anger.
The words, wrath upon wrath, are used to signify that even before the coming of the Holy Prophet the Jews had incurred the anger of God by their rejection of Jesus and other iniquities; so when they rejected the Holy Prophet, they incurred wrath upon wrath, i.e. they added to their previous load of God’s anger.
d
3:113; 5:61.
a
3:113; 5:61.
97
Important Words:
بغیا (grudging) is derived from بغی. They say بغی الشیء i.e. he wished or desired or sought the thing. بغی الرجل means, the man transgressed or turned away from the truth, or he disobeyed or revolted against a lawful authority. بغی علیه means, he wronged him and continued long in the act (Aqrab). بغی علی اخیه means, he envied his brother; he wished that a blessing might become transferred from his brother to himself (Lane). In the text the word has been translated as "grudging" which is the same as "envying".
باؤا (they incurred) is derived from باء which means, he returned. باء به means, he returned with it. باء بغضب من الله means, he returned with anger from God, i.e. the anger of God came upon him; he incurred His anger (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
In this verse, we are told that the Jews rejected the Holy Prophet solely because he was of different nationality. The verse means that the Jews upon whom the truth has dawned and who have come to recognize the Quran as the very Book mentioned in their Scriptures are, out of sheer pride and obstinacy, impiously rejecting it, little knowing that, by so doing, they are hastening the ruin of their own souls. The truth is that they cannot bear to see a Prophet raised from among any people other than their own. They fail to realize that all alike are the creatures of God and there is no earthly reason why Prophets should appear only from among the Israelites.
The words باؤا بغضب translated here as, they incurred wrath, literally mean "they returned with (God’s) wrath" which points to the fact that though God called them to His presence in order to bestow on them His favours, they, instead of receiving favours, returned from His presence loaded with His displeasure and anger.
The words, wrath upon wrath, are used to signify that even before the coming of the Holy Prophet the Jews had incurred the anger of God by their rejection of Jesus and other iniquities; so when they rejected the Holy Prophet, they incurred wrath upon wrath, i.e. they added to their previous load of God’s anger.
b
3:113; 5:61.
وَإِذَا قِيلَ لَهُمْ ءَامِنُوا۟ بِمَآ أَنزَلَ ٱللَّهُ قَالُوا۟ نُؤْمِنُ بِمَآ أُنزِلَ عَلَيْنَا وَيَكْفُرُونَ بِمَا وَرَآءَهُۥ وَهُوَ ٱلْحَقُّ مُصَدِّقًا لِّمَا مَعَهُمْ ۗ قُلْ فَلِمَ تَقْتُلُونَ أَنۢبِيَآءَ ٱللَّهِ مِن قَبْلُ إِن كُنتُم مُّؤْمِنِينَ
2:171.
3:113, 182.
2:171.
3:113, 182.
Commentary:
The verse means that whenever Islam is presented to Jews, they, far from reflecting over its claims, consider it enough to say that they will believe in what is sent to Israelite Prophets only, and not in the revelation of outsiders, although the revelation they reject on such flimsy grounds fulfils the prophecies contained in their own Scriptures about a new Book. Further, it is added that the statement that they would adhere to what was revealed to Israelite Prophets is absurd, seeing that they had opposed even their own Prophets in their time.
This verse also makes it clear what the word مصدقا means when followed by the preposition لام. The expression has been used as a proof of the truth of the Quran, and it is therefore clear that it conveys the sense of "fulfilling" and not that of "confirming". It is only the fulfilment of prophecies in the Bible that can serve as evidence of the truth of the Quran. In this connection, see also 2:42.
For the prophecies alluded to in this verse, i.e. the prophecies contained in the Bible about the Quran and the Holy Prophet, the reader is referred to Deut. 18:15-19; Acts 3:19-24; Deut. 33:2; Matt. 21:42-44; Isa. 21:13-17; 28:9-13; chap. 42; 62:2-4; Dan. 7; etc.
For a discussion of the words, why did you attempt to slay the Prophets, see under 2:62.
a
3:113, 182.
e
2:171.
a
2:171.
b
3:113, 182.
98
Commentary:
The verse means that whenever Islam is presented to Jews, they, far from reflecting over its claims, consider it enough to say that they will believe in what is sent to Israelite Prophets only, and not in the revelation of outsiders, although the revelation they reject on such flimsy grounds fulfils the prophecies contained in their own Scriptures about a new Book. Further, it is added that the statement that they would adhere to what was revealed to Israelite Prophets is absurd, seeing that they had opposed even their own Prophets in their time.
This verse also makes it clear what the word مصدقا means when followed by the preposition لام. The expression has been used as a proof of the truth of the Quran, and it is therefore clear that it conveys the sense of "fulfilling" and not that of "confirming". It is only the fulfilment of prophecies in the Bible that can serve as evidence of the truth of the Quran. In this connection, see also 2:42.
For the prophecies alluded to in this verse, i.e. the prophecies contained in the Bible about the Quran and the Holy Prophet, the reader is referred to Deut. 18:15-19; Acts 3:19-24; Deut. 33:2; Matt. 21:42-44; Isa. 21:13-17; 28:9-13; chap. 42; 62:2-4; Dan. 7; etc.
For a discussion of the words, why did you attempt to slay the Prophets, see under 2:62.
c
2:171.
d
3:113, 182.
أَلَمْ تَعْلَمْ أَنَّ ٱللَّهَ لَهُۥ مُلْكُ ٱلسَّمَٰوَٰتِ وَٱلْأَرْضِ ۗ وَمَا لَكُم مِّن دُونِ ٱللَّهِ مِن وَلِىٍّ وَلَا نَصِيرٍ
3:190; 5:41; 7:159; 9:116; 43:86; 57:6.
3:190; 5:41; 7:159; 9:116; 43:86; 57:6.
3:190; 5:41; 7:159; 9:116; 43:86; 57:6.
Important Words:
ولی (protector). They say ولی الرجل i.e. he helped him; or he made friends with him. ولی البلد means, he got control or authority over the town. So ولی means: (1) friend; (2) helper; (3) protector; (4) ally, etc. (Aqrab).
Commentary:
In this verse an argument has been brought forth in support of the fact that Quranic revelation abrogates the previous revelations. God says that to Him belongs the entire universe, the heavens and the earth, and it was in the fitness of things that finally a revelation meant for the whole of mankind should have made its appearance.
In the verse, the Jews are also told that it will be to their own interest to embrace Islam; for otherwise they will have neither friend nor helper against Allah.
There is a subtle implication in the verse, viz. that the Muslims, though despised and persecuted today, will not only receive spiritual favours from God, but will also become masters of large earthly kingdoms as well; for is not Allah the Controller of the heavens and the earth?
b
3:190; 5:41; 7:159; 9:116; 43:86; 57:6.
a
3:190; 5:41; 7:159; 9:116; 43:86; 57:6.
114
Important Words:
ولی (protector). They say ولی الرجل i.e. he helped him; or he made friends with him. ولی البلد means, he got control or authority over the town. So ولی means: (1) friend; (2) helper; (3) protector; (4) ally, etc. (Aqrab).
Commentary:
In this verse an argument has been brought forth in support of the fact that Quranic revelation abrogates the previous revelations. God says that to Him belongs the entire universe, the heavens and the earth, and it was in the fitness of things that finally a revelation meant for the whole of mankind should have made its appearance.
In the verse, the Jews are also told that it will be to their own interest to embrace Islam; for otherwise they will have neither friend nor helper against Allah.
There is a subtle implication in the verse, viz. that the Muslims, though despised and persecuted today, will not only receive spiritual favours from God, but will also become masters of large earthly kingdoms as well; for is not Allah the Controller of the heavens and the earth?
a
3:190; 5:41; 7:159; 9:116; 43:86; 57:6.
أَمْ تُرِيدُونَ أَن تَسْـَٔلُوا۟ رَسُولَكُمْ كَمَا سُئِلَ مُوسَىٰ مِن قَبْلُ ۗ وَمَن يَتَبَدَّلِ ٱلْكُفْرَ بِٱلْإِيمَٰنِ فَقَدْ ضَلَّ سَوَآءَ ٱلسَّبِيلِ
4:154.
اس جگہ ’’سمجھو کہ‘‘ کے الفاظ فَقَدْ کا ترجمہ ہے۔ فَاء اپنے بعد ایک محذوف پر دلالت کرتا ہے جو ظاہر کیا گیا ہے۔
4:154.
This verse mentions another artifice which the Jews employed to overthrow the mission of the Holy Prophet. They asked him absurd and silly questions as had no bearing on religion. This they did to inoculate Muslims with the spirit of stupid questioning, so that the dignity of faith should suffer and they may fall victim to doubts.
4:154.
Important Words:
سواء (right) is derived from سوی. They say سوی الرجل i.e. his affairs became straight and well. سواء means: (1) the central portion of a thing; (2) equal. سواء السبیل means, the straight or right portion of a way; or a straight or right way (Lisan & Aqrab).
Commentary:
This verse mentions another artifice which the Jews employed to overthrow the mission of the Holy Prophet. They asked him absurd and silly questions as had no bearing on religion. This they did to inoculate Muslims with the same spirit of stupid questioning, so that their hearts might gradually become estranged from the dignity of faith and give way to doubt. In warning Muslims against such a course, the Quran points out that the Jews had ruined themselves by putting similar questions to Moses, and that the Muslims should, therefore, beware of following their evil example. In fact, unnecessary and irrelevant questions in religious matters eventually lead one to loss of faith, for they tend to degrade religion to a plaything or a piece of idle philosophy.
As to the nature of questions put to Moses by the Israelites, the Quran refers to one in 4:154. Says God: The People of the Book ask thee to cause a Book to descend on them from heaven. They asked Moses a greater thing than this; they said, 'Show us Allah openly.' then a destructive punishment overtook them because of their transgression. Then they took the calf for worship after clear Signs had come to them, but We pardoned even that. And We gave Moses manifest authority. This verse gives us an indication as to the nature of the questions that were put to Moses, and Muslims are forbidden to put such questions to their Prophet.
c
4:154.
1
اس جگہ ’’سمجھو کہ‘‘ کے الفاظ فَقَدْ کا ترجمہ ہے۔ فَاء اپنے بعد ایک محذوف پر دلالت کرتا ہے جو ظاہر کیا گیا ہے۔
b
4:154.
115
Important Words:
سواء (right) is derived from سوی. They say سوی الرجل i.e. his affairs became straight and well. سواء means: (1) the central portion of a thing; (2) equal. سواء السبیل means, the straight or right portion of a way; or a straight or right way (Lisan & Aqrab).
Commentary:
This verse mentions another artifice which the Jews employed to overthrow the mission of the Holy Prophet. They asked him absurd and silly questions as had no bearing on religion. This they did to inoculate Muslims with the same spirit of stupid questioning, so that their hearts might gradually become estranged from the dignity of faith and give way to doubt. In warning Muslims against such a course, the Quran points out that the Jews had ruined themselves by putting similar questions to Moses, and that the Muslims should, therefore, beware of following their evil example. In fact, unnecessary and irrelevant questions in religious matters eventually lead one to loss of faith, for they tend to degrade religion to a plaything or a piece of idle philosophy.
As to the nature of questions put to Moses by the Israelites, the Quran refers to one in 4:154. Says God: The People of the Book ask thee to cause a Book to descend on them from heaven. They asked Moses a greater thing than this; they said, 'Show us Allah openly.' then a destructive punishment overtook them because of their transgression. Then they took the calf for worship after clear Signs had come to them, but We pardoned even that. And We gave Moses manifest authority. This verse gives us an indication as to the nature of the questions that were put to Moses, and Muslims are forbidden to put such questions to their Prophet.
b
4:154.
133
This verse mentions another artifice which the Jews employed to overthrow the mission of the Holy Prophet. They asked him absurd and silly questions as had no bearing on religion. This they did to inoculate Muslims with the spirit of stupid questioning, so that the dignity of faith should suffer and they may fall victim to doubts.
وَقَالَ ٱلَّذِينَ لَا يَعْلَمُونَ لَوْلَا يُكَلِّمُنَا ٱللَّهُ أَوْ تَأْتِينَآ ءَايَةٌ ۗ كَذَٰلِكَ قَالَ ٱلَّذِينَ مِن قَبْلِهِم مِّثْلَ قَوْلِهِمْ ۘ تَشَٰبَهَتْ قُلُوبُهُمْ ۗ قَدْ بَيَّنَّا ٱلْءَايَٰتِ لِقَوْمٍ يُوقِنُونَ
6:38; 20:135; 21:6; 43:54.
قوم کے معنے عربی زبان میں صرف ایک نسل کے انسانوں کے نہیں ہوتے بلکہ اعوان اور انصار کی جماعت کے بھی ہوتے ہیں۔ خواہ دنیوی وجوہ سے تعلق رکھتے ہوں یا دینی یا علمی یا کسی اور وجہ سے۔ تاج العروس میں لکھا ہے اَلْقَوْمُ: اَلْجَمَاعَۃُ مِنَ الرِّجَالِ وَالنِّسَآءِ لِاَنَّ قَوْمَ کُلِّ رَجُلٍ شِیْعَتُہٗ وَعَشِیْرَتُہٗ یعنی قوم کے معنے مردوں اور عورتوں کی ایک جماعت کے ہوتے ہیں کیونکہ قوم انسان کے رشتہ داروں یا اس کے مددگاروں اور ہم خیال لوگوں کی جماعت کا نام ہے۔ پس قوم کا ترجمہ اس جگہ ’’ایسے لوگوں‘‘ کے الفاظ سے کیا گیا ہے۔ کیونکہ اردو میں ایسا کوئی لفظ نہیں جو سیاس
6:38; 20:135; 21:6; 43:54.
It may be noted that whenever disbelievers are spoken of as demanding a Sign, the word "Sign" means either a Sign of their own devising or a Sign of punishment (6:38; 13:28; 20:134, 135; 21:6; 29:51).
6:38; 20:134; 21:6; 43:54.
This verse refers to two very unreasonable demands of the People of the Book—Jews and Christians: (1) That God should speak to them directly and tell them that the Holy Prophet was His true Messenger; (2) That they should be shown Signs of their own devising.
In reply to the first demand, the Quran says that only ignorant people, unacquainted with the ways of God, make such a demand. This demand was made in the time of all the previous Prophets and was rejected as foolish. So it was unreasonable on their part to demand from the Holy Prophet something which their own Prophets had not complied with.
In reply to their demand for a Sign, they are told that signs are sufficient for the guidance of right-minded people have already been shown and they could, if they so desired, profit by them, but nothing could avail an obstinate and perverse person. The fact that a demand for a Sign was made from the Holy Prophet does not show that no Signs had been shown by him. Indeed, if such a demand be considered as proof of the absence of Signs, no Prophet could be proved to have shown any Sign; for a similar demand was made from every Prophet of God, notably Jesus (Matt. 12:38, 39).
It may be also noted here that whenever disbelievers are spoken of as demanding an آیة or Sign, the word means either a Sign of their own devising or a Sign in the form of divine punishment (see 21:6, 7; 6:38-51; 13:28-33; 20:134, 135; 29:51).
c
6:38; 20:135; 21:6; 43:54.
2
قوم کے معنے عربی زبان میں صرف ایک نسل کے انسانوں کے نہیں ہوتے بلکہ اعوان اور انصار کی جماعت کے بھی ہوتے ہیں۔ خواہ دنیوی وجوہ سے تعلق رکھتے ہوں یا دینی یا علمی یا کسی اور وجہ سے۔ تاج العروس میں لکھا ہے اَلْقَوْمُ: اَلْجَمَاعَۃُ مِنَ الرِّجَالِ وَالنِّسَآءِ لِاَنَّ قَوْمَ کُلِّ رَجُلٍ شِیْعَتُہٗ وَعَشِیْرَتُہٗ یعنی قوم کے معنے مردوں اور عورتوں کی ایک جماعت کے ہوتے ہیں کیونکہ قوم انسان کے رشتہ داروں یا اس کے مددگاروں اور ہم خیال لوگوں کی جماعت کا نام ہے۔ پس قوم کا ترجمہ اس جگہ ’’ایسے لوگوں‘‘ کے الفاظ سے کیا گیا ہے۔ کیونکہ اردو میں ایسا کوئی لفظ نہیں جو سیاس
c
6:38; 20:134; 21:6; 43:54.
125
This verse refers to two very unreasonable demands of the People of the Book—Jews and Christians: (1) That God should speak to them directly and tell them that the Holy Prophet was His true Messenger; (2) That they should be shown Signs of their own devising.
In reply to the first demand, the Quran says that only ignorant people, unacquainted with the ways of God, make such a demand. This demand was made in the time of all the previous Prophets and was rejected as foolish. So it was unreasonable on their part to demand from the Holy Prophet something which their own Prophets had not complied with.
In reply to their demand for a Sign, they are told that signs are sufficient for the guidance of right-minded people have already been shown and they could, if they so desired, profit by them, but nothing could avail an obstinate and perverse person. The fact that a demand for a Sign was made from the Holy Prophet does not show that no Signs had been shown by him. Indeed, if such a demand be considered as proof of the absence of Signs, no Prophet could be proved to have shown any Sign; for a similar demand was made from every Prophet of God, notably Jesus (Matt. 12:38, 39).
It may be also noted here that whenever disbelievers are spoken of as demanding an آیة or Sign, the word means either a Sign of their own devising or a Sign in the form of divine punishment (see 21:6, 7; 6:38-51; 13:28-33; 20:134, 135; 29:51).
d
6:38; 20:135; 21:6; 43:54.
141
It may be noted that whenever disbelievers are spoken of as demanding a Sign, the word "Sign" means either a Sign of their own devising or a Sign of punishment (6:38; 13:28; 20:134, 135; 21:6; 29:51).
وَلَن تَرْضَىٰ عَنكَ ٱلْيَهُودُ وَلَا ٱلنَّصَٰرَىٰ حَتَّىٰ تَتَّبِعَ مِلَّتَهُمْ ۗ قُلْ إِنَّ هُدَى ٱللَّهِ هُوَ ٱلْهُدَىٰ ۗ وَلَئِنِ ٱتَّبَعْتَ أَهْوَآءَهُم بَعْدَ ٱلَّذِى جَآءَكَ مِنَ ٱلْعِلْمِ ۙ مَا لَكَ مِنَ ٱللَّهِ مِن وَلِىٍّ وَلَا نَصِيرٍ
2:146; 13:38.
2:146; 13:38.
2:112.
2:146; 13:38.
Important Words:
ملة (creed) is derived from مل and means, among other things, religion; law of Shari‘ah; the right way (Lane).
اھواء (evil desires) is the plural of ھوی (an evil desire). The verb ھوی means, he or it fell or descended or came down from a higher position to a lower one. It also means, it rose or ascended. الھوی means, a desire; an evil or low desire; an evil inclination; love and attachment اتبع ھواہ means, he followed his evil inclination, i.e. swerved from the way of rectitude (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
The words, if thou follow their evil desires, though apparently addressed to the Holy Prophet, are really general in their application, being meant for his followers. The Holy Prophet has been described in the Quran as a model for mankind and a paragon of perfection (3:32; 33:22) and therefore he was infinitely above the possibility of complying with the evil wishes of the Jews and the Christians concerning the guidance he had directly received from God. At several other places in the Quran, the same form of address has been used. This is done to emphasize the importance of the commandment which is seemingly addressed to the Holy Prophet but is really meant for his followers (see 17:24). This mode of address is not peculiar to the Quran. In the Bible we come across similar instances (e.g. Deut. 16:21, 22).
e
2:146; 13:38.
a
2:112.
b
2:146; 13:38.
127
Important Words:
ملة (creed) is derived from مل and means, among other things, religion; law of Shari‘ah; the right way (Lane).
اھواء (evil desires) is the plural of ھوی (an evil desire). The verb ھوی means, he or it fell or descended or came down from a higher position to a lower one. It also means, it rose or ascended. الھوی means, a desire; an evil or low desire; an evil inclination; love and attachment اتبع ھواہ means, he followed his evil inclination, i.e. swerved from the way of rectitude (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
The words, if thou follow their evil desires, though apparently addressed to the Holy Prophet, are really general in their application, being meant for his followers. The Holy Prophet has been described in the Quran as a model for mankind and a paragon of perfection (3:32; 33:22) and therefore he was infinitely above the possibility of complying with the evil wishes of the Jews and the Christians concerning the guidance he had directly received from God. At several other places in the Quran, the same form of address has been used. This is done to emphasize the importance of the commandment which is seemingly addressed to the Holy Prophet but is really meant for his followers (see 17:24). This mode of address is not peculiar to the Quran. In the Bible we come across similar instances (e.g. Deut. 16:21, 22).
a
2:146; 13:38.
وَإِذْ جَعَلْنَا ٱلْبَيْتَ مَثَابَةً لِّلنَّاسِ وَأَمْنًا وَٱتَّخِذُوا۟ مِن مَّقَامِ إِبْرَٰهِۦمَ مُصَلًّى ۖ وَعَهِدْنَآ إِلَىٰٓ إِبْرَٰهِۦمَ وَإِسْمَٰعِيلَ أَن طَهِّرَا بَيْتِىَ لِلطَّآئِفِينَ وَٱلْعَٰكِفِينَ وَٱلرُّكَّعِ ٱلسُّجُودِ
3:98; 22:27.
مَثَابَةً (Mathabah) 的含意是参观者应得参观报酬的地方; 或人们常去的场所 (مُفْرَدَات)。据传说 «古兰经» 本身也暗示, 天房原来是阿丹建的 (3:97), 并一度成为他后代的礼拜中心。之后, 人们分裂成不同的团体, 选定了不同的礼拜中心。伊布拉欣 (亚伯拉罕) 于是重建了天房, 并通过他的儿子伊司马仪 (以实玛利) 把天房继续作为他后代的礼拜中心。可是随着时间的消逝, 它实际上已变成了里面有数目多达360个偶像的一所偶像之堂--------差不多同一年中的天数一样。可是在穆圣降临时, 它又成了各民族的礼拜中心, 穆圣作为被指派给全人类的使者, 使阿丹之后分离的人们团结得一如兄弟。
كَعْبَة (Ka‘bah, 天房), 而且麦加城被宣布为和平与安全的地方。有史以来, 一些强大的帝国崩溃瓦解, 大片土地荒芜了, 但麦加的安定实质上从未受到扰乱。其他宗教的宗教中心从未声称, 而事实上也从未享有这样的安宁和免于遭受危险。可是麦加一直是一个安全可靠的地方。外来征服者从来没进过城。它始终保持在尊敬它的那些人手中。
اَلْمَثَابَۃُ: اَلْمَوْضِعُ الَّذِیْ یُثَابُ اِلَیْہِ اَیْ یُرْجَعُ اِلَیْہِ مَرَّۃً بَعْدَ اُخْرٰی (تاج العروس) یعنی مَثَابَۃ وہ جگہ ہوتی ہے جس کی طرف لوگ بار بار آئیں۔
اس جگہ عَھِدْنَا کے الفاظ ہیں اور عَھِدَ اِلَیْہِ کے معنے عربی میں اَوْصَاہُ کے ہیں یعنی تاکیدی حکم دیا۔
3:98; 22:27.
Mathabah signifies, a place paying a visit to which entitles one to reward; or resort of men (Mufradat). The Ka‘bah, as some traditions say and as hinted by the Qur’an itself, was originally built by Adam (3:97) and was, for sometime, the centre of worship for his progeny. Then in the course of time people became separated into different communities and adopted different centres for worship. Abraham then rebuilt it and it continued to remain a centre of worship for his progeny through his son Ishmael. But with the lapse of time it became virtually converted into a house of idols which numbered as many as 360—almost the same as the number of days in a year. At the advent of the Holy Prophet, however, it was again made the centre of worship for all nations, the Holy Prophet having been sent as a Messenger to all mankind, to unite those, who had become separated after Adam, into one common human brotherhood.
The Ka‘bah, and, for that matter, the town of Mecca, is declared to be a place of peace and security. Mighty empires have crumbled and large tracts of land laid waste since the dawn of history, but the peace of Mecca has never been materially disturbed. The religious centres of other Faiths have never claimed, and have, in fact, never enjoyed, such peace and immunity from danger. Mecca has, however, ever remained a place of security and safety. No alien conqueror has ever entered it. It has always remained in the hands of those who have held it in reverence.
3:98; 22:27.
Important Words:
مثابة (a resort) is derived from ثاب which means, he returned. ثاب الناس means, the people gathered together. ثاب المریض means, the patient returned to state of health. المثاب means, a place where people assemble; a place of resort; a place to which a visit entitles one to ثواب or reward (Mufradat & Aqrab). See also 2:104.
طائفین (who perform the circuit) is the plural of طائف which is derived from طاف meaning, he performed a circuit, he went round (Aqrab).
عھدنا (We commanded) is derived from عھد which means, he promised. عھد الی فلان means, he enjoined upon or commanded him and made it a condition for him (Aqrab).
عاکفین (who remain for devotion) is the plural of عاکف which is derived from عکف. They say عکف فی المکان i.e. he remained confined to a place, sticking to it. الاعتکاف and العکوف are words denoting a specified form of religious service in which the worshipper stays within the precincts of a mosque for a number of days which he passes in prayer and devotion (Aqrab & Mufradat).
مقام (station) is derived from قام i.e. he stood. مقام means, a place where one stands (Aqrab). Here it means the Ka‘bah, where Abraham stood worshipping God. مقام ابراھیم is also the name of a place near the Ka‘bah where, after making circuits around it, the pilgrims perform two rak‘ats of Prayer. It appears that after completing the construction of the Ka‘bah, Abraham said a prayer there in token of his gratitude to God; and it is to commemorate this prayer of Abraham that Muslims are required to perform two rak‘ats of Prayer there whenever they make circuits round the Ka‘bah.
Commentary:
The verse means that a promise was made to Abraham that the Ka‘bah would be made a مثابة or a place of reward and a centre where people would come together for worship. The truth of the first-mentioned part of the covenant, i.e. that the Ka‘bah is a place of reward, can only be recognized by believers who irresistibly feel the ennobling influence of a visit to the Holy Shrine. But the truth of the latter part of the prophecy, i.e. that it would become a resort for men, has been established by the facts of history during the past fourteen hundred years, being testified to even by the enemies of Islam. The Ka‘bah, as some traditions say and as hinted by the Quran itself, was originally built by Adam, and was, for sometime, the centre of worship for his progeny. Then in the course of time people became separated into different communities and adopted different centres for worship. Abraham then rebuilt the Ka‘bah and it continued to remain a centre of worship for his progeny through his son Ishmael. But with the lapse of time it was virtually converted into a house of idols which numbered as many as 360—almost the same as the number of days in a year. At the advent of the Holy Prophet, however, the Ka‘bah was again appointed the centre of worship for all nations, the Holy Prophet having been sent as a Messenger for all mankind. Thus, the nations which diverged after Adam were again brought together at the Ka‘bah which was made the spiritual centre for all humanity and for all time.
Again, the Ka‘bah, and, for that matter, the town of Mecca, is declared to be a place of peace and security. The truth of this prophecy is also beyond doubt. Mighty empires have crumbled and large tracts of land laid waste since the dawn of history, but the peace of Mecca has never been disturbed. The religious centres of other faiths have never claimed, and have in fact never enjoyed, such peace and immunity from danger. Jerusalem, Hardwar, Benares, etc., have all been conquered by alien conquerors and have been the scenes of much bloodshed and violence. But Mecca has ever remained a place of peace. No alien conqueror has ever entered it. The Sacred Town has always remained in the hands of those who have held it in reverence.
The commandment to purify the House of God refers not only to the outward cleaning of the House, but also to its purification from the abomination of idol-worship. The commandment was originally addressed to Abraham and Ishmael but it was finally and fully carried out by the Holy Prophet who, after the conquest of Mecca, cleared the Ka‘bah of all the 360 idols that had been placed there by the idolatrous Quraish.
d
3:98; 22:27.
79
مَثَابَةً (Mathabah) 的含意是参观者应得参观报酬的地方; 或人们常去的场所 (مُفْرَدَات)。据传说 «古兰经» 本身也暗示, 天房原来是阿丹建的 (3:97), 并一度成为他后代的礼拜中心。之后, 人们分裂成不同的团体, 选定了不同的礼拜中心。伊布拉欣 (亚伯拉罕) 于是重建了天房, 并通过他的儿子伊司马仪 (以实玛利) 把天房继续作为他后代的礼拜中心。可是随着时间的消逝, 它实际上已变成了里面有数目多达360个偶像的一所偶像之堂--------差不多同一年中的天数一样。可是在穆圣降临时, 它又成了各民族的礼拜中心, 穆圣作为被指派给全人类的使者, 使阿丹之后分离的人们团结得一如兄弟。
80
كَعْبَة (Ka‘bah, 天房), 而且麦加城被宣布为和平与安全的地方。有史以来, 一些强大的帝国崩溃瓦解, 大片土地荒芜了, 但麦加的安定实质上从未受到扰乱。其他宗教的宗教中心从未声称, 而事实上也从未享有这样的安宁和免于遭受危险。可是麦加一直是一个安全可靠的地方。外来征服者从来没进过城。它始终保持在尊敬它的那些人手中。
1
اَلْمَثَابَۃُ: اَلْمَوْضِعُ الَّذِیْ یُثَابُ اِلَیْہِ اَیْ یُرْجَعُ اِلَیْہِ مَرَّۃً بَعْدَ اُخْرٰی (تاج العروس) یعنی مَثَابَۃ وہ جگہ ہوتی ہے جس کی طرف لوگ بار بار آئیں۔
2
اس جگہ عَھِدْنَا کے الفاظ ہیں اور عَھِدَ اِلَیْہِ کے معنے عربی میں اَوْصَاہُ کے ہیں یعنی تاکیدی حکم دیا۔
a
3:98; 22:27.
132
Important Words:
مثابة (a resort) is derived from ثاب which means, he returned. ثاب الناس means, the people gathered together. ثاب المریض means, the patient returned to state of health. المثاب means, a place where people assemble; a place of resort; a place to which a visit entitles one to ثواب or reward (Mufradat & Aqrab). See also 2:104.
طائفین (who perform the circuit) is the plural of طائف which is derived from طاف meaning, he performed a circuit, he went round (Aqrab).
عھدنا (We commanded) is derived from عھد which means, he promised. عھد الی فلان means, he enjoined upon or commanded him and made it a condition for him (Aqrab).
عاکفین (who remain for devotion) is the plural of عاکف which is derived from عکف. They say عکف فی المکان i.e. he remained confined to a place, sticking to it. الاعتکاف and العکوف are words denoting a specified form of religious service in which the worshipper stays within the precincts of a mosque for a number of days which he passes in prayer and devotion (Aqrab & Mufradat).
مقام (station) is derived from قام i.e. he stood. مقام means, a place where one stands (Aqrab). Here it means the Ka‘bah, where Abraham stood worshipping God. مقام ابراھیم is also the name of a place near the Ka‘bah where, after making circuits around it, the pilgrims perform two rak‘ats of Prayer. It appears that after completing the construction of the Ka‘bah, Abraham said a prayer there in token of his gratitude to God; and it is to commemorate this prayer of Abraham that Muslims are required to perform two rak‘ats of Prayer there whenever they make circuits round the Ka‘bah.
Commentary:
The verse means that a promise was made to Abraham that the Ka‘bah would be made a مثابة or a place of reward and a centre where people would come together for worship. The truth of the first-mentioned part of the covenant, i.e. that the Ka‘bah is a place of reward, can only be recognized by believers who irresistibly feel the ennobling influence of a visit to the Holy Shrine. But the truth of the latter part of the prophecy, i.e. that it would become a resort for men, has been established by the facts of history during the past fourteen hundred years, being testified to even by the enemies of Islam. The Ka‘bah, as some traditions say and as hinted by the Quran itself, was originally built by Adam, and was, for sometime, the centre of worship for his progeny. Then in the course of time people became separated into different communities and adopted different centres for worship. Abraham then rebuilt the Ka‘bah and it continued to remain a centre of worship for his progeny through his son Ishmael. But with the lapse of time it was virtually converted into a house of idols which numbered as many as 360—almost the same as the number of days in a year. At the advent of the Holy Prophet, however, the Ka‘bah was again appointed the centre of worship for all nations, the Holy Prophet having been sent as a Messenger for all mankind. Thus, the nations which diverged after Adam were again brought together at the Ka‘bah which was made the spiritual centre for all humanity and for all time.
Again, the Ka‘bah, and, for that matter, the town of Mecca, is declared to be a place of peace and security. The truth of this prophecy is also beyond doubt. Mighty empires have crumbled and large tracts of land laid waste since the dawn of history, but the peace of Mecca has never been disturbed. The religious centres of other faiths have never claimed, and have in fact never enjoyed, such peace and immunity from danger. Jerusalem, Hardwar, Benares, etc., have all been conquered by alien conquerors and have been the scenes of much bloodshed and violence. But Mecca has ever remained a place of peace. No alien conqueror has ever entered it. The Sacred Town has always remained in the hands of those who have held it in reverence.
The commandment to purify the House of God refers not only to the outward cleaning of the House, but also to its purification from the abomination of idol-worship. The commandment was originally addressed to Abraham and Ishmael but it was finally and fully carried out by the Holy Prophet who, after the conquest of Mecca, cleared the Ka‘bah of all the 360 idols that had been placed there by the idolatrous Quraish.
a
3:98; 22:27.
144
Mathabah signifies, a place paying a visit to which entitles one to reward; or resort of men (Mufradat). The Ka‘bah, as some traditions say and as hinted by the Qur’an itself, was originally built by Adam (3:97) and was, for sometime, the centre of worship for his progeny. Then in the course of time people became separated into different communities and adopted different centres for worship. Abraham then rebuilt it and it continued to remain a centre of worship for his progeny through his son Ishmael. But with the lapse of time it became virtually converted into a house of idols which numbered as many as 360—almost the same as the number of days in a year. At the advent of the Holy Prophet, however, it was again made the centre of worship for all nations, the Holy Prophet having been sent as a Messenger to all mankind, to unite those, who had become separated after Adam, into one common human brotherhood.
145
The Ka‘bah, and, for that matter, the town of Mecca, is declared to be a place of peace and security. Mighty empires have crumbled and large tracts of land laid waste since the dawn of history, but the peace of Mecca has never been materially disturbed. The religious centres of other Faiths have never claimed, and have, in fact, never enjoyed, such peace and immunity from danger. Mecca has, however, ever remained a place of security and safety. No alien conqueror has ever entered it. It has always remained in the hands of those who have held it in reverence.
قُولُوٓا۟ ءَامَنَّا بِٱللَّهِ وَمَآ أُنزِلَ إِلَيْنَا وَمَآ أُنزِلَ إِلَىٰٓ إِبْرَٰهِۦمَ وَإِسْمَٰعِيلَ وَإِسْحَٰقَ وَيَعْقُوبَ وَٱلْأَسْبَاطِ وَمَآ أُوتِىَ مُوسَىٰ وَعِيسَىٰ وَمَآ أُوتِىَ ٱلنَّبِيُّونَ مِن رَّبِّهِمْ لَا نُفَرِّقُ بَيْنَ أَحَدٍ مِّنْهُمْ وَنَحْنُ لَهُۥ مُسْلِمُونَ
3:85.
2:286; 3:85; 4:153.
伊斯兰教是承认各民族的先知的唯一宗教, 而其他宗教则把先知品位局限于他们各自的范围, 这确是增进了伊斯兰教的极大声誉。«古兰经»自然只提到阿拉伯人所熟知的先前得到伊斯兰教的那些先知的名字; 但对此做了一般性的陈述: “每一个民族都有过传警告者 (35:25)。” “我们在他们 (先知) 之间不做任何区别,” 意思是说, 就他们的先知品位来说, 穆斯林对不同的先知一视同仁, 不加区别。此话不应被解释为, 所有的先知均属同一个神圣品位。这种想法不符合经文2:254。
2:286; 3:85; 4:153.
3:85.
The word children here refers to the twelve tribes of Israel named after the twelve sons of Jacob—Ruben, Simeon, Levi, Judah, Issachar, Zebulun, Joseph, Benjamin, Dan, Naphtali, Gad and Asher (Gen. 35: 23-26: 49: 28).
It indeed redounds to the great credit of Islam that it is the only religion which recognizes the Prophets of all nations, whereas other religions confine Prophethood to their own respective spheres. Naturally, the Qur’an mentions only the names of those Prophets who were known to the Arabs to whom the Message of Islam was first given; but it makes a general remark to the effect that, there is no people to whom a Warner has not been sent (35:25). The words, "We make no distinction between any of them," mean that a Muslim makes no difference between the different Prophets in respect of their Prophethood. The words should not be construed to mean that all the Prophets are of the same spiritual rank. Such an idea is against 2:254.
3:85.
2:286; 3:85; 4:153.
Important Words:
اسباط (children) is derived from سبط. They say سبط الشعر i.e. the hair was or became loose and hanging. سبط المطر means, the rain was copious and extensive. سبط signifies the idea of length and extensiveness. شعر سبط means, hair that is long and not curly. سبط الکفین means, a generous man, literally one possessing long and open hands, because his helping hand extends to every needy person. A grandson is also called سبط (sibt) because his birth signifies increase of progeny. In a still wider sense, the word might signify progeny generally. The expression here refers to the twelve tribes of Israel named after the twelve sons of Jacob: Reuben, Simeon, Levi, Judah, Issachar, Zebulun, Joseph, Benjamin, Dan, Naphtali, Gad and Asher (Gen. 35:23-26; 49:28).
Commentary:
The verse is addressed to Muslims who are enjoined to reply to Jews and Christians by saying that the central point in religion is belief in, and submission to, God; and so everything that comes from God must be accepted and it is simply foolish to say that a people believing in some Prophets of God need not believe in others. All Messengers of God and all revelations coming from Him must be accepted and no distinction is to be made between this Prophet and that or between this revelation and that, so far as belief in them is concerned. One Prophet may be higher in status than another and one revelation may be more important than another; but all of them must be accepted without discrimination. The words, to Him we submit ourselves, have been used as an argument in support of the above assertion. When we submit to God, everything coming from Him must be accepted.
It indeed redounds to the great credit of Islam that it is the only religion which recognizes the Prophets of all countries and all nations, whereas other faiths limit prophethood only to their own respective spheres. Naturally the Quran mentions only the names of those Prophets who were known to the Arabs to whom the message of Islam was first given; but it makes a general remark to the effect that, there is no people to whom a warner has not been sent (35:25).
As already pointed out, this verse should not be understood to mean that the Quran regards all Prophets to be equal in rank. In fact, the Quran clearly states that different Prophets possess different ranks, some of them being spiritually higher than others (2:254). The sentence, We make no difference between any of them, thus only means that a Muslim makes no distinction between the different Prophets in respect of their prophethood.
Some Christian critics have objected to the verse under comment and have demanded proof of the prophethood of Ishmael. But what proof is there, it may be asked, of the prophethood of Isaac? If the Bible testifies to the prophethood of Isaac, the Quran testifies to the prophethood of Ishmael. If the testimony of the Quran cannot be accepted as a proof for the prophethood of Ishmael, there is no earthly reason why the testimony of the Bible be accepted as a proof for Isaac’s prophethood. And even the Bible is not without evidence of the fact that God made a number of promises to Abraham about the future greatness of Ishmael and his progeny (see note on 2:130).
d
3:85.
e
2:286; 3:85; 4:153.
83
伊斯兰教是承认各民族的先知的唯一宗教, 而其他宗教则把先知品位局限于他们各自的范围, 这确是增进了伊斯兰教的极大声誉。«古兰经»自然只提到阿拉伯人所熟知的先前得到伊斯兰教的那些先知的名字; 但对此做了一般性的陈述: “每一个民族都有过传警告者 (35:25)。” “我们在他们 (先知) 之间不做任何区别,” 意思是说, 就他们的先知品位来说, 穆斯林对不同的先知一视同仁, 不加区别。此话不应被解释为, 所有的先知均属同一个神圣品位。这种想法不符合经文2:254。
a
3:85.
b
2:286; 3:85; 4:153.
143
Important Words:
اسباط (children) is derived from سبط. They say سبط الشعر i.e. the hair was or became loose and hanging. سبط المطر means, the rain was copious and extensive. سبط signifies the idea of length and extensiveness. شعر سبط means, hair that is long and not curly. سبط الکفین means, a generous man, literally one possessing long and open hands, because his helping hand extends to every needy person. A grandson is also called سبط (sibt) because his birth signifies increase of progeny. In a still wider sense, the word might signify progeny generally. The expression here refers to the twelve tribes of Israel named after the twelve sons of Jacob: Reuben, Simeon, Levi, Judah, Issachar, Zebulun, Joseph, Benjamin, Dan, Naphtali, Gad and Asher (Gen. 35:23-26; 49:28).
Commentary:
The verse is addressed to Muslims who are enjoined to reply to Jews and Christians by saying that the central point in religion is belief in, and submission to, God; and so everything that comes from God must be accepted and it is simply foolish to say that a people believing in some Prophets of God need not believe in others. All Messengers of God and all revelations coming from Him must be accepted and no distinction is to be made between this Prophet and that or between this revelation and that, so far as belief in them is concerned. One Prophet may be higher in status than another and one revelation may be more important than another; but all of them must be accepted without discrimination. The words, to Him we submit ourselves, have been used as an argument in support of the above assertion. When we submit to God, everything coming from Him must be accepted.
It indeed redounds to the great credit of Islam that it is the only religion which recognizes the Prophets of all countries and all nations, whereas other faiths limit prophethood only to their own respective spheres. Naturally the Quran mentions only the names of those Prophets who were known to the Arabs to whom the message of Islam was first given; but it makes a general remark to the effect that, there is no people to whom a warner has not been sent (35:25).
As already pointed out, this verse should not be understood to mean that the Quran regards all Prophets to be equal in rank. In fact, the Quran clearly states that different Prophets possess different ranks, some of them being spiritually higher than others (2:254). The sentence, We make no difference between any of them, thus only means that a Muslim makes no distinction between the different Prophets in respect of their prophethood.
Some Christian critics have objected to the verse under comment and have demanded proof of the prophethood of Ishmael. But what proof is there, it may be asked, of the prophethood of Isaac? If the Bible testifies to the prophethood of Isaac, the Quran testifies to the prophethood of Ishmael. If the testimony of the Quran cannot be accepted as a proof for the prophethood of Ishmael, there is no earthly reason why the testimony of the Bible be accepted as a proof for Isaac’s prophethood. And even the Bible is not without evidence of the fact that God made a number of promises to Abraham about the future greatness of Ishmael and his progeny (see note on 2:130).
a
2:286; 3:85; 4:153.
d
3:85.
153
The word children here refers to the twelve tribes of Israel named after the twelve sons of Jacob—Ruben, Simeon, Levi, Judah, Issachar, Zebulun, Joseph, Benjamin, Dan, Naphtali, Gad and Asher (Gen. 35: 23-26: 49: 28).
154
It indeed redounds to the great credit of Islam that it is the only religion which recognizes the Prophets of all nations, whereas other religions confine Prophethood to their own respective spheres. Naturally, the Qur’an mentions only the names of those Prophets who were known to the Arabs to whom the Message of Islam was first given; but it makes a general remark to the effect that, there is no people to whom a Warner has not been sent (35:25). The words, "We make no distinction between any of them," mean that a Muslim makes no difference between the different Prophets in respect of their Prophethood. The words should not be construed to mean that all the Prophets are of the same spiritual rank. Such an idea is against 2:254.
قَدْ نَرَىٰ تَقَلُّبَ وَجْهِكَ فِى ٱلسَّمَآءِ ۖ فَلَنُوَلِّيَنَّكَ قِبْلَةً تَرْضَىٰهَا ۚ فَوَلِّ وَجْهَكَ شَطْرَ ٱلْمَسْجِدِ ٱلْحَرَامِ ۚ وَحَيْثُ مَا كُنتُمْ فَوَلُّوا۟ وُجُوهَكُمْ شَطْرَهُۥ ۗ وَإِنَّ ٱلَّذِينَ أُوتُوا۟ ٱلْكِتَٰبَ لَيَعْلَمُونَ أَنَّهُ ٱلْحَقُّ مِن رَّبِّهِمْ ۗ وَمَا ٱللَّهُ بِغَٰفِلٍ عَمَّا يَعْمَلُونَ
2:150, 151.
在麦加, 穆圣在安拉的指令下, 在祈祷中把脸转向耶路撒冷的圣寺, 可是心中最大的愿望是把天房作为他的朝向, 而他也直觉到他的愿望终将得到满足, 他通常选择他能既面向耶路撒冷的圣寺又面向天房的地方作礼拜。可是, 当他移居麦地那时, 由于这座城的位置, 他只能面向耶路撒冷的圣寺。由於朝向的更改, 他内心的愿望自然加剧了, 虽然出于对安拉指令的敬服, 他没有实际作要求更改的祈祷, 然而他却焦急渴求地向天仰视, 以期得到那样的指令。
نُوَلِّيَنَّكَ (Nuwalliyannaka) 也含意为 “我将使你为主人和监护人。” 这一句包含了双重预言, 即, 天房终将成为各民族的朝向, 它的所有权也将交给穆圣。
这话表示, 虽然在一般情况下穆斯林在祷告时应该把脸转向天房, 但方向是次要的。更改的意图是促使并维持穆斯林兄弟般的团结和统一。
قِبْلَۃً کا لفظی ترجمہ تو ’’ایسے قبلہ‘‘ ہے لیکن چونکہ اس سے قبلہ ٔمعروفہ کی طرف اشارہ نہیں ہوتا اس لئے ہم نے ترجمہ میں ’’اس قبلہ‘‘ لکھا ہے۔
2:150, 151.
While at Mecca, the Holy Prophet under Divine command turned his face in Prayers towards the Temple at Jerusalem. But, as in his heart of hearts, he desired the Ka‘bah to be his Qiblah and he also had a sort of intuition that eventually his wish will be satisfied, he generally chose such a place for worship where he could keep both the sacred Temple at Jerusalem and the Ka‘bah before him. When, however, he emigrated to Medina, in view of the position of the town, he could only face towards the Temple at Jerusalem. With the change of the Qiblah his inner desire naturally became intensified, and though, out of deference to God’s command, he did not actually pray for the change, yet he anxiously and eagerly looked towards heaven for a command to that effect.
Nuwalliyannaka also means, "We will make thee master and guardian." The expression embodied a double prophecy, viz. that eventually the Ka‘bah will become the Qiblah of all peoples and that its possession will also pass over to the Holy Prophet.
The words signify that though in ordinary circumstances, the Muslims are enjoined to turn their faces to the Ka‘bah when saying their Prayers, yet direction is of secondary importance. The change was intended to bring about and maintain unity and uniformity in the Muslim brotherhood.
See Gen. 21: 21; John 4: 21. Isa. 45: 13, 14, & Deut. 32: 2.
2:150, 151.
Important Words:
قد (verily) means, already; sometimes; often; verily, etc. (Lane).
تقلب (turning) is derived from قلب. They say قلب الشیء i.e. (1) he made the thing change direction; (2) he turned it about so that its face and back changed directions; (3) he turned it upside down; (4) he turned it inside out; (5) he changed its condition. The word قلب (qallaba) gives almost the same meaning but with greater intensification. تقلب الشیء means, the thing turned over and over, doing so much and repeatedly (Aqrab). The expression تقلب وجھك would therefore mean, turning thy face with eagerness and anxiety to receive an order.
فلنولینك (We will make thee turn) is derived from ولی (walla) which again is derived from ولی (waliya). The expression ولاهgives two distinct meanings: (1) he made him ruler or master or guardian of it; (2) he made it change direction or he made it turn towards a thing or away from it as the case may be (Aqrab).
الحرام (Sacred) is derived from حرم which means, it was or became forbidden, prohibited or unlawful whether from sanctity or owing to its being injurious. حرمه الشیء means, he denied or refused him the thing. Thus
حرام means: (1) forbidden and unlawful; (2) sacred and inviolable (Aqrab). المسجدالحرام signifies, the Sacred Mosque at Mecca, i.e. the Ka‘bah.
Commentary:
While at Mecca, the Holy Prophet had orders to turn his face in Prayers towards the sacred Temple at Jerusalem. The Prophet, of course, obeyed the divine behest; but, as in his heart of hearts he desired the Ka‘bah to be his Qiblah and had a sort of intuition that eventually he would be ordered to turn his face towards it, he generally tried to choose such a place for worship where he could keep both the sacred Temple at Jerusalem and the Sacred Mosque of Mecca before him. When, however, the Holy Prophet migrated to Medina, it became impossible for him to turn his face to both the places at one and the same time, and in compliance with divine command he was forced to turn his face to the Temple at Jerusalem alone. With this change the inner desire of the Holy Prophet naturally became intensified, and though, out of deference to God’s command, he did not actually pray for the change, yet he anxiously and eagerly looked towards heaven for an order to that effect. The clause, verily We see thee turning thy face often to heaven, is therefore highly eulogistic of the Prophet, inasmuch as it indicates (1) that the Holy Prophet had such great insight into spiritual matters that in spite of the interim command from God he knew that sooner or later the order for turning the face towards the Ka‘bah would come; (2) that despite his great desire that the Ka‘bah should be appointed as Qiblah, the Holy Prophet had such extraordinary respect for his Lord’s command that he refrained from even praying to that effect; (3) that God the Almighty had such great love for His Messenger that He most graciously refers to his turning his face towards heaven and expedites the command about the change of Qiblah, lovingly adding, We will make thee turn to the Qiblah which thou likest; and (4) that God had such great regard for the wish of the Prophet that He not only ordered him to turn his face towards the Qiblah of his liking but at the same time hinted that He would soon make him master and guardian of it; for, as explained under Important Words, the expression نولینك also means, "We will make thee master or guardian". Truly did ‘A’ishah say to her illustrious husband, "I see that God hastens to fulfil your wishes" (Bukhari, ch. on Tafsir).
After the above introduction follows the commandment about the change of Qiblah in the words, So turn thy face towards the Sacred Mosque; and wherever you be, turn your faces towards it. This commandment was given after the Holy Prophet had migrated to Medina and had stayed there for about sixteen months. The words "Sacred Mosque" do not merely stand for the Ka‘bah but also provide an argument in favour of the change ordered. The Mosque was sacred and full of blessings and would prove a sanctuary for the faithful. The words, wherever you be, turn your faces towards it, have been added with a threefold purpose: (1) to make it clear that the order was not meant for the people of Medinaonly but for all Muslims wherever they might be; (2) to point to the fact that one of the reasons underlying the order relating to the Qiblah was to bring about unity and uniformity among all Muslims, wherever they might be; and (3) to hint that the commandment did not apply to the Holy Prophet only but extended to all Muslims, for whereas, in the preceding clause the Quran says, turn thy face, in the clause under comment it says, turn your faces.
The words, They to whom the Book has been given know that this is the truth from their Lord, mean that Jews and Christians were convinced on the basis of prophecies found in their Scriptures having special reference to the Ka‘bah and the Holy Prophet (Isa. 45:13, 14; John 4:21; Deut. 33:2; Gen. 21:21), that the commandment about the change of the Qiblah from the Temple at Jerusalem to the Ka‘bah at Mecca was truly from God. Mecca lies in what is known as the Desert of Faran or Paran mentioned in some of the above-mentioned verses of the Bible, and therefore the Jews knew that the prophecies contained in them applied to the Ka‘bah and the Holy Prophet.
It may be noted here that, though in ordinary circumstances, the Muslims are enjoined to turn their faces to the Ka‘bah when saying their prayers, yet as direction is of secondary importance, Islam ordains that, if in special circumstances, it becomes difficult for a man to turn his face to the Ka‘bah or to keep it so turned, he can say his Prayers in any direction that may be convenient. For instance, when a man does not know in which direction the Ka‘bah lies, while travelling at night in a Railway train or on the back of an animal, etc., he can pray facing any direction. Similarly, a sick man lying in bed may pray in a lying posture facing any direction that he may find convenient.
a
2:150, 151.
92
在麦加, 穆圣在安拉的指令下, 在祈祷中把脸转向耶路撒冷的圣寺, 可是心中最大的愿望是把天房作为他的朝向, 而他也直觉到他的愿望终将得到满足, 他通常选择他能既面向耶路撒冷的圣寺又面向天房的地方作礼拜。可是, 当他移居麦地那时, 由于这座城的位置, 他只能面向耶路撒冷的圣寺。由於朝向的更改, 他内心的愿望自然加剧了, 虽然出于对安拉指令的敬服, 他没有实际作要求更改的祈祷, 然而他却焦急渴求地向天仰视, 以期得到那样的指令。
93
نُوَلِّيَنَّكَ (Nuwalliyannaka) 也含意为 “我将使你为主人和监护人。” 这一句包含了双重预言, 即, 天房终将成为各民族的朝向, 它的所有权也将交给穆圣。
94
这话表示, 虽然在一般情况下穆斯林在祷告时应该把脸转向天房, 但方向是次要的。更改的意图是促使并维持穆斯林兄弟般的团结和统一。
2
قِبْلَۃً کا لفظی ترجمہ تو ’’ایسے قبلہ‘‘ ہے لیکن چونکہ اس سے قبلہ ٔمعروفہ کی طرف اشارہ نہیں ہوتا اس لئے ہم نے ترجمہ میں ’’اس قبلہ‘‘ لکھا ہے۔
a
2:150, 151.
151
Important Words:
قد (verily) means, already; sometimes; often; verily, etc. (Lane).
تقلب (turning) is derived from قلب. They say قلب الشیء i.e. (1) he made the thing change direction; (2) he turned it about so that its face and back changed directions; (3) he turned it upside down; (4) he turned it inside out; (5) he changed its condition. The word قلب (qallaba) gives almost the same meaning but with greater intensification. تقلب الشیء means, the thing turned over and over, doing so much and repeatedly (Aqrab). The expression تقلب وجھك would therefore mean, turning thy face with eagerness and anxiety to receive an order.
فلنولینك (We will make thee turn) is derived from ولی (walla) which again is derived from ولی (waliya). The expression ولاهgives two distinct meanings: (1) he made him ruler or master or guardian of it; (2) he made it change direction or he made it turn towards a thing or away from it as the case may be (Aqrab).
الحرام (Sacred) is derived from حرم which means, it was or became forbidden, prohibited or unlawful whether from sanctity or owing to its being injurious. حرمه الشیء means, he denied or refused him the thing. Thus
حرام means: (1) forbidden and unlawful; (2) sacred and inviolable (Aqrab). المسجدالحرام signifies, the Sacred Mosque at Mecca, i.e. the Ka‘bah.
Commentary:
While at Mecca, the Holy Prophet had orders to turn his face in Prayers towards the sacred Temple at Jerusalem. The Prophet, of course, obeyed the divine behest; but, as in his heart of hearts he desired the Ka‘bah to be his Qiblah and had a sort of intuition that eventually he would be ordered to turn his face towards it, he generally tried to choose such a place for worship where he could keep both the sacred Temple at Jerusalem and the Sacred Mosque of Mecca before him. When, however, the Holy Prophet migrated to Medina, it became impossible for him to turn his face to both the places at one and the same time, and in compliance with divine command he was forced to turn his face to the Temple at Jerusalem alone. With this change the inner desire of the Holy Prophet naturally became intensified, and though, out of deference to God’s command, he did not actually pray for the change, yet he anxiously and eagerly looked towards heaven for an order to that effect. The clause, verily We see thee turning thy face often to heaven, is therefore highly eulogistic of the Prophet, inasmuch as it indicates (1) that the Holy Prophet had such great insight into spiritual matters that in spite of the interim command from God he knew that sooner or later the order for turning the face towards the Ka‘bah would come; (2) that despite his great desire that the Ka‘bah should be appointed as Qiblah, the Holy Prophet had such extraordinary respect for his Lord’s command that he refrained from even praying to that effect; (3) that God the Almighty had such great love for His Messenger that He most graciously refers to his turning his face towards heaven and expedites the command about the change of Qiblah, lovingly adding, We will make thee turn to the Qiblah which thou likest; and (4) that God had such great regard for the wish of the Prophet that He not only ordered him to turn his face towards the Qiblah of his liking but at the same time hinted that He would soon make him master and guardian of it; for, as explained under Important Words, the expression نولینك also means, "We will make thee master or guardian". Truly did ‘A’ishah say to her illustrious husband, "I see that God hastens to fulfil your wishes" (Bukhari, ch. on Tafsir).
After the above introduction follows the commandment about the change of Qiblah in the words, So turn thy face towards the Sacred Mosque; and wherever you be, turn your faces towards it. This commandment was given after the Holy Prophet had migrated to Medina and had stayed there for about sixteen months. The words "Sacred Mosque" do not merely stand for the Ka‘bah but also provide an argument in favour of the change ordered. The Mosque was sacred and full of blessings and would prove a sanctuary for the faithful. The words, wherever you be, turn your faces towards it, have been added with a threefold purpose: (1) to make it clear that the order was not meant for the people of Medinaonly but for all Muslims wherever they might be; (2) to point to the fact that one of the reasons underlying the order relating to the Qiblah was to bring about unity and uniformity among all Muslims, wherever they might be; and (3) to hint that the commandment did not apply to the Holy Prophet only but extended to all Muslims, for whereas, in the preceding clause the Quran says, turn thy face, in the clause under comment it says, turn your faces.
The words, They to whom the Book has been given know that this is the truth from their Lord, mean that Jews and Christians were convinced on the basis of prophecies found in their Scriptures having special reference to the Ka‘bah and the Holy Prophet (Isa. 45:13, 14; John 4:21; Deut. 33:2; Gen. 21:21), that the commandment about the change of the Qiblah from the Temple at Jerusalem to the Ka‘bah at Mecca was truly from God. Mecca lies in what is known as the Desert of Faran or Paran mentioned in some of the above-mentioned verses of the Bible, and therefore the Jews knew that the prophecies contained in them applied to the Ka‘bah and the Holy Prophet.
It may be noted here that, though in ordinary circumstances, the Muslims are enjoined to turn their faces to the Ka‘bah when saying their prayers, yet as direction is of secondary importance, Islam ordains that, if in special circumstances, it becomes difficult for a man to turn his face to the Ka‘bah or to keep it so turned, he can say his Prayers in any direction that may be convenient. For instance, when a man does not know in which direction the Ka‘bah lies, while travelling at night in a Railway train or on the back of an animal, etc., he can pray facing any direction. Similarly, a sick man lying in bed may pray in a lying posture facing any direction that he may find convenient.
a
2:150, 151.
164
While at Mecca, the Holy Prophet under Divine command turned his face in Prayers towards the Temple at Jerusalem. But, as in his heart of hearts, he desired the Ka‘bah to be his Qiblah and he also had a sort of intuition that eventually his wish will be satisfied, he generally chose such a place for worship where he could keep both the sacred Temple at Jerusalem and the Ka‘bah before him. When, however, he emigrated to Medina, in view of the position of the town, he could only face towards the Temple at Jerusalem. With the change of the Qiblah his inner desire naturally became intensified, and though, out of deference to God’s command, he did not actually pray for the change, yet he anxiously and eagerly looked towards heaven for a command to that effect.
165
Nuwalliyannaka also means, "We will make thee master and guardian." The expression embodied a double prophecy, viz. that eventually the Ka‘bah will become the Qiblah of all peoples and that its possession will also pass over to the Holy Prophet.
166
The words signify that though in ordinary circumstances, the Muslims are enjoined to turn their faces to the Ka‘bah when saying their Prayers, yet direction is of secondary importance. The change was intended to bring about and maintain unity and uniformity in the Muslim brotherhood.
167
See Gen. 21: 21; John 4: 21. Isa. 45: 13, 14, & Deut. 32: 2.
ٱلْحَقُّ مِن رَّبِّكَ ۖ فَلَا تَكُونَنَّ مِنَ ٱلْمُمْتَرِينَ
3:61; 6:115; 10:95.
3:61; 6:115; 10:95.
3:61; 6:115; 10:95.
Important Words:
الحق (truth) means: (1) a truth; (2) a thing foreordained by God; (3) an established fact (4) a right; (5) certainty and conviction (Aqrab).
الممترین (those in doubt) is the plural of الممتر which is derived from امتری which again is derived from مری. They say مری حقهi.e. he contested or refused his right. امتری means: (1) he doubted; (2) he contested or raised objections. Thus ممترین means: (1) those who doubt; (2) those who contest and raise objections (Mufradat & Aqrab).
Commentary:
This verse refers to the great future of Islam. The revelation sent down to the Holy Prophet had come to stay and all obstacles that stood in its way were doomed to disappear. This is ordained by God, the Controller of man’s destiny, and is as good as an established fact. Therefore, O reader, do not waste your energies in doubting or disputing a thing that must prevail.
d
3:61; 6:115; 10:95.
a
3:61; 6:115; 10:95.
154
Important Words:
الحق (truth) means: (1) a truth; (2) a thing foreordained by God; (3) an established fact (4) a right; (5) certainty and conviction (Aqrab).
الممترین (those in doubt) is the plural of الممتر which is derived from امتری which again is derived from مری. They say مری حقهi.e. he contested or refused his right. امتری means: (1) he doubted; (2) he contested or raised objections. Thus ممترین means: (1) those who doubt; (2) those who contest and raise objections (Mufradat & Aqrab).
Commentary:
This verse refers to the great future of Islam. The revelation sent down to the Holy Prophet had come to stay and all obstacles that stood in its way were doomed to disappear. This is ordained by God, the Controller of man’s destiny, and is as good as an established fact. Therefore, O reader, do not waste your energies in doubting or disputing a thing that must prevail.
a
3:61; 6:115; 10:95.
وَمِنْ حَيْثُ خَرَجْتَ فَوَلِّ وَجْهَكَ شَطْرَ ٱلْمَسْجِدِ ٱلْحَرَامِ ۖ وَإِنَّهُۥ لَلْحَقُّ مِن رَّبِّكَ ۗ وَمَا ٱللَّهُ بِغَٰفِلٍ عَمَّا تَعْمَلُونَ
2:145.
要把天房作为朝向, 对穆斯林来说应得到它的所在地麦加, 就成为必不可少。在本节经文中, 他们奉命竭尽全力去征服它, 而穆圣则奉命在他的一切战役中把他的注意力集中在此一目标, خَرَجْتَ (Kharajta) 这词也含义为 “你出去战斗” (Lane)。此词也表示征服麦加是穆圣自己的职责。而145节经文中指令涉及朝向的更改, 因此在150-151节中, 它指的是征服麦加, 不定式 خُرُوْج (Khuruj) 特别是指, 发出战斗命令。
此话暗示有朝一日麦加肯定要落入穆斯林手中。它被穆斯林征服, 在«古兰经» 17:81和28:86中也有过预言。当穆圣作为征服者带领一万穆斯林进入麦加时, «申命记» 33:2中的这预言也得到了实现。
خانہ کعبہ کی طرف نماز میں منہ کرنا تو کسی جگہ سے نکلنے سے تعلق نہیں رکھتا۔ بلکہ انسان خواہ کسی جگہ سے نکلے یا کسی جگہ داخل ہو رہا ہو بہر حال مسلمان کے لئے واجب ہے کہ نماز پڑھتے ہوئے خانہ کعبہ کی طرف منہ کرے۔ پس اس آیت کے الفاظ سے ظاہر ہے کہ اس جگہ لڑائیوں کا ذکر ہے کیونکہ یہاں خروج کا لفظ ہے اور خروج کا لفظ ہے لڑائی کی خاطر نکلنے کے معنے میں استعمال ہوتا ہے۔ پس مراد یہ ہے کہ اے مسلمانو! اب تمہیں جنگ پر مجبور کیا جائے گا اور تم جہاں کہیں بھی ہو گے تم پر دباؤ ڈالا جائے گا کہ تم اہل مکہ سے لڑو۔ ایسے موقعہ کے لئے حکم دیتا ہے کہ جب وہ مجبور کریں تو بے شک لڑائی کرو۔ لیکن لڑائی ک
See 2:145.
When the Ka‘bah was made the Qiblah it became essential for Muslims that they should have Mecca, in which it was situated, in their possession. They are enjoined in this verse to bend all their energies to its conquest and the Holy Prophet is commanded to keep his attention centred on this objective in all his campaigns, the word Kharajta also meaning "thou goest out for battle" (Lane). The word also signifies that the conquest of Mecca was the personal responsibility of the Holy Prophet. Moreover, whereas in v.145 the command pertains to the change of the Qiblah, in 150, 151 it refers to the conquest of Mecca, the infinitive Khuruj particularly meaning, to issue forth for battle.
The words imply that Mecca was sure to fall one day into the hands of the Muslims. Its conquest by the Muslims had also been predicted in the Qur’an in 17:81, and 28:86. The prophecy contained in Deut. 33: 2 was also fulfilled when the Holy Prophet entered Mecca as a conqueror at the head of ten thousand Muslims.
See 2:145.
Important Words:
خرجت (thou comest forth) is from خرج which means: (1) he came forth; (2) he went forth; (3) he came forth or went forth for a battle (Aqrab).
Commentary:
Now when the Ka‘bah had been appointed the Qiblah of Muslims, it became necessary that Mecca should come under their control. The verse under comment suitably refers to that matter. Muslims are bidden henceforward to direct all their energies to the conquest of Mecca. In all his campaigns, the Holy Prophet was commanded to keep in view the taking of Mecca, which had now become the centre of Islam. This is borne out by the expression خرجت (thou comest forth) which also means "thou goest forth for a battle". The word خرجت "thou comest forth or goest forth" has thus nothing to do with the turning of the face to the Ka‘bah, at the time of Prayers; for Prayers are not performed walking. Obviously the commandment cannot mean that one should, while walking, pray with one’s face turned toward the Ka‘bah.
The words, for that is indeed the truth from thy Lord, evidently imply that Mecca was sure to fall one day into the hands of the Holy Prophet. As considering the then helpless condition of the Muslims, such an achievement appeared to be almost impossible, so God gave His Messenger the assurance that the promise was a true one and its fulfilment was absolutely certain.
The expression, and Allah is not unmindful of what you do, provides a reason for the above promise. God was well aware of the deeds of the Muslims, knowing full well how they were striving to win His favour; so He could not let their labours go unrewarded. Just as He had established their connection with the Ka‘bah spiritually, so would He make them its masters physically.
a
2:145.
96
要把天房作为朝向, 对穆斯林来说应得到它的所在地麦加, 就成为必不可少。在本节经文中, 他们奉命竭尽全力去征服它, 而穆圣则奉命在他的一切战役中把他的注意力集中在此一目标, خَرَجْتَ (Kharajta) 这词也含义为 “你出去战斗” (Lane)。此词也表示征服麦加是穆圣自己的职责。而145节经文中指令涉及朝向的更改, 因此在150-151节中, 它指的是征服麦加, 不定式 خُرُوْج (Khuruj) 特别是指, 发出战斗命令。
97
此话暗示有朝一日麦加肯定要落入穆斯林手中。它被穆斯林征服, 在«古兰经» 17:81和28:86中也有过预言。当穆圣作为征服者带领一万穆斯林进入麦加时, «申命记» 33:2中的这预言也得到了实现。
1
خانہ کعبہ کی طرف نماز میں منہ کرنا تو کسی جگہ سے نکلنے سے تعلق نہیں رکھتا۔ بلکہ انسان خواہ کسی جگہ سے نکلے یا کسی جگہ داخل ہو رہا ہو بہر حال مسلمان کے لئے واجب ہے کہ نماز پڑھتے ہوئے خانہ کعبہ کی طرف منہ کرے۔ پس اس آیت کے الفاظ سے ظاہر ہے کہ اس جگہ لڑائیوں کا ذکر ہے کیونکہ یہاں خروج کا لفظ ہے اور خروج کا لفظ ہے لڑائی کی خاطر نکلنے کے معنے میں استعمال ہوتا ہے۔ پس مراد یہ ہے کہ اے مسلمانو! اب تمہیں جنگ پر مجبور کیا جائے گا اور تم جہاں کہیں بھی ہو گے تم پر دباؤ ڈالا جائے گا کہ تم اہل مکہ سے لڑو۔ ایسے موقعہ کے لئے حکم دیتا ہے کہ جب وہ مجبور کریں تو بے شک لڑائی کرو۔ لیکن لڑائی ک
a
See 2:145.
156
Important Words:
خرجت (thou comest forth) is from خرج which means: (1) he came forth; (2) he went forth; (3) he came forth or went forth for a battle (Aqrab).
Commentary:
Now when the Ka‘bah had been appointed the Qiblah of Muslims, it became necessary that Mecca should come under their control. The verse under comment suitably refers to that matter. Muslims are bidden henceforward to direct all their energies to the conquest of Mecca. In all his campaigns, the Holy Prophet was commanded to keep in view the taking of Mecca, which had now become the centre of Islam. This is borne out by the expression خرجت (thou comest forth) which also means "thou goest forth for a battle". The word خرجت "thou comest forth or goest forth" has thus nothing to do with the turning of the face to the Ka‘bah, at the time of Prayers; for Prayers are not performed walking. Obviously the commandment cannot mean that one should, while walking, pray with one’s face turned toward the Ka‘bah.
The words, for that is indeed the truth from thy Lord, evidently imply that Mecca was sure to fall one day into the hands of the Holy Prophet. As considering the then helpless condition of the Muslims, such an achievement appeared to be almost impossible, so God gave His Messenger the assurance that the promise was a true one and its fulfilment was absolutely certain.
The expression, and Allah is not unmindful of what you do, provides a reason for the above promise. God was well aware of the deeds of the Muslims, knowing full well how they were striving to win His favour; so He could not let their labours go unrewarded. Just as He had established their connection with the Ka‘bah spiritually, so would He make them its masters physically.
c
See 2:145.
172
When the Ka‘bah was made the Qiblah it became essential for Muslims that they should have Mecca, in which it was situated, in their possession. They are enjoined in this verse to bend all their energies to its conquest and the Holy Prophet is commanded to keep his attention centred on this objective in all his campaigns, the word Kharajta also meaning "thou goest out for battle" (Lane). The word also signifies that the conquest of Mecca was the personal responsibility of the Holy Prophet. Moreover, whereas in v.145 the command pertains to the change of the Qiblah, in 150, 151 it refers to the conquest of Mecca, the infinitive Khuruj particularly meaning, to issue forth for battle.
173
The words imply that Mecca was sure to fall one day into the hands of the Muslims. Its conquest by the Muslims had also been predicted in the Qur’an in 17:81, and 28:86. The prophecy contained in Deut. 33: 2 was also fulfilled when the Holy Prophet entered Mecca as a conqueror at the head of ten thousand Muslims.
۞ إِنَّ ٱلصَّفَا وَٱلْمَرْوَةَ مِن شَعَآئِرِ ٱللَّهِ ۖ فَمَنْ حَجَّ ٱلْبَيْتَ أَوِ ٱعْتَمَرَ فَلَا جُنَاحَ عَلَيْهِ أَن يَطَّوَّفَ بِهِمَا ۚ وَمَن تَطَوَّعَ خَيْرًا فَإِنَّ ٱللَّهَ شَاكِرٌ عَلِيمٌ
22:33.
صفا اور مروہ مکہ میں دو پہاڑیاں ہیں۔
بِھِمَاکے معنے یہاں فِیْھِمَاکے ہیں‘ یعنی ان دونوں پہاڑیوں کے درمیان اِدھر سے اُدھر اُن قواعد کے مطابق جو سنت سے ثابت ہیں دوڑے۔
مدینہ کے لوگ صفا اور مروۃ کے درمیان سعی کرنے کو گناہ سمجھتے تھے (تفسیر کبیر جلد دوم ص ۳۰۷)۔
22:33.
As-Safa and Al-Marwah are the names of two hills near the Ka‘bah in Mecca, the first-mentioned being the nearer of the two. These hills stand as a memorial to Hagar’s great patience and extraordinary loyalty to God on the one hand and to God’s special care of her and her son, Ishmael, on the other. A visit to these hills deeply impresses the pilgrim with the love, fidelity to and power, of God.
The words, whoso does good beyond what is obligatory, do not refer to Hajj (Greater Pilgrimage), which under certain conditions is obligatory on every Muslim once in a life-time, but to ‘Umrah (Lesser Pilgrimage) which is not obligatory but only supererogatory. The words may also be considered to refer to any additional pilgrimage which a Muslim may perform, after he has performed the obligatory one.
22:33.
Important Words:
الصفا والمروة (As-Safa and Al-Marwah) are the names of two hills near the Ka‘bah in Mecca, the first-mentioned being the nearer of the two. Both Arabian history and the traditions of Islam connect these hills with the story of Hagar and Ishmael when Abraham left them near these hills under God’s command. Ishmael was yet a child, and when the scanty provisions ran out and he was in a pitiable condition for want of water, Hagar anxiously and repeatedly ran between these two hills in search of water and help, but none was found. When, however, she was in her seventh circuit, an angel of God called to her saying that God had brought forth a spring of water near her son and that she should go and look to it (Bukhari, ch. on Anbiya’). Thus the hills of صفا (Safa) and مروة (Marwah) became شعائر الله i.e. Signs of God worthy of due honour and respect in the sight of every true believer. The Bible also makes mention of مروة in a somewhat changed form (Gen. 22:2; also Enc. Bib. under Moriah) in connection with the sacrifice of Abraham’s son.
شعائر (Signs) is the plural of شعیرة which is derived from شعر meaning, he knew or he perceived. Thus شعیرة means: (1) anything by means of which another thing may be known; (2) a sign; (3) anything which is considered or is performed as a mark of submission to God; (4) the rites of pilgrimage and practices pertaining thereto (Aqrab).
حج (is on pilgrimage) means: (1) he sought a person or thing; (2) he went or repaired to a person or thing; (3) he went to a person again and again; (4) he visited a holy place; (5) he performed حج (Pilgrimage) to the Ka‘bah; (6) he overpowered a person in argument (Aqrab).
اعتمر (performs ‘Umrah) is derived from عمر which means, he occupied or tenanted a house; he worshipped God and prayed to Him. اعتمر means, he went to, or visited, a place. عمرة means, visiting a place; worshipping and praying to God; performing Lesser Pilgrimage in which some of the rites of حج are left out (Aqrab).
تطوع (does beyond what is obligatory) is derived from طاع i.e. he obeyed; he did an act willingly and voluntarily. The infinitive الطوع means: (1) obedience; (2) doing an act willingly without its being obligatory on one. تطوع means, he performed an act with effort and volition. تطوع خیرا means, he performed a good act which was not obligatory on him (Aqrab & Mufradat).
Commentary:
To a superficial observer the verse under comment dealing with the subject of Pilgrimage appears to have no connection with the preceding ones which deal with the subject of trials and sacrifices. But a deeper study will at once disclose a very close connection between the two. The preceding verses warned Muslims to be prepared for sacrifices and gave them the glad tidings that if they performed the required sacrifices willingly and patiently, God would bless them greatly and would show special mercy to them and would remember them with kindness and would provide guidance for them whenever needed. Now, in order to bring home to them the truth of this promise, He invites the attention of Muslims to the great sacrifice of Abraham near the site of As-Safa and Al-Marwah. Abraham obeyed His Lord and left his wife Hagar and his son Ishmael near these two hills of Mecca, which was then a most desolate tract. The seed was sown in a soil which was apparently the most barren of all soils, but how wonderfully it prospered! God was a most Loving and Faithful God who so fondly remembered His servants, Abraham and Ishmael, even after the lapse of 2,500 years, and Muslims can expect the same love and the same fidelity from Him, if they too love and obey Him. Safa and Marwah, as explained under Important Words above, are two hills which stand as a memorial to Hagar’s great patience and extraordinary loyalty to God on the one hand and to God’s special treatment of her and her son on the other. A visit to these hills makes the pilgrim deeply impressed with the love, fidelity and power of God.
The words, it is no sin for him, should not be taken to mean that performing the circuit between Safa and Marwah is only permissible and not obligatory. The expression is used simply to remove the aversion to such performance found among certain persons on the basis of the fact that heathen Arabs had placed two idols on these two hills (Muslim). God removed this erroneous notion by saying that it was no sin to perform the circuit between Safa and Marwah, which on account of the great sacrifice of Abraham, Hagar and Ishmael on the one hand and the resulting blessings of God on the other, had become شعائر الله i.e. great Signs of God. That the performance of these circuits is obligatory in both حج and عمرة(the Greater and the Lesser Pilgrimage) is clear from the practice of the Holy Prophet and his injunctions to his followers (Bukhari, ch. Al-Hajj).
The words, whoso does good beyond what is obligatory, do not refer to حج (Greater Pilgrimage), which under certain conditions is obligatory on each Muslim once in a lifetime, but to عمرة (Lesser Pilgrimage) which is not obligatory but simply supererogatory. The words may also be considered to refer to any additional حج or Pilgrimage which a Muslim may perform, after he has performed the one obligatory Pilgrimage.
As this verse mentions the subject of Pilgrimage only secondarily, we are not giving here a note on the rites and philosophy of which will be discussed when we come to the relevant verses.
e
22:33.
1
صفا اور مروہ مکہ میں دو پہاڑیاں ہیں۔
2
بِھِمَاکے معنے یہاں فِیْھِمَاکے ہیں‘ یعنی ان دونوں پہاڑیوں کے درمیان اِدھر سے اُدھر اُن قواعد کے مطابق جو سنت سے ثابت ہیں دوڑے۔
3
مدینہ کے لوگ صفا اور مروۃ کے درمیان سعی کرنے کو گناہ سمجھتے تھے (تفسیر کبیر جلد دوم ص ۳۰۷)۔
a
22:33.
165
Important Words:
الصفا والمروة (As-Safa and Al-Marwah) are the names of two hills near the Ka‘bah in Mecca, the first-mentioned being the nearer of the two. Both Arabian history and the traditions of Islam connect these hills with the story of Hagar and Ishmael when Abraham left them near these hills under God’s command. Ishmael was yet a child, and when the scanty provisions ran out and he was in a pitiable condition for want of water, Hagar anxiously and repeatedly ran between these two hills in search of water and help, but none was found. When, however, she was in her seventh circuit, an angel of God called to her saying that God had brought forth a spring of water near her son and that she should go and look to it (Bukhari, ch. on Anbiya’). Thus the hills of صفا (Safa) and مروة (Marwah) became شعائر الله i.e. Signs of God worthy of due honour and respect in the sight of every true believer. The Bible also makes mention of مروة in a somewhat changed form (Gen. 22:2; also Enc. Bib. under Moriah) in connection with the sacrifice of Abraham’s son.
شعائر (Signs) is the plural of شعیرة which is derived from شعر meaning, he knew or he perceived. Thus شعیرة means: (1) anything by means of which another thing may be known; (2) a sign; (3) anything which is considered or is performed as a mark of submission to God; (4) the rites of pilgrimage and practices pertaining thereto (Aqrab).
حج (is on pilgrimage) means: (1) he sought a person or thing; (2) he went or repaired to a person or thing; (3) he went to a person again and again; (4) he visited a holy place; (5) he performed حج (Pilgrimage) to the Ka‘bah; (6) he overpowered a person in argument (Aqrab).
اعتمر (performs ‘Umrah) is derived from عمر which means, he occupied or tenanted a house; he worshipped God and prayed to Him. اعتمر means, he went to, or visited, a place. عمرة means, visiting a place; worshipping and praying to God; performing Lesser Pilgrimage in which some of the rites of حج are left out (Aqrab).
تطوع (does beyond what is obligatory) is derived from طاع i.e. he obeyed; he did an act willingly and voluntarily. The infinitive الطوع means: (1) obedience; (2) doing an act willingly without its being obligatory on one. تطوع means, he performed an act with effort and volition. تطوع خیرا means, he performed a good act which was not obligatory on him (Aqrab & Mufradat).
Commentary:
To a superficial observer the verse under comment dealing with the subject of Pilgrimage appears to have no connection with the preceding ones which deal with the subject of trials and sacrifices. But a deeper study will at once disclose a very close connection between the two. The preceding verses warned Muslims to be prepared for sacrifices and gave them the glad tidings that if they performed the required sacrifices willingly and patiently, God would bless them greatly and would show special mercy to them and would remember them with kindness and would provide guidance for them whenever needed. Now, in order to bring home to them the truth of this promise, He invites the attention of Muslims to the great sacrifice of Abraham near the site of As-Safa and Al-Marwah. Abraham obeyed His Lord and left his wife Hagar and his son Ishmael near these two hills of Mecca, which was then a most desolate tract. The seed was sown in a soil which was apparently the most barren of all soils, but how wonderfully it prospered! God was a most Loving and Faithful God who so fondly remembered His servants, Abraham and Ishmael, even after the lapse of 2,500 years, and Muslims can expect the same love and the same fidelity from Him, if they too love and obey Him. Safa and Marwah, as explained under Important Words above, are two hills which stand as a memorial to Hagar’s great patience and extraordinary loyalty to God on the one hand and to God’s special treatment of her and her son on the other. A visit to these hills makes the pilgrim deeply impressed with the love, fidelity and power of God.
The words, it is no sin for him, should not be taken to mean that performing the circuit between Safa and Marwah is only permissible and not obligatory. The expression is used simply to remove the aversion to such performance found among certain persons on the basis of the fact that heathen Arabs had placed two idols on these two hills (Muslim). God removed this erroneous notion by saying that it was no sin to perform the circuit between Safa and Marwah, which on account of the great sacrifice of Abraham, Hagar and Ishmael on the one hand and the resulting blessings of God on the other, had become شعائر الله i.e. great Signs of God. That the performance of these circuits is obligatory in both حج and عمرة(the Greater and the Lesser Pilgrimage) is clear from the practice of the Holy Prophet and his injunctions to his followers (Bukhari, ch. Al-Hajj).
The words, whoso does good beyond what is obligatory, do not refer to حج (Greater Pilgrimage), which under certain conditions is obligatory on each Muslim once in a lifetime, but to عمرة (Lesser Pilgrimage) which is not obligatory but simply supererogatory. The words may also be considered to refer to any additional حج or Pilgrimage which a Muslim may perform, after he has performed the one obligatory Pilgrimage.
As this verse mentions the subject of Pilgrimage only secondarily, we are not giving here a note on the rites and philosophy of which will be discussed when we come to the relevant verses.
a
22:33.
184
As-Safa and Al-Marwah are the names of two hills near the Ka‘bah in Mecca, the first-mentioned being the nearer of the two. These hills stand as a memorial to Hagar’s great patience and extraordinary loyalty to God on the one hand and to God’s special care of her and her son, Ishmael, on the other. A visit to these hills deeply impresses the pilgrim with the love, fidelity to and power, of God.
185
The words, whoso does good beyond what is obligatory, do not refer to Hajj (Greater Pilgrimage), which under certain conditions is obligatory on every Muslim once in a life-time, but to ‘Umrah (Lesser Pilgrimage) which is not obligatory but only supererogatory. The words may also be considered to refer to any additional pilgrimage which a Muslim may perform, after he has performed the obligatory one.
إِنَّ فِى خَلْقِ ٱلسَّمَٰوَٰتِ وَٱلْأَرْضِ وَٱخْتِلَٰفِ ٱلَّيْلِ وَٱلنَّهَارِ وَٱلْفُلْكِ ٱلَّتِى تَجْرِى فِى ٱلْبَحْرِ بِمَا يَنفَعُ ٱلنَّاسَ وَمَآ أَنزَلَ ٱللَّهُ مِنَ ٱلسَّمَآءِ مِن مَّآءٍ فَأَحْيَا بِهِ ٱلْأَرْضَ بَعْدَ مَوْتِهَا وَبَثَّ فِيهَا مِن كُلِّ دَآبَّةٍ وَتَصْرِيفِ ٱلرِّيَٰحِ وَٱلسَّحَابِ ٱلْمُسَخَّرِ بَيْنَ ٱلسَّمَآءِ وَٱلْأَرْضِ لَءَايَٰتٍ لِّقَوْمٍ يَعْقِلُونَ
3:191; 10:7; 30:23; 45:6.
3:191; 10:7; 30:23; 45:6.
The Qur’an takes the universe as a whole to prove its theme. The objects of nature taken individually do not furnish such conclusive evidence of the existence of God as the whole universe taken collectively. The earth may be said to owe its existence to a fortuitous concourse of atoms, and a similar reason may be given for the origin of the sun and the moon and so on. But when the universe as one united whole and the deep order that permeates it are taken into consideration, it becomes impossible for one to escape the conclusion, that this universe has not come into existence accidentally. Indeed, the consummate harmony that pervades it forcefully points to the fact that the whole system has been created and is being directed by One Intelligent Being Who is All-Powerful and All-Knowing. Moreover, by laying special emphasis on the study of the phenomena of nature, the attention of disbelievers is also drawn to the fact that they could not possibly hope to succeed in their designs against the Holy Prophet,
3:191; 10:7; 30:23; 45:6.
Important Words:
اختلاف (alternation) is derived from خلف. They say خلفه i.e. he or it was or became his or its successor. خلف الرجل means, he came after or remained after the man and stood in his place. اختلفه means, he followed him as his successor. اختلفوا means (1) they came one after another by turn; (2) they differed or disagreed (Aqrab).
الفلك (ships) is derived from the verb فلك meaning, it became round or circular. الفلك (al-fulk) means a ship, or a boat, probably because it looks round and shapeless when seen at sea from a distance. The word is both singular and plural. الفلك (al-falak) means, the vault of heaven or the firmament in which the stars move. This is also probably owing to the apparently round shape of the sky (Aqrab, Mufradat & Lane).
دابة (beast) is the active participle from دب which means, he or it crept or crawled or walked slowly like an ant or a reptile or a child or a weak or sickly person. دابة means, all such animals or insects as creep or crawl or walk slowly (Aqrab). The word is used about all moving animals, whether big or small, whether walking on two legs or on four legs or creeping on the belly, etc. (24:46). It is also used about beasts used for riding or for carrying burden, like the horse, the mule, the donkey, etc. (Lane).
المسخر (pressed into service) is the passive participle from سخر sakhkhara. They say سخره (sakhkhara-hu or سخره sakhara-hu, not سخر sakhira which gives a different meaning), i.e. (1) he employed him or imposed on him a task without compensation; (2) he subjugated him and made him subservient to himself. Thus مسخر is that who or which has been made subservient to another, being unable to free himself or itself from constraint (Aqrab).
Commentary:
This verse gives a twofold meaning, one literal and the other metaphorical. In the former sense, it supplies an argument in support of the existence of God referred to in the preceding verse. A careful study of the universe unfailingly points to a Creator on the one hand and to man being created with a definite object on the other. It also proves that, having created the world, God did not leave it alone but continues to watch over and control its affairs and is the First Cause of all change and every working in the universe. Heaven and earth, night and day (with alternating light and darkness), the supply of provisions, rainfall with its power of quickening and devastating, the means of communications, the blowing of winds, and shade and sunshine, all point to one controlling agency, God, the Maker of heavens and earth. And if God has done so much for the material requirements of man, He cannot be imagined to have neglected his spiritual needs which are much more important. Let all thinking men think and ponder and again think and ponder.
The Quran takes the universe as a whole to prove its theme. The objects of nature taken individually do not furnish such conclusive evidence of the existence of God as the whole universe taken together. The earth may be said to owe its existence to a fortuitous concourse of atoms, or a similar reason may be given for the origin of the sun and the moon and so on. But when the universe as one united whole and the deep order that permeates it are taken into consideration, it becomes impossible to escape the conclusion that this universe has not come into existence accidentally. Indeed, the consummate harmony that prevails throughout the universe, forcefully points to the fact that the whole system has been created and is being directed by one Intelligent Being Who is All-Powerful and All-Knowing.
Taken in the metaphorical sense, the ship mentioned in the verse will be taken to stand for Prophets who help men to cross the gulfs of carnal desires and materialistic concepts of things which separate men from God, rain being likened to God’s revelation which comes down like rain and gives life to the world after it has become dead. The clouds send down no new water. Water already exists in the vast oceans of the earth but, as it is impure, men cannot make use of it. God purifies it and changes it into clouds and then sends it back to earth in the form of pure rainwater. Similarly, by sending a new revelation God purifies beliefs, which, with the passage of time, get mixed up with false notions and superstitious ideas. It is inconceivable that God Who supplies man with fresh rainwater for the maintenance of his physical life should have omitted to supply him with heavenly water which is so necessary for the preservation of his spiritual life. Similarly, night and day stand for the alternating periods of light and darkness, it being hinted that the coming of the Holy Prophet heralds the dawn of a new day.
Moreover, by laying special emphasis on the study of the phenomena of nature in the verse under comment, the attention of disbelievers is also drawn to the fact that they could not possibly hope to succeed in their designs against the Holy Prophet, because the whole universe is controlled by God and is working in favour of His Prophet and in furthering his cause.
f
3:191; 10:7; 30:23; 45:6.
a
3:191; 10:7; 30:23; 45:6.
171
Important Words:
اختلاف (alternation) is derived from خلف. They say خلفه i.e. he or it was or became his or its successor. خلف الرجل means, he came after or remained after the man and stood in his place. اختلفه means, he followed him as his successor. اختلفوا means (1) they came one after another by turn; (2) they differed or disagreed (Aqrab).
الفلك (ships) is derived from the verb فلك meaning, it became round or circular. الفلك (al-fulk) means a ship, or a boat, probably because it looks round and shapeless when seen at sea from a distance. The word is both singular and plural. الفلك (al-falak) means, the vault of heaven or the firmament in which the stars move. This is also probably owing to the apparently round shape of the sky (Aqrab, Mufradat & Lane).
دابة (beast) is the active participle from دب which means, he or it crept or crawled or walked slowly like an ant or a reptile or a child or a weak or sickly person. دابة means, all such animals or insects as creep or crawl or walk slowly (Aqrab). The word is used about all moving animals, whether big or small, whether walking on two legs or on four legs or creeping on the belly, etc. (24:46). It is also used about beasts used for riding or for carrying burden, like the horse, the mule, the donkey, etc. (Lane).
المسخر (pressed into service) is the passive participle from سخر sakhkhara. They say سخره (sakhkhara-hu or سخره sakhara-hu, not سخر sakhira which gives a different meaning), i.e. (1) he employed him or imposed on him a task without compensation; (2) he subjugated him and made him subservient to himself. Thus مسخر is that who or which has been made subservient to another, being unable to free himself or itself from constraint (Aqrab).
Commentary:
This verse gives a twofold meaning, one literal and the other metaphorical. In the former sense, it supplies an argument in support of the existence of God referred to in the preceding verse. A careful study of the universe unfailingly points to a Creator on the one hand and to man being created with a definite object on the other. It also proves that, having created the world, God did not leave it alone but continues to watch over and control its affairs and is the First Cause of all change and every working in the universe. Heaven and earth, night and day (with alternating light and darkness), the supply of provisions, rainfall with its power of quickening and devastating, the means of communications, the blowing of winds, and shade and sunshine, all point to one controlling agency, God, the Maker of heavens and earth. And if God has done so much for the material requirements of man, He cannot be imagined to have neglected his spiritual needs which are much more important. Let all thinking men think and ponder and again think and ponder.
The Quran takes the universe as a whole to prove its theme. The objects of nature taken individually do not furnish such conclusive evidence of the existence of God as the whole universe taken together. The earth may be said to owe its existence to a fortuitous concourse of atoms, or a similar reason may be given for the origin of the sun and the moon and so on. But when the universe as one united whole and the deep order that permeates it are taken into consideration, it becomes impossible to escape the conclusion that this universe has not come into existence accidentally. Indeed, the consummate harmony that prevails throughout the universe, forcefully points to the fact that the whole system has been created and is being directed by one Intelligent Being Who is All-Powerful and All-Knowing.
Taken in the metaphorical sense, the ship mentioned in the verse will be taken to stand for Prophets who help men to cross the gulfs of carnal desires and materialistic concepts of things which separate men from God, rain being likened to God’s revelation which comes down like rain and gives life to the world after it has become dead. The clouds send down no new water. Water already exists in the vast oceans of the earth but, as it is impure, men cannot make use of it. God purifies it and changes it into clouds and then sends it back to earth in the form of pure rainwater. Similarly, by sending a new revelation God purifies beliefs, which, with the passage of time, get mixed up with false notions and superstitious ideas. It is inconceivable that God Who supplies man with fresh rainwater for the maintenance of his physical life should have omitted to supply him with heavenly water which is so necessary for the preservation of his spiritual life. Similarly, night and day stand for the alternating periods of light and darkness, it being hinted that the coming of the Holy Prophet heralds the dawn of a new day.
Moreover, by laying special emphasis on the study of the phenomena of nature in the verse under comment, the attention of disbelievers is also drawn to the fact that they could not possibly hope to succeed in their designs against the Holy Prophet, because the whole universe is controlled by God and is working in favour of His Prophet and in furthering his cause.
e
3:191; 10:7; 30:23; 45:6.
188
The Qur’an takes the universe as a whole to prove its theme. The objects of nature taken individually do not furnish such conclusive evidence of the existence of God as the whole universe taken collectively. The earth may be said to owe its existence to a fortuitous concourse of atoms, and a similar reason may be given for the origin of the sun and the moon and so on. But when the universe as one united whole and the deep order that permeates it are taken into consideration, it becomes impossible for one to escape the conclusion, that this universe has not come into existence accidentally. Indeed, the consummate harmony that pervades it forcefully points to the fact that the whole system has been created and is being directed by One Intelligent Being Who is All-Powerful and All-Knowing. Moreover, by laying special emphasis on the study of the phenomena of nature, the attention of disbelievers is also drawn to the fact that they could not possibly hope to succeed in their designs against the Holy Prophet,
وَمِنَ ٱلنَّاسِ مَن يَتَّخِذُ مِن دُونِ ٱللَّهِ أَندَادًا يُحِبُّونَهُمْ كَحُبِّ ٱللَّهِ ۖ وَٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوٓا۟ أَشَدُّ حُبًّا لِّلَّهِ ۗ وَلَوْ يَرَى ٱلَّذِينَ ظَلَمُوٓا۟ إِذْ يَرَوْنَ ٱلْعَذَابَ أَنَّ ٱلْقُوَّةَ لِلَّهِ جَمِيعًا وَأَنَّ ٱللَّهَ شَدِيدُ ٱلْعَذَابِ
热爱安拉是一切宗教教义的根本, 没有一门宗教曾像伊斯兰教那般着重强调对安拉的热爱。穆圣一心归向安拉, 以致阿拉伯异教徒也说他与安拉相爱。在 «古兰经» 中没有其它一个论题向对安拉的优美、慈善和其他常德被论述得如此充分和如此反复, 以致它在人类心灵中产生出对安拉抑制不住的热爱与渴望。
While dealing with the subject of idolatry the Qur’an has used four words: Nidd (like or equal); Sharik (co-partner or sharer); Ilah (worthy of worship); and Rabb (sustainer). While the first two words are used only about objects of worship other than God, the last two are used about God also. The word Nidd (like or equal) refers to such objects of worship as are supposed to be like God or equal to Him, but are contrary or opposed to Him.
Love of God is the essence of all religious teaching and no religion has laid so much emphasis on Divine love as Islam has done. The Holy Prophet was so much engrossed in God that he was spoken of by the pagan Arabs as having fallen in love with Him. No other subject has been so completely and so repeatedly dealt with in the Qur’an as God’s beauty and beneficence and such of His attributes as create an irresistible love and longing in the human soul for the Supreme Being.
Important Words:
دون (other than) is derived from دان i.e. he or it was or became low, mean or weak. دون used as an adjective means, low, mean, paltry, or contemptible; also high and noble. When used as a preposition, as in the present verse, دون gives the sense of (1) this side of, i.e. behind or lower in tank; (2) that side of, i.e. ahead or higher in rank; (3) other than (Aqrab).
انداد (objects of worship). See 2:23.
Commentary:
While dealing with the subject of idolatry the Quran makes use of the following four words: (1) ند (like or equal); (2) شریك (co-partner or sharer); (3) اله (worthy of worship); and (4) رب (sustainer). While the first two words are used only about those objects of worship that are other than God, the last two are used about God also. The word ند (like or equal) which is used in the present verse refers to such objects of worship as are supposed to be like God or equal to Him, being contrary or opposed to the true God. Among those who have set up انداد (equals) with God may be mentioned the Zoroastrians who believe in two independent gods, i.e. Ormazd, the God of Light, and Ahriman, the God of Darkness.
Love of God is the essence of all religion. In Islam it forms the central point, the pivot round which the whole Islamic teaching revolves. No religion has emphasised the love of God as much as Islam has. The Holy Prophet was so much engrossed in God that he was spoken of by the pagan Arabs as having fallen in love with Him, even as a lover falls in love with his beloved. No other subject has been so completely and so repeatedly dealt with in the Quran as God’s beauty and excellence and such of His attributes as create an irresistible love and longing in the human soul for his Lord and Master Who is spoken of in the Quran as a "Most Loving God" (11:91; 85:15). Yet Christian writers accuse Islam of being a cold and calculating religion, bereft of all love for God. Can anything be farther from the truth?
109
热爱安拉是一切宗教教义的根本, 没有一门宗教曾像伊斯兰教那般着重强调对安拉的热爱。穆圣一心归向安拉, 以致阿拉伯异教徒也说他与安拉相爱。在 «古兰经» 中没有其它一个论题向对安拉的优美、慈善和其他常德被论述得如此充分和如此反复, 以致它在人类心灵中产生出对安拉抑制不住的热爱与渴望。
172
Important Words:
دون (other than) is derived from دان i.e. he or it was or became low, mean or weak. دون used as an adjective means, low, mean, paltry, or contemptible; also high and noble. When used as a preposition, as in the present verse, دون gives the sense of (1) this side of, i.e. behind or lower in tank; (2) that side of, i.e. ahead or higher in rank; (3) other than (Aqrab).
انداد (objects of worship). See 2:23.
Commentary:
While dealing with the subject of idolatry the Quran makes use of the following four words: (1) ند (like or equal); (2) شریك (co-partner or sharer); (3) اله (worthy of worship); and (4) رب (sustainer). While the first two words are used only about those objects of worship that are other than God, the last two are used about God also. The word ند (like or equal) which is used in the present verse refers to such objects of worship as are supposed to be like God or equal to Him, being contrary or opposed to the true God. Among those who have set up انداد (equals) with God may be mentioned the Zoroastrians who believe in two independent gods, i.e. Ormazd, the God of Light, and Ahriman, the God of Darkness.
Love of God is the essence of all religion. In Islam it forms the central point, the pivot round which the whole Islamic teaching revolves. No religion has emphasised the love of God as much as Islam has. The Holy Prophet was so much engrossed in God that he was spoken of by the pagan Arabs as having fallen in love with Him, even as a lover falls in love with his beloved. No other subject has been so completely and so repeatedly dealt with in the Quran as God’s beauty and excellence and such of His attributes as create an irresistible love and longing in the human soul for his Lord and Master Who is spoken of in the Quran as a "Most Loving God" (11:91; 85:15). Yet Christian writers accuse Islam of being a cold and calculating religion, bereft of all love for God. Can anything be farther from the truth?
189
While dealing with the subject of idolatry the Qur’an has used four words: Nidd (like or equal); Sharik (co-partner or sharer); Ilah (worthy of worship); and Rabb (sustainer). While the first two words are used only about objects of worship other than God, the last two are used about God also. The word Nidd (like or equal) refers to such objects of worship as are supposed to be like God or equal to Him, but are contrary or opposed to Him.
190
Love of God is the essence of all religious teaching and no religion has laid so much emphasis on Divine love as Islam has done. The Holy Prophet was so much engrossed in God that he was spoken of by the pagan Arabs as having fallen in love with Him. No other subject has been so completely and so repeatedly dealt with in the Qur’an as God’s beauty and beneficence and such of His attributes as create an irresistible love and longing in the human soul for the Supreme Being.
يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ كُلُوا۟ مِن طَيِّبَٰتِ مَا رَزَقْنَٰكُمْ وَٱشْكُرُوا۟ لِلَّهِ إِن كُنتُمْ إِيَّاهُ تَعْبُدُونَ
5:6; 16:115; 23:52; 40:65.
اصل عبارت میں عِبَادَۃ کے ساتھ ضمیر اور شُکْر کے ساتھ اللہ کا لفظ استعمال ہوا ہے لیکن ترجمہ میں عبادت کے ساتھ اللہ کا لفظ اور شکر کے ساتھ ضمیر استعمال کی گئی ہے کیونکہ اردو ترتیب میں اس کے سوا چارہ نہ تھا۔
5:6; 16:115; 23:52; 40:65.
The injunction contained in the words, "eat of good, pure and wholesome things (Tayyibat) indicates that Muslims are not allowed to use things which may, in any way, injure their physical or moral or spiritual health, though they may be allowed by the Shari‘ah.
5:6; 16:115; 23:52; 40:65.
Commentary:
The injunction contained in the words, "eat of طیبات i.e. good, pure and wholesome things", indicates that Muslims are not allowed to use things which may, in any way, injure their physical or moral or spiritual health, though they may be حلال i.e. allowed by Law. The injunction is thus very important and far-reaching in its effect. The words, We have provided for you, further imply that Muslims are also not allowed to make use of things acquired by unfair and unlawful means. Only the things bestowed by God, i.e. those lawfully earned, are to be used.
g
5:6; 16:115; 23:52; 40:65.
5
اصل عبارت میں عِبَادَۃ کے ساتھ ضمیر اور شُکْر کے ساتھ اللہ کا لفظ استعمال ہوا ہے لیکن ترجمہ میں عبادت کے ساتھ اللہ کا لفظ اور شکر کے ساتھ ضمیر استعمال کی گئی ہے کیونکہ اردو ترتیب میں اس کے سوا چارہ نہ تھا۔
a
5:6; 16:115; 23:52; 40:65.
179
Commentary:
The injunction contained in the words, "eat of طیبات i.e. good, pure and wholesome things", indicates that Muslims are not allowed to use things which may, in any way, injure their physical or moral or spiritual health, though they may be حلال i.e. allowed by Law. The injunction is thus very important and far-reaching in its effect. The words, We have provided for you, further imply that Muslims are also not allowed to make use of things acquired by unfair and unlawful means. Only the things bestowed by God, i.e. those lawfully earned, are to be used.
a
5:6; 16:115; 23:52; 40:65.
197
The injunction contained in the words, "eat of good, pure and wholesome things (Tayyibat) indicates that Muslims are not allowed to use things which may, in any way, injure their physical or moral or spiritual health, though they may be allowed by the Shari‘ah.
فَمَنْ خَافَ مِن مُّوصٍ جَنَفًا أَوْ إِثْمًا فَأَصْلَحَ بَيْنَهُمْ فَلَآ إِثْمَ عَلَيْهِ ۚ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ غَفُورٌ رَّحِيمٌ
一个遗嘱可能遵照法定要求, 而也可能在它的某条款中是不公正的。例如, 假如某人留下很多继承者, 如果他出于施舍或其它合法的目的立下遗嘱, 花掉的数字高达足足有三分之一, 那么, 他就会给他们 (继承者) 带来困苦。或者, 立遗嘱者可能不公平地处理了可容许的三分之一之外的遗产, 不顾或忽略合法的要求。在这种情况下容许, 也的确值得在所有继承人与被偏袒的遗产承受人之间进行公平的调整。
یعنی وصیت کرنے والے اور ان رشتہ داروں کے درمیان جن کو نقصان پہنچانے یا نظر انداز کر دینے کا اس کا ارادہ ہو یا ان اشخاص میں جن کے حق میں وصیت ہے‘ باہمی سمجھوتے سے ان کو راضی کر دے کہ باوجود وصیت کے وہ ایک دوسرے کو اس کا حق ادا کر دیں۔ بعض دفعہ شریعت پر عمل کرنے کے باوجود وصیت کرنے کی صورت میں بعض نقصانات کا احتمال موجود ہوتا ہے۔ مثلاً اگر کوئی شخص ۳ /۱ کی وصیت کر دے مگر باقی وارث اتنے ہوں کہ بقیہ مال میں سے ان کو حصہ بہت کم ملتا ہو تو ایسی صورت میں اگر اصلاح کروادی جائے تو گناہ نہیں یعنی وصیت کرنے والے اور اس کے خاص محبوب یا خاص مبغوض میں صلح کرا دے۔
A will may comply with legal requirements and may yet be unfair in some of its provisions. For instance, if a person leaves a large number of heirs, it may entail a hardship on them if he wills away as much as the full one-third for charitable or other lawful purposes. Or, out of the permissible 1/3 the testator may have made unfair dispositions, neglecting or overlooking just claims. It would in such a case be permissible, indeed meritorious, to bring about a fair adjustment between the heirs and the legatees affected.
Important Words:
جنفا (partiality) is the infinitive noun from جنف. They say جنف عن الطریق meaning, he deviated from the right path. جنف فی وصیتهmeans, he acted wrongfully in his will. جانف اھله means, he kept away from his family out of anger and not for a just cause. تجانف لاثم means, he inclined towards sin. So جنف means: (1) inclining to sin, etc. (2) deviating from the right course; (3) acting unjustly or wrongfully; (4) keeping away from rightful things (Aqrab).
Commentary:
If someone should have reason to fear that the testator is showing undue favour to any particular person or party, or that he is acting contrary to Islamic Law, it would be no sin for him to bring about reconciliation between the parties concerned by removing the cause of displeasure or disagreement between the testator and his heirs and thereby having the will altered in accordance with the requirements of justice and Islamic Law. The words, it shall be no sin for him, do not mean that such pious intervention is simply an act of negative virtue. The expression has been used lest, in view of what has been said in the preceding verse regarding the sinfulness of the act of alteration in a will, some overcautious people should hold aloof even when they see an unjust inclination on the part of the testator. The verse thus really means that such an interference, far from being an act of sin, is an act of virtue which is sure to draw God’s mercy.
The concluding clause reminds the testator that God is Forgiving, so that if he mends his error, He will be pleased to forgive him. The declaration that God is Merciful, also serves as an inducement to other Muslims to intervene, if it is felt that the testator is unduly partial to one party, to the detriment of the other. In that case they should readily step in and set things right, for which God would give them an ample portion out of His mercy. Thus the word غفور (Most Forgiving) relates to such testators as return to the right course when reminded to do so, and the word رحیم (Merciful) relates to those persons who succeed in persuading the testator to revert to the path of rectitude and justice.
116
一个遗嘱可能遵照法定要求, 而也可能在它的某条款中是不公正的。例如, 假如某人留下很多继承者, 如果他出于施舍或其它合法的目的立下遗嘱, 花掉的数字高达足足有三分之一, 那么, 他就会给他们 (继承者) 带来困苦。或者, 立遗嘱者可能不公平地处理了可容许的三分之一之外的遗产, 不顾或忽略合法的要求。在这种情况下容许, 也的确值得在所有继承人与被偏袒的遗产承受人之间进行公平的调整。
2
یعنی وصیت کرنے والے اور ان رشتہ داروں کے درمیان جن کو نقصان پہنچانے یا نظر انداز کر دینے کا اس کا ارادہ ہو یا ان اشخاص میں جن کے حق میں وصیت ہے‘ باہمی سمجھوتے سے ان کو راضی کر دے کہ باوجود وصیت کے وہ ایک دوسرے کو اس کا حق ادا کر دیں۔ بعض دفعہ شریعت پر عمل کرنے کے باوجود وصیت کرنے کی صورت میں بعض نقصانات کا احتمال موجود ہوتا ہے۔ مثلاً اگر کوئی شخص ۳ /۱ کی وصیت کر دے مگر باقی وارث اتنے ہوں کہ بقیہ مال میں سے ان کو حصہ بہت کم ملتا ہو تو ایسی صورت میں اگر اصلاح کروادی جائے تو گناہ نہیں یعنی وصیت کرنے والے اور اس کے خاص محبوب یا خاص مبغوض میں صلح کرا دے۔
189
Important Words:
جنفا (partiality) is the infinitive noun from جنف. They say جنف عن الطریق meaning, he deviated from the right path. جنف فی وصیتهmeans, he acted wrongfully in his will. جانف اھله means, he kept away from his family out of anger and not for a just cause. تجانف لاثم means, he inclined towards sin. So جنف means: (1) inclining to sin, etc. (2) deviating from the right course; (3) acting unjustly or wrongfully; (4) keeping away from rightful things (Aqrab).
Commentary:
If someone should have reason to fear that the testator is showing undue favour to any particular person or party, or that he is acting contrary to Islamic Law, it would be no sin for him to bring about reconciliation between the parties concerned by removing the cause of displeasure or disagreement between the testator and his heirs and thereby having the will altered in accordance with the requirements of justice and Islamic Law. The words, it shall be no sin for him, do not mean that such pious intervention is simply an act of negative virtue. The expression has been used lest, in view of what has been said in the preceding verse regarding the sinfulness of the act of alteration in a will, some overcautious people should hold aloof even when they see an unjust inclination on the part of the testator. The verse thus really means that such an interference, far from being an act of sin, is an act of virtue which is sure to draw God’s mercy.
The concluding clause reminds the testator that God is Forgiving, so that if he mends his error, He will be pleased to forgive him. The declaration that God is Merciful, also serves as an inducement to other Muslims to intervene, if it is felt that the testator is unduly partial to one party, to the detriment of the other. In that case they should readily step in and set things right, for which God would give them an ample portion out of His mercy. Thus the word غفور (Most Forgiving) relates to such testators as return to the right course when reminded to do so, and the word رحیم (Merciful) relates to those persons who succeed in persuading the testator to revert to the path of rectitude and justice.
205B
A will may comply with legal requirements and may yet be unfair in some of its provisions. For instance, if a person leaves a large number of heirs, it may entail a hardship on them if he wills away as much as the full one-third for charitable or other lawful purposes. Or, out of the permissible 1/3 the testator may have made unfair dispositions, neglecting or overlooking just claims. It would in such a case be permissible, indeed meritorious, to bring about a fair adjustment between the heirs and the legatees affected.
يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ كُتِبَ عَلَيْكُمُ ٱلصِّيَامُ كَمَا كُتِبَ عَلَى ٱلَّذِينَ مِن قَبْلِكُمْ لَعَلَّكُمْ تَتَّقُونَ
斋戒作为一种宗教制度, 不论有什么形式或什么细目, 但在各门宗教中都有。大多数宗教 (文化低的, 中等的, 高的都一样) 都规定斋戒。在不要求斋戒的时候, 仍然有人个别封斋多少日子的以回应天性之激励 (Enc. Brit)。圣人们和先知们的共同感受是, 一定程度的肉体关系即尘世关系的割断对精神上的提高是必不可少的, 并且在心灵上有强大的净化作用。可是, 伊斯兰教在这种制度方面介绍了一种新的方向和新的宗教意义。据此, 斋戒构成了一种完全奉献的象征。斋戒者不仅忌讳作为维持生命的主要手段的吃喝, 因为没有它, 人不能生存, 而且忌讳与妻交媾这个繁衍后代的手段。因此, 必要的话, 一个真心的斋戒者就显示出愿意为他的养主和造物主献出自己的一切。
Fasting, as a religious institution, in whatever form or detail, is to be found in all Faiths. "By the greater number of religions, in the lower, middle and higher cultures alike, fasting is largely prescribed; and when it is not required it is nevertheless practised to some extent by individuals in response to the promptings of nature" (Enc. Brit.). It is the common experience of saints and seers that a certain degree of severance from physical relations or worldly connections is essential for spiritual advancement and has a powerful purifying effect on the mind. Islam, however, has introduced a new orientation and a new spiritual significance in this institution. According to it fasting constitutes a symbol of complete sacrifice. One who fasts not only abstains from food and drink which are the chief means of sustenance and without which one cannot live, but also from going in unto one’s wife which is the means of assuring one’s progeny. Thus he who fasts really evinces his readiness, if need be, to
Important Words:
الصیام (Fasting) is derived from صام meaning, he kept back or refrained from doing something; or he refrained from eating or drinking or talking or walking, etc. The Arabs say صامت الریح i.e. the wind became calm or motionless. فرس صائمmeans, a horse from which food has been withheld, or a horse which is confined to its manger and not made to walk or race. Thus صیام means: (1) keeping back or refraining from something; (2) refraining from eating and drinking, etc; and (3) formally refraining from eating, drinking, going in unto wives, etc. i.e. fasting from dawn till sunset as ordained by Islam. صائم is one who so refrains from food, etc. i.e. one who keeps a fast (Aqrab & Mufradat). An interesting feature of the Arabic language is revealed when we notice that the word صمات though derived from a different root, yet, owing to its having two root letters common with صیام gives a somewhat similar meaning, for, whereas صیام means, refraining from food, drink or speech, صمات means: (1) refraining from speech; and (2) intensity of thirst, the latter state being the direct result of refraining from drink (Aqrab).
Commentary:
As the preceding verses contain a reference to patience in trials and sacrifices as well as refraining from disputes and temptations, the Quran here fittingly turns to the subject of fasting, which is a most effective means of self-discipline.
The command to fast, whatever its details, is to be found in most religions in one form or another. The early devotions and fasting of Buddha (see Lalitavistara & Buddhacharita), the fasting of Moses, prior to his receiving the Ten Commandments (Exod. 34:28; Deut. 9:9), the fasts of Jesus before his receiving the heavenly call (Matt. 4:2), all testify to the importance of this institution. In fact, fasting is a form of devotion and self-discipline which has a natural appeal to man. "By the greater number of religions," says the Encyclopaedia Britannica, "in the lower, middle and higher cultures alike, fasting is largely prescribed: and when it is not required, it is nevertheless practised to some extent by individuals in response to the promptings of nature." The verse under comment, however, does not mean that fasting has been prescribed for the Muslims in the same form in which it was prescribed for the people of earlier faiths. Islam has greatly spiritualised this institution by attaching to it a number of highly useful regulations and restrictions.
The clause, so that you may become righteous, explains the deep philosophy underlying the commandment relating to fasting. It is a special characteristic of the Quran that, whenever it gives an important commandment, it does not give it arbitrarily but also explains its usefulness so that the addressee may be convinced of, and satisfied about, the wisdom underlying it. The object of صیام or fasting has been stated in this verse as the attainment of تقوی i.e. righteousness.
As explained in 2:3 the word تقوی or اتقا from which the word تتقون used in the present verse is derived means, to guard oneself against (1) harm and suffering, and (2) evil and sin. Thus the verse points out that the real object of fasting is, first, to be saved from harm and suffering, and secondly, to be saved from sin and evil.
The first object is attained through fasting in two ways: (1) When a man commits evil deeds and becomes deserving of God’s punishment on account of those deeds, but later feels ashamed of them and turns to God in repentance, then fasting serves as an atonement for his sins. (2) Fasting not only makes a man fit and able to bear hardships but also makes him realize the sufferings of his brethren in distress and feel sympathy for them. Thus fasting goes a long way to remove and minimize the pains and sufferings of humanity.
The second object, viz., that of being saved from sin and evil, is attained through fasting because, while fasting, a person has not only to abandon eating and drinking but also, to a certain extent, to keep himself aloof from worldly connections and to abstain from indulging in his desires, with the result that his thoughts naturally tend towards spiritual things. Spiritual men of all religions unanimously testify, on the basis of personal experience, that a certain degree of severance from physical relations and worldly connections is essential for spiritual advancement and has a powerful purifying effect on the mind. On the other hand, it cannot be denied that to carry such severance too far is sure to weaken the body to such an undesirable extent as to render a person unfit not only to fulfil his social and religious obligations but also to withstand temptations which requires a certain amount of strength. Islam, therefore, follows the path of the golden mean. While it does prescribe a certain degree of abstention from material pleasures, it does not permit such a weakening of the body as should incapacitate it for performing its normal functions. This is why the Holy Prophet has forbidden continuous fasting, saying, "Your self has a claim upon you and your family has a claim upon you and your guests have a claim upon you" (Tirmidhi). On another occasion, he is reported to have said, "Verily, I am the most righteous of you all, yet sometimes I fast and sometimes I abstain from fasting, and so must you do" (Bukhari).
Fasting also stands as a symbol for complete sacrifice. One who fasts not only abstains from food and drink, which are the chief means of sustenance and without which one cannot live, but also from going in unto one’s wife which is the means of assuring one’s future race. Thus he who fasts really expresses his readiness, if need be, to sacrifice his all for the sake of truth. Fasting indeed affords a wonderful training ground for man.
It must also be noted here that this verse does not actually contain a command to fast, which follows in the verse coming after the succeeding verse. It only prepares Muslims for the coming commandment by saying that (1) the fasting which is going to be prescribed for them is not a new thing but was also prescribed for the people that had gone before, and that (2) it is a most useful thing which is sure to benefit them greatly. It will be seen that very often the Quran does not give a commandment all of a sudden but first prepares the ground for it by making some general remarks. In this connection see also 2:143-145 where a similar process has been adopted.
117
斋戒作为一种宗教制度, 不论有什么形式或什么细目, 但在各门宗教中都有。大多数宗教 (文化低的, 中等的, 高的都一样) 都规定斋戒。在不要求斋戒的时候, 仍然有人个别封斋多少日子的以回应天性之激励 (Enc. Brit)。圣人们和先知们的共同感受是, 一定程度的肉体关系即尘世关系的割断对精神上的提高是必不可少的, 并且在心灵上有强大的净化作用。可是, 伊斯兰教在这种制度方面介绍了一种新的方向和新的宗教意义。据此, 斋戒构成了一种完全奉献的象征。斋戒者不仅忌讳作为维持生命的主要手段的吃喝, 因为没有它, 人不能生存, 而且忌讳与妻交媾这个繁衍后代的手段。因此, 必要的话, 一个真心的斋戒者就显示出愿意为他的养主和造物主献出自己的一切。
190
Important Words:
الصیام (Fasting) is derived from صام meaning, he kept back or refrained from doing something; or he refrained from eating or drinking or talking or walking, etc. The Arabs say صامت الریح i.e. the wind became calm or motionless. فرس صائمmeans, a horse from which food has been withheld, or a horse which is confined to its manger and not made to walk or race. Thus صیام means: (1) keeping back or refraining from something; (2) refraining from eating and drinking, etc; and (3) formally refraining from eating, drinking, going in unto wives, etc. i.e. fasting from dawn till sunset as ordained by Islam. صائم is one who so refrains from food, etc. i.e. one who keeps a fast (Aqrab & Mufradat). An interesting feature of the Arabic language is revealed when we notice that the word صمات though derived from a different root, yet, owing to its having two root letters common with صیام gives a somewhat similar meaning, for, whereas صیام means, refraining from food, drink or speech, صمات means: (1) refraining from speech; and (2) intensity of thirst, the latter state being the direct result of refraining from drink (Aqrab).
Commentary:
As the preceding verses contain a reference to patience in trials and sacrifices as well as refraining from disputes and temptations, the Quran here fittingly turns to the subject of fasting, which is a most effective means of self-discipline.
The command to fast, whatever its details, is to be found in most religions in one form or another. The early devotions and fasting of Buddha (see Lalitavistara & Buddhacharita), the fasting of Moses, prior to his receiving the Ten Commandments (Exod. 34:28; Deut. 9:9), the fasts of Jesus before his receiving the heavenly call (Matt. 4:2), all testify to the importance of this institution. In fact, fasting is a form of devotion and self-discipline which has a natural appeal to man. "By the greater number of religions," says the Encyclopaedia Britannica, "in the lower, middle and higher cultures alike, fasting is largely prescribed: and when it is not required, it is nevertheless practised to some extent by individuals in response to the promptings of nature." The verse under comment, however, does not mean that fasting has been prescribed for the Muslims in the same form in which it was prescribed for the people of earlier faiths. Islam has greatly spiritualised this institution by attaching to it a number of highly useful regulations and restrictions.
The clause, so that you may become righteous, explains the deep philosophy underlying the commandment relating to fasting. It is a special characteristic of the Quran that, whenever it gives an important commandment, it does not give it arbitrarily but also explains its usefulness so that the addressee may be convinced of, and satisfied about, the wisdom underlying it. The object of صیام or fasting has been stated in this verse as the attainment of تقوی i.e. righteousness.
As explained in 2:3 the word تقوی or اتقا from which the word تتقون used in the present verse is derived means, to guard oneself against (1) harm and suffering, and (2) evil and sin. Thus the verse points out that the real object of fasting is, first, to be saved from harm and suffering, and secondly, to be saved from sin and evil.
The first object is attained through fasting in two ways: (1) When a man commits evil deeds and becomes deserving of God’s punishment on account of those deeds, but later feels ashamed of them and turns to God in repentance, then fasting serves as an atonement for his sins. (2) Fasting not only makes a man fit and able to bear hardships but also makes him realize the sufferings of his brethren in distress and feel sympathy for them. Thus fasting goes a long way to remove and minimize the pains and sufferings of humanity.
The second object, viz., that of being saved from sin and evil, is attained through fasting because, while fasting, a person has not only to abandon eating and drinking but also, to a certain extent, to keep himself aloof from worldly connections and to abstain from indulging in his desires, with the result that his thoughts naturally tend towards spiritual things. Spiritual men of all religions unanimously testify, on the basis of personal experience, that a certain degree of severance from physical relations and worldly connections is essential for spiritual advancement and has a powerful purifying effect on the mind. On the other hand, it cannot be denied that to carry such severance too far is sure to weaken the body to such an undesirable extent as to render a person unfit not only to fulfil his social and religious obligations but also to withstand temptations which requires a certain amount of strength. Islam, therefore, follows the path of the golden mean. While it does prescribe a certain degree of abstention from material pleasures, it does not permit such a weakening of the body as should incapacitate it for performing its normal functions. This is why the Holy Prophet has forbidden continuous fasting, saying, "Your self has a claim upon you and your family has a claim upon you and your guests have a claim upon you" (Tirmidhi). On another occasion, he is reported to have said, "Verily, I am the most righteous of you all, yet sometimes I fast and sometimes I abstain from fasting, and so must you do" (Bukhari).
Fasting also stands as a symbol for complete sacrifice. One who fasts not only abstains from food and drink, which are the chief means of sustenance and without which one cannot live, but also from going in unto one’s wife which is the means of assuring one’s future race. Thus he who fasts really expresses his readiness, if need be, to sacrifice his all for the sake of truth. Fasting indeed affords a wonderful training ground for man.
It must also be noted here that this verse does not actually contain a command to fast, which follows in the verse coming after the succeeding verse. It only prepares Muslims for the coming commandment by saying that (1) the fasting which is going to be prescribed for them is not a new thing but was also prescribed for the people that had gone before, and that (2) it is a most useful thing which is sure to benefit them greatly. It will be seen that very often the Quran does not give a commandment all of a sudden but first prepares the ground for it by making some general remarks. In this connection see also 2:143-145 where a similar process has been adopted.
206
Fasting, as a religious institution, in whatever form or detail, is to be found in all Faiths. "By the greater number of religions, in the lower, middle and higher cultures alike, fasting is largely prescribed; and when it is not required it is nevertheless practised to some extent by individuals in response to the promptings of nature" (Enc. Brit.). It is the common experience of saints and seers that a certain degree of severance from physical relations or worldly connections is essential for spiritual advancement and has a powerful purifying effect on the mind. Islam, however, has introduced a new orientation and a new spiritual significance in this institution. According to it fasting constitutes a symbol of complete sacrifice. One who fasts not only abstains from food and drink which are the chief means of sustenance and without which one cannot live, but also from going in unto one’s wife which is the means of assuring one’s progeny. Thus he who fasts really evinces his readiness, if need be, to
۞ يَسْـَٔلُونَكَ عَنِ ٱلْأَهِلَّةِ ۖ قُلْ هِىَ مَوَٰقِيتُ لِلنَّاسِ وَٱلْحَجِّ ۗ وَلَيْسَ ٱلْبِرُّ بِأَن تَأْتُوا۟ ٱلْبُيُوتَ مِن ظُهُورِهَا وَلَٰكِنَّ ٱلْبِرَّ مَنِ ٱتَّقَىٰ ۗ وَأْتُوا۟ ٱلْبُيُوتَ مِنْ أَبْوَٰبِهَا ۚ وَٱتَّقُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ لَعَلَّكُمْ تُفْلِحُونَ
عرب حاجی جب حج کو جاتے تو ضرورت پڑنے پر اگر واپس گھروں کو آتے تو دیوار پھاند کر گھر میں گھستے۔ اس آیت میں اس کا ردّ کیا کہ گھر میں دیواریں پھاند کر جانا نیکی نہیں۔ نیکی تو ایک روحانی امر ہے۔ پس ہر چیز کے حصول کے لئے صحیح طریق اختیار کیا کرو۔
2:198; 9:36.
2:178.
Islam has made use of both the lunar and solar systems for measuring time. Where worship is to be performed in different parts of the day the solar system of reckoning time is used, as in the five daily Prayers or for the beginning and the breaking of the daily fast; and where worship is to be completed within a particular month or part thereof, the lunar system is used, as in selecting the month of fasting or the appointment of the time of Pilgrimage, etc. Thus Islam has made use of both the systems; so the solar system is as much Islamic as the lunar system.
The clause points to a very important principle that the real purpose in prescribing different acts of worship is the intrinsic usefulness thereof and not that every change of time should have attached to it an act of worship. Therefore the question, arising from the over-eagerness of the Faithful, that, like fasting, there may be prescribed other acts of worship in other months also, was like approaching a house not through its door but by "the back thereof." The primary thing is worship and time is only secondary, but those who put the question wanted to make time a primary, and worship merely a secondary thing. This was like putting the cart before the horse. The reference also seems to be to a practice of the pagan Arabs that when they had once started on Pilgrimage to Mecca, if for any reason they had to come back, they would enter their houses from their backs by scaling over the walls. The verse condemns such practices, pointing out that they do not constitute virtue which is a spiritual concept, an
2:198; 9:36.
2:178.
Important Words:
الاھلة (new moons) is the plural of الھلال i.e. the new moon. The word is generally used about the moon of the first two or three nights. About the moon of other nights the word used is قمر (Aqrab).
مواقیت (means for measuring time) is the plural of میقات which is derived from وقت i.e. time. میقات means: (1) time; (2) time fixed or appointed for a certain thing; (3) a promise for which a time is fixed; (4) a place in which a meeting is appointed to take place at a particular time (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
When the Companions of the Holy Prophet heard of the great blessings of the month of Ramadan, they naturally desired to know the blessings attending other months. This question on their part shows how solicitous they were to win God’s blessings and attain His nearness.
The clause, they are means for measuring time, should not give rise to the misunderstanding that Islam looks upon the moon only as a means of measuring time; for elsewhere the Quran speaks of the sun also as such (6:97 and 17:13). In fact, Islam has made use of both the lunar and solar systems for measuring time. Where worship is to be performed in different parts of the day, the solar system of reckoning time is used, as in the five daily Prayers or for the opening and the closing of a daily fast; and where worship is to be connected with a particular month or part thereof, the lunar system is used, as in selecting the month of fasting or the appointment of the time of Pilgrimage, etc. As a matter of fact, as religious commandments are meant for the general public, the system used is always such as may be easily understandable by the common people. All commandments relating to a fixed time are therefore based on the visible part of the solar or the lunar system of reckoning time, as the case may be. Changes in the position of the sun during the day are visible but the beginning of a solar month is not visible. On the other hand, the appearance of a new moon in the beginning of a lunar month is visible. Therefore Islam has made use of both; and the solar system is as much Islamic as the lunar system.
The clause, and it is not righteousness that you come into houses by the backs thereof, points to a very important principle that the real purpose in appointing different acts of worship is the intrinsic usefulness thereof and not that to each change of time there should be attached an act of worship. Therefore the question, resulting from the over-eagerness of the Faithful, that, like fasting, there may be prescribed other acts of worship relating to other months also, was like approaching a house not through its door but by "the back thereof". The primary thing was worship and time was only secondary, but those who put the question wanted to make time primary and worship merely secondary. This was like putting the cart before the horse.
The clause also means that one should adopt the right course to attain an object. Every end can be attained by having recourse to certain means. Similarly, certain ways have been prescribed by God for winning His pleasure and attaining His nearness. People should faithfully stick to these and not devise ways of their own. By doing so, they will only suffer trouble, and gain nothing.
It is also on record that it was the practice among the idolaters of Arabia that when they left their homes and started on Pilgrimage to Mecca, then if for some purpose or object they had to come back to their houses, they did not enter them by their doors, but climbed into them by their back walls (Bukhari, ch. on Tafsir). Islam does not approve of such meaningless practices.
b
2:198; 9:36.
c
2:178.
126
伊斯兰教利用太阴系和太阳系两者计时。礼拜在白天的不同时候举行, 则使用太阳系计时, 如每日五次礼拜, 或每日的斋戒开始和中止; 凡崇拜仪式要在某一特定的月份或该月的某一时间完成者, 则使用太阴系, 如选择斋戒月份或规定朝觐的时间等。这样, 伊斯兰教利用两种体系; 因此就计时来说, 太阳系和太阴系都是伊斯兰教的。
1
عرب حاجی جب حج کو جاتے تو ضرورت پڑنے پر اگر واپس گھروں کو آتے تو دیوار پھاند کر گھر میں گھستے۔ اس آیت میں اس کا ردّ کیا کہ گھر میں دیواریں پھاند کر جانا نیکی نہیں۔ نیکی تو ایک روحانی امر ہے۔ پس ہر چیز کے حصول کے لئے صحیح طریق اختیار کیا کرو۔
a
2:198; 9:36.
b
2:178.
196
Important Words:
الاھلة (new moons) is the plural of الھلال i.e. the new moon. The word is generally used about the moon of the first two or three nights. About the moon of other nights the word used is قمر (Aqrab).
مواقیت (means for measuring time) is the plural of میقات which is derived from وقت i.e. time. میقات means: (1) time; (2) time fixed or appointed for a certain thing; (3) a promise for which a time is fixed; (4) a place in which a meeting is appointed to take place at a particular time (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
When the Companions of the Holy Prophet heard of the great blessings of the month of Ramadan, they naturally desired to know the blessings attending other months. This question on their part shows how solicitous they were to win God’s blessings and attain His nearness.
The clause, they are means for measuring time, should not give rise to the misunderstanding that Islam looks upon the moon only as a means of measuring time; for elsewhere the Quran speaks of the sun also as such (6:97 and 17:13). In fact, Islam has made use of both the lunar and solar systems for measuring time. Where worship is to be performed in different parts of the day, the solar system of reckoning time is used, as in the five daily Prayers or for the opening and the closing of a daily fast; and where worship is to be connected with a particular month or part thereof, the lunar system is used, as in selecting the month of fasting or the appointment of the time of Pilgrimage, etc. As a matter of fact, as religious commandments are meant for the general public, the system used is always such as may be easily understandable by the common people. All commandments relating to a fixed time are therefore based on the visible part of the solar or the lunar system of reckoning time, as the case may be. Changes in the position of the sun during the day are visible but the beginning of a solar month is not visible. On the other hand, the appearance of a new moon in the beginning of a lunar month is visible. Therefore Islam has made use of both; and the solar system is as much Islamic as the lunar system.
The clause, and it is not righteousness that you come into houses by the backs thereof, points to a very important principle that the real purpose in appointing different acts of worship is the intrinsic usefulness thereof and not that to each change of time there should be attached an act of worship. Therefore the question, resulting from the over-eagerness of the Faithful, that, like fasting, there may be prescribed other acts of worship relating to other months also, was like approaching a house not through its door but by "the back thereof". The primary thing was worship and time was only secondary, but those who put the question wanted to make time primary and worship merely secondary. This was like putting the cart before the horse.
The clause also means that one should adopt the right course to attain an object. Every end can be attained by having recourse to certain means. Similarly, certain ways have been prescribed by God for winning His pleasure and attaining His nearness. People should faithfully stick to these and not devise ways of their own. By doing so, they will only suffer trouble, and gain nothing.
It is also on record that it was the practice among the idolaters of Arabia that when they left their homes and started on Pilgrimage to Mecca, then if for some purpose or object they had to come back to their houses, they did not enter them by their doors, but climbed into them by their back walls (Bukhari, ch. on Tafsir). Islam does not approve of such meaningless practices.
a
2:198; 9:36.
b
2:178.
217
Islam has made use of both the lunar and solar systems for measuring time. Where worship is to be performed in different parts of the day the solar system of reckoning time is used, as in the five daily Prayers or for the beginning and the breaking of the daily fast; and where worship is to be completed within a particular month or part thereof, the lunar system is used, as in selecting the month of fasting or the appointment of the time of Pilgrimage, etc. Thus Islam has made use of both the systems; so the solar system is as much Islamic as the lunar system.
218
The clause points to a very important principle that the real purpose in prescribing different acts of worship is the intrinsic usefulness thereof and not that every change of time should have attached to it an act of worship. Therefore the question, arising from the over-eagerness of the Faithful, that, like fasting, there may be prescribed other acts of worship in other months also, was like approaching a house not through its door but by "the back thereof." The primary thing is worship and time is only secondary, but those who put the question wanted to make time a primary, and worship merely a secondary thing. This was like putting the cart before the horse. The reference also seems to be to a practice of the pagan Arabs that when they had once started on Pilgrimage to Mecca, if for any reason they had to come back, they would enter their houses from their backs by scaling over the walls. The verse condemns such practices, pointing out that they do not constitute virtue which is a spiritual concept, an
أَمْ حَسِبْتُمْ أَن تَدْخُلُوا۟ ٱلْجَنَّةَ وَلَمَّا يَأْتِكُم مَّثَلُ ٱلَّذِينَ خَلَوْا۟ مِن قَبْلِكُم ۖ مَّسَّتْهُمُ ٱلْبَأْسَآءُ وَٱلضَّرَّآءُ وَزُلْزِلُوا۟ حَتَّىٰ يَقُولَ ٱلرَّسُولُ وَٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ مَعَهُۥ مَتَىٰ نَصْرُ ٱللَّهِ ۗ أَلَآ إِنَّ نَصْرَ ٱللَّهِ قَرِيبٌ
3:143; 9:16.
2:178.
12:111.
对伊斯兰教义的接受不是一帆风顺的, 因而穆斯林被提醒, 在他们能够希望达到他们崇高的理想之前, 他们将必须通过严峻的考验、磨炼和苦难。
体现在 “什么时候安拉的帮助才会降临?” 这种可怜的呼救声并不意味着绝望与沮丧, 因为就安拉的先知和他的信者来说, 失望的态度是不可思议的, 与真实的信仰不协调的 (12:88)。实际上, 这句话构成了一个祈求--------诚挚地恳求安拉神速地赐予帮助的一种方式。
وَ لَمَّایَاْ تِکُمْ جملہ حالیہ ہے اور حال کا ترجمہ اردو میں قریب ترین ’’باوجود اس کے‘‘ یا ’’ہوکر‘‘ یا ’’بن کر‘‘ کے لفظ بڑھا کر ہی ہو سکتا ہے۔ اس جگہ ’’باوجود اس کے‘‘ کے الفاظ ہی زیادہ سجتے ہیں اور مطلب بالکل درست رہتا ہے۔
اس جگہ خدا نے نبیوں اور مومنوں پر جو مصائب آتے ہیں ان کی حکمت بتائی ہے۔ فرماتا ہے کہ ہم چاہتے تو انہیں کوئی بھی تکلیف نہ پہنچنے دیتے۔ مگر ہم نے ایسا نہیں کیا بلکہ مخالفوں کے عذاب اور تکلیفیں خدا کے نبیوں اور ان پر ایمان لانے والوں کو برابر پہنچتی رہیں اور اس میں ہماری غرض یہ تھی کہ ان کے دلوں میں دعاؤں کی تحریک زیادہ سے زیادہ پیدا ہوتی رہے اور وہ باربار ہماری طرف جھکیں تا ایک طرف ان کے دلوں میں اللہ تعالیٰ کی محبت بڑھے اور دوسری طرف جب اللہ تعالیٰ کی نصرت معجزانہ طور پر آئے تو ان کے ایمان بڑھیں اور کفار میں سے جو غور کرنے والے ہوں انہیں ہدایت حاصل ہو۔ چنانچہ فرماتا ہ
3:143; 9:16.
See 2:178.
12:111.
Acceptance of the Message of Islam was no bed of roses, and Muslims were warned that they would have to pass through fiery ordeals, trials and tribulations before they could hope to achieve their sublime ideal.
Hatta also means, "so that" (Mughni). The word has also been used in this sense in 63:8.
The pathetic cry for help embodied in the words, When will the help of Allah come, does not denote despair or despondency because an attitude of despair on the part of a Prophet of God and his followers is inconceivable, being inconsistent with true faith (12:88). The words in reality constitute a prayer—a way of earnestly beseeching God to expedite His help.
3:143; 9:16.
See 2:178.
12:111.
Important Words:
زلزلوا (violently shaken) is from زلزل or زل. They say زلزل الله الارض i.e. God made the earth quake violently or put the earth in a state of convulsion or violent motion. زلزله means, he put him or it in a state of commotion or agitation or violent motion; he put him in a state of great fear or terror. الزلزلة which is the noun-infinitive from زلزل means: (1) violent shaking or commotion; (2) earthquake. The word is also used, especially in its plural form, to denote afflictions, miseries and trials (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
In the preceding two verses God promised believers a reward "without reckoning" and called upon them to strive to bring all the peoples of the world under the banner of Islam so that they might become one people. The fulfilment of this great promise and the attainment of this noble object necessitated unusual sacrifices on the part of the Faithful, to which the verse under comment fittingly draws the attention of Muslims.
Indeed, acceptance of the Message of Islam was no bed of roses, and Muslims were warned that they would have to pass through a fiery ordeal of trials and tribulations before they could hope to achieve their sublime ideal. Incidentally, they were also told that the sufferings and hardships they had already undergone were nothing as compared with the trials that were yet in store for them. They were being mentally prepared to meet the storm which was brewing in Mecca and which reached its culmination in the Battle of the Ditch.
The word الجنة literally meaning garden and translated here as "Heaven" need not necessarily refer to the Heaven vouchsafed to the Faithful in the Hereafter. The word is also used to express a state of success and prosperity in this very world. Nay, God has definitely promised in the Quran that the righteous would have جنة or Heaven even in this life (55:47). In this sense the word "Heaven" in this verse would refer to the great success and prosperity promised to Muslims in the preceding verse.
The word حتی translated as 'until' also means, so that or in order that. According to the latter signification, the verse would mean that God proves or tries the Prophet and the believers with difficulties and hardships and withholds His help from them so that they may invoke it by earnest prayers and supplication. This is a beautiful way by which God manifests His love for the Prophet and his followers. He delights in treating them like children, wishing them to beg of Him so that He may give them.
The pathetic cry for help embodied in the words, when will come the help of Allah? Does not denote despair, because an attitude of despair on the part of a Prophet of God and his followers is inconceivable, being inconsistent with true faith (12:88). The words are simply a form of prayer, a way of earnestly beseeching God to expedite His help, and not an expression denoting despair and disappointment. The reply given by God in the words, Yea, surely the help of Allah is nigh, also corroborates this interpretation; for, if the words of the Faithful had been expressive of despair, God would certainly not have answered in that loving manner but would have taken notice of it.
a
3:143; 9:16.
b
2:178.
c
12:111.
155
对伊斯兰教义的接受不是一帆风顺的, 因而穆斯林被提醒, 在他们能够希望达到他们崇高的理想之前, 他们将必须通过严峻的考验、磨炼和苦难。
156
体现在 “什么时候安拉的帮助才会降临?” 这种可怜的呼救声并不意味着绝望与沮丧, 因为就安拉的先知和他的信者来说, 失望的态度是不可思议的, 与真实的信仰不协调的 (12:88)。实际上, 这句话构成了一个祈求--------诚挚地恳求安拉神速地赐予帮助的一种方式。
1
وَ لَمَّایَاْ تِکُمْ جملہ حالیہ ہے اور حال کا ترجمہ اردو میں قریب ترین ’’باوجود اس کے‘‘ یا ’’ہوکر‘‘ یا ’’بن کر‘‘ کے لفظ بڑھا کر ہی ہو سکتا ہے۔ اس جگہ ’’باوجود اس کے‘‘ کے الفاظ ہی زیادہ سجتے ہیں اور مطلب بالکل درست رہتا ہے۔
2
اس جگہ خدا نے نبیوں اور مومنوں پر جو مصائب آتے ہیں ان کی حکمت بتائی ہے۔ فرماتا ہے کہ ہم چاہتے تو انہیں کوئی بھی تکلیف نہ پہنچنے دیتے۔ مگر ہم نے ایسا نہیں کیا بلکہ مخالفوں کے عذاب اور تکلیفیں خدا کے نبیوں اور ان پر ایمان لانے والوں کو برابر پہنچتی رہیں اور اس میں ہماری غرض یہ تھی کہ ان کے دلوں میں دعاؤں کی تحریک زیادہ سے زیادہ پیدا ہوتی رہے اور وہ باربار ہماری طرف جھکیں تا ایک طرف ان کے دلوں میں اللہ تعالیٰ کی محبت بڑھے اور دوسری طرف جب اللہ تعالیٰ کی نصرت معجزانہ طور پر آئے تو ان کے ایمان بڑھیں اور کفار میں سے جو غور کرنے والے ہوں انہیں ہدایت حاصل ہو۔ چنانچہ فرماتا ہ
a
3:143; 9:16.
b
See 2:178.
c
12:111.
221
Important Words:
زلزلوا (violently shaken) is from زلزل or زل. They say زلزل الله الارض i.e. God made the earth quake violently or put the earth in a state of convulsion or violent motion. زلزله means, he put him or it in a state of commotion or agitation or violent motion; he put him in a state of great fear or terror. الزلزلة which is the noun-infinitive from زلزل means: (1) violent shaking or commotion; (2) earthquake. The word is also used, especially in its plural form, to denote afflictions, miseries and trials (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
In the preceding two verses God promised believers a reward "without reckoning" and called upon them to strive to bring all the peoples of the world under the banner of Islam so that they might become one people. The fulfilment of this great promise and the attainment of this noble object necessitated unusual sacrifices on the part of the Faithful, to which the verse under comment fittingly draws the attention of Muslims.
Indeed, acceptance of the Message of Islam was no bed of roses, and Muslims were warned that they would have to pass through a fiery ordeal of trials and tribulations before they could hope to achieve their sublime ideal. Incidentally, they were also told that the sufferings and hardships they had already undergone were nothing as compared with the trials that were yet in store for them. They were being mentally prepared to meet the storm which was brewing in Mecca and which reached its culmination in the Battle of the Ditch.
The word الجنة literally meaning garden and translated here as "Heaven" need not necessarily refer to the Heaven vouchsafed to the Faithful in the Hereafter. The word is also used to express a state of success and prosperity in this very world. Nay, God has definitely promised in the Quran that the righteous would have جنة or Heaven even in this life (55:47). In this sense the word "Heaven" in this verse would refer to the great success and prosperity promised to Muslims in the preceding verse.
The word حتی translated as 'until' also means, so that or in order that. According to the latter signification, the verse would mean that God proves or tries the Prophet and the believers with difficulties and hardships and withholds His help from them so that they may invoke it by earnest prayers and supplication. This is a beautiful way by which God manifests His love for the Prophet and his followers. He delights in treating them like children, wishing them to beg of Him so that He may give them.
The pathetic cry for help embodied in the words, when will come the help of Allah? Does not denote despair, because an attitude of despair on the part of a Prophet of God and his followers is inconceivable, being inconsistent with true faith (12:88). The words are simply a form of prayer, a way of earnestly beseeching God to expedite His help, and not an expression denoting despair and disappointment. The reply given by God in the words, Yea, surely the help of Allah is nigh, also corroborates this interpretation; for, if the words of the Faithful had been expressive of despair, God would certainly not have answered in that loving manner but would have taken notice of it.
a
3:143; 9:16.
b
See 2:178.
c
12:111.
256
Acceptance of the Message of Islam was no bed of roses, and Muslims were warned that they would have to pass through fiery ordeals, trials and tribulations before they could hope to achieve their sublime ideal.
256A
Hatta also means, "so that" (Mughni). The word has also been used in this sense in 63:8.
257
The pathetic cry for help embodied in the words, When will the help of Allah come, does not denote despair or despondency because an attitude of despair on the part of a Prophet of God and his followers is inconceivable, being inconsistent with true faith (12:88). The words in reality constitute a prayer—a way of earnestly beseeching God to expedite His help.
۞ يَسْـَٔلُونَكَ عَنِ ٱلْخَمْرِ وَٱلْمَيْسِرِ ۖ قُلْ فِيهِمَآ إِثْمٌ كَبِيرٌ وَمَنَٰفِعُ لِلنَّاسِ وَإِثْمُهُمَآ أَكْبَرُ مِن نَّفْعِهِمَا ۗ وَيَسْـَٔلُونَكَ مَاذَا يُنفِقُونَ قُلِ ٱلْعَفْوَ ۗ كَذَٰلِكَ يُبَيِّنُ ٱللَّهُ لَكُمُ ٱلْءَايَٰتِ لَعَلَّكُمْ تَتَفَكَّرُونَ
5:91, 92.
خَمَرَالشَّیْءَ (Khamarash-Shai’a) 意指, 他掩藏或遮盖或隐瞒了这事情。酒被称为 خَمْر (Khamr) 因为它遮盖、隐藏或影响才智或理性, 或因为它搅昏和刺激头脑, 以致使它失去了控制能力。这词特别用来指由葡萄配制的酒, 也指一切麻醉品 (Lane)。 “酒精中毒是导致疾病的一个重要因素; 而在所有的疾病中, 饮酒过度的人是糟糕的病人。在流行病中, 饮酒人中间的死亡率特别高, 而对疾病、损伤和疲劳的一般的抵抗能力也被减少……。酒精中毒还减少长寿的可能性; 英国人寿保险公司发现, 据调查, 不饮酒者的寿命大约比饮酒的人长一倍。酒精中毒和犯罪的密切联系是众所周知的; 而贝尔 (Baer)、库雷拉 (Kurella) 和加拉符尔丁 (Gallavardin) 及锡卡尔特 (Sichart) 的统计资料表明, 所有犯罪分子中有25%到85%是酒鬼。……酒精中毒的不良后果在酒鬼的后代中是明显的……羊痫疯、精神病、白痴以及各种形式的肉体的、精神的和道德的衰退, 很不均衡地流行于过量饮酒者的后代中。” (Jew. Enc.) “饮酒所造成的影响几乎完全来自它对神经系统的干扰作用, 当进入酗酒的严重状况时, 将出现理性与判断力中止的现象。” (Enc. Brit.)。“至于过量饮酒者与违反道德规范及国家法律之间的密切联系则受到普遍的证明。这是理智的和道德的高级官能机构瘫痪的直接后果, 从而使各种低级的爱好得到放任。” (Enc. Rel. Eth.)
اَيْسَرَالرَّجُلُ (Aisarar-Rajulu) 的意思是, 人变得富裕。مَيْسَرْ (Maisar) 之所以如此称谓是因为赌徒力求迅速而容易地致富而不想操一操心, 以艰苦的劳动来获得财富; “赌博的这种邪恶的倾向从来没有受到怀疑。实质上, 这是对社会有害的: 它使同情心凋谢, 助长自私自利因而产生在品格上的全面坠落。这是一种内在的野蛮的习性……。其动机是仔细掩盖起来的贪婪。这是一种妄想得到财富而付出代价的企图。这是违背对称规律的。这是一种双方合同的掠夺, 正像双方的决斗, 是互相协定的彼此凶杀。它由贪婪而引起, 导致懒散。此外它还向运气求援。为了碰运气, 行为的主宰准备破坏道德秩序和生活的稳定。它全神贯注于钱财上, 而由此失去对人生目的更有价值的注意力” (Enc. Rel. Eth.)。
伊斯兰教的特点是决不全面谴责一件事, 但大方而直率地承认哪怕在这件事内可能发现的最小的善举。伊斯兰教禁止某些事情并不是认为它们一无是处, 而是它们的损害要超过它们的益处, 因为世界上不存在完全无益的东西。由于麻醉物和投机这种玩艺儿有极大的危害而加以禁止, 另一方面并没有不承认它们具有少量益处。
عَفْو (‘Afw) 的意思是, (a) 超出或高于所需要的; 而所花费的不致使给予的人发生困苦; (b) 一件东西中的最好部分; (c) 不被要求的给予 (اَقْرَبْ)。一般信者必须花费他们自己的合理需要满足之后的剩余部分, 而期望那些高级的信者花费他们的财产的最好部份。可是, 假如这款项是为了全体信者集体使用的, 那就意味着在战争时期他们只应当给自己保留一分还可勉强满足生活之需的财产。
اِثْمٌ کے معنے گناہ کے ہیں اور کبھی گناہ کی سزا کے معنوں میں بھی استعمال ہوتا ہے۔ قرآن کریم میں ہے۔ وَمَنْ یَّفْعَلْ ذٰلِکَ یَلْقَ اَثَامًا (فرقان: ۶۹) یعنی اپنے گناہ کی سزا بھگتے گا۔ ان معنوں کو مدِّنظر رکھتے ہوئے گناہ اور نقصان کے معنے کیے گئے ہیں۔ لیکن ’’اور نقصان‘‘ کے لفظوں کو خطوط وحدانی میں لکھ دیا گیا ہے۔
اسی طرح اِثْمٌ کے معنے نیکیوں سے روکنے کے ہیں (مفردات) پس اس کے یہ معنے بھی ہو سکتے ہیں کہ ان افعال کے نتیجہ میں نیکیوں سے محرومی ان کے منافع سے زیادہ ہے۔ یہ معنے گو ترجمہ کے لحاظ سے مشکل ہیں لیکن تفسیر کے لحاظ سے بہت اعلیٰ ہیں کیونکہ حقیقت
عَفْو کے تین معنے ہوتے ہیں۔ (۱) خِیَارُ الشَّیْئِ وَاَطْیَبُہٗ یعنی سب سے اچھی اور پاکیزہ شے (۲) مَایَفْضُلُ عَنِ النَّفَقَۃِ وَلَاعُسْرَ عَلٰی صَاحِبِہٖ فِیْ اِعْطَآئِہٖ جو اپنے ضروری خرچ سے بچ جائے اور دینے والے کو اس کے دینے سے تکلیف نہ پہنچے (۳) یُقَالُ اَعْطَیْتُہٗ عَفْوَ الْمَالِ اَیْ بِغَیْرِ مَسْأَلَۃٍ یعنی عفو کے معنے بغیر مانگے دینے کے بھی ہوتے ہیں (اقرب) پہلے بھی ایسا ہی سوال گزر چکا ہے اور وہاں جواب دیا تھا کہ جو بھی حلال و طیب مال خرچ کرو مناسب ہے۔ وہاں اقسام صدقہ کے متعلق سوال تھا۔ یہاں کَمیّت کے متعلق سوال ہے یعنی کتنا دے؟ سو اس
5:91, 92.
Khamarush-Shai’a means, he veiled or covered up or concealed the thing. Wine is called Khamr because it covers or obscures or affects the intellect or the senses, or because it agitates and excites the brain so as to make it lose its power of control. The word is specifically used for wine prepared from grapes but signifies all intoxicants (Lane). "Alcoholism is an important factor in the causation of disease; and in all diseases alcoholics are bad patients. In epidemics the mortality among drinkers is excessive; and the general power of resistance to disease, injury, and fatigue is diminished.....Alcoholism lessens the chance of life; the English life-insurance companies found that the presumptive length of life of non-drinkers was about twice that of drinkers. The close relationship of alcoholism and crime is well- known; and the statistics of Baer, Kurella and Gallavardin and Sichart show that from 25 to 85 per cent of all malefactors are drunkards... "The evil effects of alcoholism are
Aisarar-Rajulu means, man became well off. Maisar is so called because the gambler seeks to become rich quickly and easily without undergoing the trouble of earning wealth by hard work. "The vicious tendency of gambling has never been called in question. It is essentially anti-social; it sears the sympathies, cultivates hard egoism and so produces a general deterioration of character. It is a habit intrinsically savage....Its motive is carefully disguised covetousness. It is an attempt to get property without paying the price for it. It is a violation of the law of equivalents. It is a kind of robbery by mutual agreement just as duelling which is murder by mutual agreement. It is begotten of covetousness; it leads to idleness. It is, moreover, an appeal to chance. To make chance the arbiter of conduct is to subvert the moral order and stability of life. It concentrates attention upon lucre and thereby withdraws attention from worthier objects of life" (Enc. Rel. Eth.).
Ithm means, sin; punishment of sin; the harm that might result from sin (Lane).
It is characteristic of Islam that it never condemns a thing wholesale but freely and frankly admits even the smallest good that may be found in it. Islam prohibits certain things not because it considers them to be devoid of all good, for there is nothing in the world, which is wholly bad, but because their evil outweighs their good. While prohibiting the use of intoxicants and games of chance because of their great harm, Islam has not failed to acknowledge the few advantages they possess.
‘Afw means, (a) what exceeds or remains over and above one’s requirements, and the spending of what does not cause hardship to the giver; (b) the best portion of a thing; (c) giving without being asked (Aqrab). Ordinary believers are required to spend what remains after their own legitimate needs have been met, and the higher class of believers are expected to spend the best portion of their possessions. If, however, the clause be applied collectively to all believers, it would mean that in times of war they should retain for themselves only such portion of their possessions as may suffice to meet their bare necessities of life.
5:91, 92.
Important Words:
الخمر (wine) is the noun-infinitive from خمر. They say خمر الشیء meaning, he veiled or covered up the thing. خمرالشھادة means, he concealed the evidence. خمرالعجین means, he leavened the dough and left it till it became well fermented. خامره means, it became mixed or blended with it; it infected or pervaded it. A veil worn by a woman is called خمار because it screens or covers her face and head. Wine is called خمر because it covers or obscures or infects the intellect or the senses, or because it agitates and excites the brain so as to make it uncontrolled. The word is specific for wine prepared from grapes but is also used generally (Aqrab & Lane).
المیسر (game of hazard) is derived from یسر i.e. he became docile and submissive. یسرت المرأة means, the woman was easily delivered of the child. ایسرالرجل means, the man became well off. یسرفلان means, such a one played a game of hazard or a game of chance, i.e. he gambled. Thus the primary meaning of the word is to get a thing easily and thereby become well off. A game of chance or a game of hazard is called میسر because by means of such games people seek to become rich easily and quickly without undergoing the trouble of earning with work and labour. The word المیسر is used to indicate (1) any game of hazard or game of chance; (2) a game of hazard played by the Arabs with headless arrows; (3) play for stakes and wages (Lisan & Mufradat).
اثم (sin) is the noun-infinitive from اثم meaning, he did what was unlawful. اثم means: (1) that which is unlawful (Aqrab); (2) that which keeps back a person from what is good (Mufradat); (3) punishment of sins and evil actions (Lane).
عفو (spare) is derived from عفا. They say عفا الشیء i.e. the thing became long and abundant. عفو means: (1) what exceeds or remains over and above one’s requirements. (2) the best portion of a thing (Aqrab).
Commentary:
While dealing with the subject of war, the Quran fittingly turns to the subject of wine and gambling which are directly related to war.
It was customary among Arabs in times of war to cast lots in the name of a few wealthy persons, and those in whose name the lots were drawn were bound to feed the army and supply it with wine. This is how the Arabs defrayed the expenses of war. So when Muslims were called upon to take arms, they naturally enquired of the Holy Prophet about the legality of this peculiar way of meeting the expenses of war and about the use of wine also, which was considered essential to produce a state of reckless courage in the fighters so as to make them blind to all consequences. Islam declared both these practices unlawful because their harm was greater than their advantage. The conviction of faith hadinfused into the hearts of believers far greater and nobler courage than the blind daring engendered by drinking. Similarly, the expenses of war were to be met in a fairer and more respectable manner than the casting of lots. The burden must fall on all according to their means and must come through willing and eager contributions by the faithful.
The clause, their sin is greater than their advantage, embodies a very important principle. A thing should not be adopted simply because it contains some advantage nor should a thing be condemned simply because it is harmful in certain respects. On the contrary, both sides should be carefully weighed and a thing should be condemned only if its harm outweighs its advantage. It is in fact a great characteristic of Islam that it never condemns a thing wholesale but frankly and freely admits even the smallest good that may be found in it. Islam prohibits certain things not because it considers them to be devoid of all good, for there is nothing in the world which is wholly bad, but because their evil outweighs their good. This is why, while prohibiting the use of intoxicants and games of chance because of their great harm, Islam has not failed to acknowledge the few advantages they possess.
It is worthy of note that of all religions, Islam alone has forbidden the use of wine. In Hinduism, drinking forms an essential part of certain religious ceremonies. Judaism does not seem to prohibit drinking, because nowhere has the Bible declared it to be unlawful; while according to the New Testament, the very first miracle which Jesus showed was that he turned water into wine for the use of a marriage party (John 2:7-9).
Attempts have been made during the ages by social reformers, and even the help of legislation has been enlisted in some countries, to put an end to wine-drinking. But all such attempts have so far failed. The only experiment on record which met with complete success in this direction was that made in Arabia more than thirteen hundred years ago. A whole people steeped in drinking became absolute teetotallers by the mere declaration by the Prophet that God had forbidden drinking. This constitutes no small testimony to the great hold that Islam had come to possess on the minds of the unlettered and unruly Arabs, and to the wonderful transformation it had brought about in their lives.
From the meaning of the word خمر (wine) as given above under Important Words it should not be understood that Islam prohibits the use of only such quantity of wine as may make one drunk. The Holy Prophet has made it definitely clear that even small doses of such things as may intoxicate one when used in larger doses are unlawful (Tirmidhi).
When the principal means hitherto employed in Arabia for meeting the expenses of war, i.e. by casting lots, was prohibited, the question naturally arose as to how the expenses of war were to be met. Believers, realizing that they would themselves have to meet these expenses, hastened to inquire of the Holy Prophet as to how much they would have to contribute towards the expenses of war. In reply to their query they were told that they should spend عفو i.e. what may be spared after meeting the necessities of life. The word عفو by virtue of its twofold connotation, given under Important Words above, applies to two different classes of persons. Ordinary believers are required to spend what remains after their needs have been met, i.e. what they can spare; and the higher class of believers are expected to go ahead and spend the best portion of their possessions. If, however, the clause be applied collectively to all believers, it would mean, that in times of war, they should retain for themselves only such portion of their possessions as may suffice to meet their bare necessities of life. The balance should be spent in the cause of God. This is what God wanted them to do. Actually, however, some of the Companions spent even more than that. For instance, when the Holy Prophet appealed for funds for the campaign of Tabuk, Abu Bakr brought his entire possessions and laid them at the feet of his Master. When asked how much he had retained for himself and his family and how much he had brought to be spent in Allah’s cause, Abu Bakr replied that he had brought all that he possessed and that nothing remained in his house except the name of Allah (Tirmidhi, ch. on Manaqib & Zurqani).
Finally, a word about the sin or harm of wine and gambling, as mentioned in the verse under comment, appears to be called for. Though Islam was the first to prohibit the use of intoxicants and games of chance, the world now appears to be agreed on condemning these two evils which so deeply affect not only the physical but also the moral and spiritual condition of man. Here are some quotations in which non-Muslim writers have forcefully pointed out the harmful effects of wine:
(1) "Alcoholism is an important factor in the causation of disease; and in all diseases alcoholics are bad patients. In epidemics the mortality among drinkers is excessive; and the general power of resistance to disease, injury, and fatigue is diminished…Alcoholism lessens the chance of life; the English life-insurance companies found that the presumptive length of life of non-drinkers was about twice that of drinkers…The close relationship of alcoholism and crime is well known and the statistics of Baer, Kurella, Gallavardin and Sichart show that from 25 to 85 per cent of all malefactors are drunkards. The rate of suicide varies with the general rate of consumption of alcohol in different countries…
"The evil effects of alcoholism are evident in the drunkard’s posterity…Epilepsy, insanity, idiocy and various forms of physical, mental, and moral degeneracy are very disproportionately prevalent among the offsprings of alcoholics" (Jew. Enc. i. 333-334).
(2) "The effects of consumption of alcohol are almost all due to its action upon the nervous system. Thus the immediate sensation of well-being is due to the flushing of the skin, suppressing temporarily the sense of chill, and to the fact that the sensibility to minor pains and inconveniences becomes blunted; whilst with larger doses the diminution of the power of self-control and sense of personal responsibility gives rise to excitability. In the secondary stage the fineness of the senses (hearing, touch, taste and vision) is affected, and this gives rise to an inability to control bodily movements such as facial expression. In the advanced stage of drunkenness, the intellectual processes of judgement and control are suspended." (Enc. Brit. 14th Edition, i. 540).
(3) "Alcohol is a poison for protoplasm, that is, for the soft plastic material which is the essential constituent of every one of the minute cells that make up living organisms, whether animal or vegetable. Its poisonous effect in very dilute solution is easily shown on lowly organisms…
"The nerve cells of the brain, the most highly organised and delicate of the tissues, very early show the effect of alcohol. Many of the test observers of their own mental processes, such as Helmholtz and Huxley, have expressed themselves strongly as to the harmful effect of minute doses of alcohol on brain work. It would seem that the 'stimulating' effect is really due to the paralysis of the very highest nerve-centres, so that cheerfulness, wit, and recklessness have free play. Large numbers of psychometric experiments under conditions of the greatest accuracy prove that alcohol, in small dietetic doses, exercises a distinctly paralysing effect on the working of the brain. Some mental processes are quickened for a short time, and then a retarding effect shows itself, which is prolonged and much more than cancels the apparent beneficial result…
"There is universal testimony as to the close relationship between excessive drinking and breaches of the moral law and the law of the State. This is a direct consequence of the paralysis of the higher faculties, intellectual and moral, and the resulting free play given to the lower inclinations" (Enc. Rel. Eth, i. 299-301).
As to the harm caused by gambling the following quotation would suffice:
"The vicious tendency of gambling has never been called in question. Lord Beaconsfield spoke of it as 'a vast engine of national demoralization'…In 12 years (1895-6 to 1906-7) there were 156 suicides or attempted suicides in England assigned to this cause, as well as 719 cases of theft or embezzlement and 442 bankruptcies. In view of these facts, it is not surprising that, in all civilized countries, gambling is subjected to definite legislative restraints…It is, as Herbert Spencer says, a kind of action by which pleasure is obtained at the cost of pain to another. The happiness of the winner implies the misery of the loser. This kind of action, therefore, is essentially anti-social; it sears the sympathies, cultivates a hard egoism, and so produces a general deterioration of character. It is a habit intrinsically savage…In an atmosphere of brotherhood no form of gambling could exist…But the immorality of gambling may be argued on higher grounds than a calculation of pleasure.
"(a) Every gambling transaction involves a transfer of property in one shape or another. When the gambler is asked why he stakes his money on a game or a race, his reply is, 'To add an interest to the game'. The interest thus added is, simply stated, the interest of acquisition. If the real object were, as is claimed, merely the sport and the excitement, then men might just as well wager counters, or, for the matter of that, agree to hand over all winnings to public charities. But this is not done. The transfer of property, in one shape or another, is essential to the act. There are only three ways in which property can be legitimately acquired—by gift, by labour, and by exchange. Gambling stands outside all of these.
"(b) Its motive is, however, carefully disguised covetousness. It is an attempt to get property without paying the price for it. It is a violation of the law of equivalents. It is a kind of robbery by mutual agreement; but it is still robbery, just as duelling, which is murder by mutual agreement, is still treated as murder. It is begotten of covetousness; it leads to idleness.
"(c) It is, moreover, an appeal to chance. If in any contest skill comes in, odds are given or handicaps arranged so as to equalize the chances as far as possible. To make chance the arbiter of conduct is to subvert the moral order and stability of life.
"(d) It concentrates attention upon lucre, and thereby withdraws attention from worthier objects of life" (Enc. Rel. Eth. vi. pp. 165-166).
b
5:91, 92.
160
خَمَرَالشَّیْءَ (Khamarash-Shai’a) 意指, 他掩藏或遮盖或隐瞒了这事情。酒被称为 خَمْر (Khamr) 因为它遮盖、隐藏或影响才智或理性, 或因为它搅昏和刺激头脑, 以致使它失去了控制能力。这词特别用来指由葡萄配制的酒, 也指一切麻醉品 (Lane)。 “酒精中毒是导致疾病的一个重要因素; 而在所有的疾病中, 饮酒过度的人是糟糕的病人。在流行病中, 饮酒人中间的死亡率特别高, 而对疾病、损伤和疲劳的一般的抵抗能力也被减少……。酒精中毒还减少长寿的可能性; 英国人寿保险公司发现, 据调查, 不饮酒者的寿命大约比饮酒的人长一倍。酒精中毒和犯罪的密切联系是众所周知的; 而贝尔 (Baer)、库雷拉 (Kurella) 和加拉符尔丁 (Gallavardin) 及锡卡尔特 (Sichart) 的统计资料表明, 所有犯罪分子中有25%到85%是酒鬼。……酒精中毒的不良后果在酒鬼的后代中是明显的……羊痫疯、精神病、白痴以及各种形式的肉体的、精神的和道德的衰退, 很不均衡地流行于过量饮酒者的后代中。” (Jew. Enc.) “饮酒所造成的影响几乎完全来自它对神经系统的干扰作用, 当进入酗酒的严重状况时, 将出现理性与判断力中止的现象。” (Enc. Brit.)。“至于过量饮酒者与违反道德规范及国家法律之间的密切联系则受到普遍的证明。这是理智的和道德的高级官能机构瘫痪的直接后果, 从而使各种低级的爱好得到放任。” (Enc. Rel. Eth.)
161
اَيْسَرَالرَّجُلُ (Aisarar-Rajulu) 的意思是, 人变得富裕。مَيْسَرْ (Maisar) 之所以如此称谓是因为赌徒力求迅速而容易地致富而不想操一操心, 以艰苦的劳动来获得财富; “赌博的这种邪恶的倾向从来没有受到怀疑。实质上, 这是对社会有害的: 它使同情心凋谢, 助长自私自利因而产生在品格上的全面坠落。这是一种内在的野蛮的习性……。其动机是仔细掩盖起来的贪婪。这是一种妄想得到财富而付出代价的企图。这是违背对称规律的。这是一种双方合同的掠夺, 正像双方的决斗, 是互相协定的彼此凶杀。它由贪婪而引起, 导致懒散。此外它还向运气求援。为了碰运气, 行为的主宰准备破坏道德秩序和生活的稳定。它全神贯注于钱财上, 而由此失去对人生目的更有价值的注意力” (Enc. Rel. Eth.)。
162
伊斯兰教的特点是决不全面谴责一件事, 但大方而直率地承认哪怕在这件事内可能发现的最小的善举。伊斯兰教禁止某些事情并不是认为它们一无是处, 而是它们的损害要超过它们的益处, 因为世界上不存在完全无益的东西。由于麻醉物和投机这种玩艺儿有极大的危害而加以禁止, 另一方面并没有不承认它们具有少量益处。
163
عَفْو (‘Afw) 的意思是, (a) 超出或高于所需要的; 而所花费的不致使给予的人发生困苦; (b) 一件东西中的最好部分; (c) 不被要求的给予 (اَقْرَبْ)。一般信者必须花费他们自己的合理需要满足之后的剩余部分, 而期望那些高级的信者花费他们的财产的最好部份。可是, 假如这款项是为了全体信者集体使用的, 那就意味着在战争时期他们只应当给自己保留一分还可勉强满足生活之需的财产。
3
اِثْمٌ کے معنے گناہ کے ہیں اور کبھی گناہ کی سزا کے معنوں میں بھی استعمال ہوتا ہے۔ قرآن کریم میں ہے۔ وَمَنْ یَّفْعَلْ ذٰلِکَ یَلْقَ اَثَامًا (فرقان: ۶۹) یعنی اپنے گناہ کی سزا بھگتے گا۔ ان معنوں کو مدِّنظر رکھتے ہوئے گناہ اور نقصان کے معنے کیے گئے ہیں۔ لیکن ’’اور نقصان‘‘ کے لفظوں کو خطوط وحدانی میں لکھ دیا گیا ہے۔
اسی طرح اِثْمٌ کے معنے نیکیوں سے روکنے کے ہیں (مفردات) پس اس کے یہ معنے بھی ہو سکتے ہیں کہ ان افعال کے نتیجہ میں نیکیوں سے محرومی ان کے منافع سے زیادہ ہے۔ یہ معنے گو ترجمہ کے لحاظ سے مشکل ہیں لیکن تفسیر کے لحاظ سے بہت اعلیٰ ہیں کیونکہ حقیقت
4
عَفْو کے تین معنے ہوتے ہیں۔ (۱) خِیَارُ الشَّیْئِ وَاَطْیَبُہٗ یعنی سب سے اچھی اور پاکیزہ شے (۲) مَایَفْضُلُ عَنِ النَّفَقَۃِ وَلَاعُسْرَ عَلٰی صَاحِبِہٖ فِیْ اِعْطَآئِہٖ جو اپنے ضروری خرچ سے بچ جائے اور دینے والے کو اس کے دینے سے تکلیف نہ پہنچے (۳) یُقَالُ اَعْطَیْتُہٗ عَفْوَ الْمَالِ اَیْ بِغَیْرِ مَسْأَلَۃٍ یعنی عفو کے معنے بغیر مانگے دینے کے بھی ہوتے ہیں (اقرب) پہلے بھی ایسا ہی سوال گزر چکا ہے اور وہاں جواب دیا تھا کہ جو بھی حلال و طیب مال خرچ کرو مناسب ہے۔ وہاں اقسام صدقہ کے متعلق سوال تھا۔ یہاں کَمیّت کے متعلق سوال ہے یعنی کتنا دے؟ سو اس
a
5:91, 92.
226
Important Words:
الخمر (wine) is the noun-infinitive from خمر. They say خمر الشیء meaning, he veiled or covered up the thing. خمرالشھادة means, he concealed the evidence. خمرالعجین means, he leavened the dough and left it till it became well fermented. خامره means, it became mixed or blended with it; it infected or pervaded it. A veil worn by a woman is called خمار because it screens or covers her face and head. Wine is called خمر because it covers or obscures or infects the intellect or the senses, or because it agitates and excites the brain so as to make it uncontrolled. The word is specific for wine prepared from grapes but is also used generally (Aqrab & Lane).
المیسر (game of hazard) is derived from یسر i.e. he became docile and submissive. یسرت المرأة means, the woman was easily delivered of the child. ایسرالرجل means, the man became well off. یسرفلان means, such a one played a game of hazard or a game of chance, i.e. he gambled. Thus the primary meaning of the word is to get a thing easily and thereby become well off. A game of chance or a game of hazard is called میسر because by means of such games people seek to become rich easily and quickly without undergoing the trouble of earning with work and labour. The word المیسر is used to indicate (1) any game of hazard or game of chance; (2) a game of hazard played by the Arabs with headless arrows; (3) play for stakes and wages (Lisan & Mufradat).
اثم (sin) is the noun-infinitive from اثم meaning, he did what was unlawful. اثم means: (1) that which is unlawful (Aqrab); (2) that which keeps back a person from what is good (Mufradat); (3) punishment of sins and evil actions (Lane).
عفو (spare) is derived from عفا. They say عفا الشیء i.e. the thing became long and abundant. عفو means: (1) what exceeds or remains over and above one’s requirements. (2) the best portion of a thing (Aqrab).
Commentary:
While dealing with the subject of war, the Quran fittingly turns to the subject of wine and gambling which are directly related to war.
It was customary among Arabs in times of war to cast lots in the name of a few wealthy persons, and those in whose name the lots were drawn were bound to feed the army and supply it with wine. This is how the Arabs defrayed the expenses of war. So when Muslims were called upon to take arms, they naturally enquired of the Holy Prophet about the legality of this peculiar way of meeting the expenses of war and about the use of wine also, which was considered essential to produce a state of reckless courage in the fighters so as to make them blind to all consequences. Islam declared both these practices unlawful because their harm was greater than their advantage. The conviction of faith hadinfused into the hearts of believers far greater and nobler courage than the blind daring engendered by drinking. Similarly, the expenses of war were to be met in a fairer and more respectable manner than the casting of lots. The burden must fall on all according to their means and must come through willing and eager contributions by the faithful.
The clause, their sin is greater than their advantage, embodies a very important principle. A thing should not be adopted simply because it contains some advantage nor should a thing be condemned simply because it is harmful in certain respects. On the contrary, both sides should be carefully weighed and a thing should be condemned only if its harm outweighs its advantage. It is in fact a great characteristic of Islam that it never condemns a thing wholesale but frankly and freely admits even the smallest good that may be found in it. Islam prohibits certain things not because it considers them to be devoid of all good, for there is nothing in the world which is wholly bad, but because their evil outweighs their good. This is why, while prohibiting the use of intoxicants and games of chance because of their great harm, Islam has not failed to acknowledge the few advantages they possess.
It is worthy of note that of all religions, Islam alone has forbidden the use of wine. In Hinduism, drinking forms an essential part of certain religious ceremonies. Judaism does not seem to prohibit drinking, because nowhere has the Bible declared it to be unlawful; while according to the New Testament, the very first miracle which Jesus showed was that he turned water into wine for the use of a marriage party (John 2:7-9).
Attempts have been made during the ages by social reformers, and even the help of legislation has been enlisted in some countries, to put an end to wine-drinking. But all such attempts have so far failed. The only experiment on record which met with complete success in this direction was that made in Arabia more than thirteen hundred years ago. A whole people steeped in drinking became absolute teetotallers by the mere declaration by the Prophet that God had forbidden drinking. This constitutes no small testimony to the great hold that Islam had come to possess on the minds of the unlettered and unruly Arabs, and to the wonderful transformation it had brought about in their lives.
From the meaning of the word خمر (wine) as given above under Important Words it should not be understood that Islam prohibits the use of only such quantity of wine as may make one drunk. The Holy Prophet has made it definitely clear that even small doses of such things as may intoxicate one when used in larger doses are unlawful (Tirmidhi).
When the principal means hitherto employed in Arabia for meeting the expenses of war, i.e. by casting lots, was prohibited, the question naturally arose as to how the expenses of war were to be met. Believers, realizing that they would themselves have to meet these expenses, hastened to inquire of the Holy Prophet as to how much they would have to contribute towards the expenses of war. In reply to their query they were told that they should spend عفو i.e. what may be spared after meeting the necessities of life. The word عفو by virtue of its twofold connotation, given under Important Words above, applies to two different classes of persons. Ordinary believers are required to spend what remains after their needs have been met, i.e. what they can spare; and the higher class of believers are expected to go ahead and spend the best portion of their possessions. If, however, the clause be applied collectively to all believers, it would mean, that in times of war, they should retain for themselves only such portion of their possessions as may suffice to meet their bare necessities of life. The balance should be spent in the cause of God. This is what God wanted them to do. Actually, however, some of the Companions spent even more than that. For instance, when the Holy Prophet appealed for funds for the campaign of Tabuk, Abu Bakr brought his entire possessions and laid them at the feet of his Master. When asked how much he had retained for himself and his family and how much he had brought to be spent in Allah’s cause, Abu Bakr replied that he had brought all that he possessed and that nothing remained in his house except the name of Allah (Tirmidhi, ch. on Manaqib & Zurqani).
Finally, a word about the sin or harm of wine and gambling, as mentioned in the verse under comment, appears to be called for. Though Islam was the first to prohibit the use of intoxicants and games of chance, the world now appears to be agreed on condemning these two evils which so deeply affect not only the physical but also the moral and spiritual condition of man. Here are some quotations in which non-Muslim writers have forcefully pointed out the harmful effects of wine:
(1) "Alcoholism is an important factor in the causation of disease; and in all diseases alcoholics are bad patients. In epidemics the mortality among drinkers is excessive; and the general power of resistance to disease, injury, and fatigue is diminished…Alcoholism lessens the chance of life; the English life-insurance companies found that the presumptive length of life of non-drinkers was about twice that of drinkers…The close relationship of alcoholism and crime is well known and the statistics of Baer, Kurella, Gallavardin and Sichart show that from 25 to 85 per cent of all malefactors are drunkards. The rate of suicide varies with the general rate of consumption of alcohol in different countries…
"The evil effects of alcoholism are evident in the drunkard’s posterity…Epilepsy, insanity, idiocy and various forms of physical, mental, and moral degeneracy are very disproportionately prevalent among the offsprings of alcoholics" (Jew. Enc. i. 333-334).
(2) "The effects of consumption of alcohol are almost all due to its action upon the nervous system. Thus the immediate sensation of well-being is due to the flushing of the skin, suppressing temporarily the sense of chill, and to the fact that the sensibility to minor pains and inconveniences becomes blunted; whilst with larger doses the diminution of the power of self-control and sense of personal responsibility gives rise to excitability. In the secondary stage the fineness of the senses (hearing, touch, taste and vision) is affected, and this gives rise to an inability to control bodily movements such as facial expression. In the advanced stage of drunkenness, the intellectual processes of judgement and control are suspended." (Enc. Brit. 14th Edition, i. 540).
(3) "Alcohol is a poison for protoplasm, that is, for the soft plastic material which is the essential constituent of every one of the minute cells that make up living organisms, whether animal or vegetable. Its poisonous effect in very dilute solution is easily shown on lowly organisms…
"The nerve cells of the brain, the most highly organised and delicate of the tissues, very early show the effect of alcohol. Many of the test observers of their own mental processes, such as Helmholtz and Huxley, have expressed themselves strongly as to the harmful effect of minute doses of alcohol on brain work. It would seem that the 'stimulating' effect is really due to the paralysis of the very highest nerve-centres, so that cheerfulness, wit, and recklessness have free play. Large numbers of psychometric experiments under conditions of the greatest accuracy prove that alcohol, in small dietetic doses, exercises a distinctly paralysing effect on the working of the brain. Some mental processes are quickened for a short time, and then a retarding effect shows itself, which is prolonged and much more than cancels the apparent beneficial result…
"There is universal testimony as to the close relationship between excessive drinking and breaches of the moral law and the law of the State. This is a direct consequence of the paralysis of the higher faculties, intellectual and moral, and the resulting free play given to the lower inclinations" (Enc. Rel. Eth, i. 299-301).
As to the harm caused by gambling the following quotation would suffice:
"The vicious tendency of gambling has never been called in question. Lord Beaconsfield spoke of it as 'a vast engine of national demoralization'…In 12 years (1895-6 to 1906-7) there were 156 suicides or attempted suicides in England assigned to this cause, as well as 719 cases of theft or embezzlement and 442 bankruptcies. In view of these facts, it is not surprising that, in all civilized countries, gambling is subjected to definite legislative restraints…It is, as Herbert Spencer says, a kind of action by which pleasure is obtained at the cost of pain to another. The happiness of the winner implies the misery of the loser. This kind of action, therefore, is essentially anti-social; it sears the sympathies, cultivates a hard egoism, and so produces a general deterioration of character. It is a habit intrinsically savage…In an atmosphere of brotherhood no form of gambling could exist…But the immorality of gambling may be argued on higher grounds than a calculation of pleasure.
"(a) Every gambling transaction involves a transfer of property in one shape or another. When the gambler is asked why he stakes his money on a game or a race, his reply is, 'To add an interest to the game'. The interest thus added is, simply stated, the interest of acquisition. If the real object were, as is claimed, merely the sport and the excitement, then men might just as well wager counters, or, for the matter of that, agree to hand over all winnings to public charities. But this is not done. The transfer of property, in one shape or another, is essential to the act. There are only three ways in which property can be legitimately acquired—by gift, by labour, and by exchange. Gambling stands outside all of these.
"(b) Its motive is, however, carefully disguised covetousness. It is an attempt to get property without paying the price for it. It is a violation of the law of equivalents. It is a kind of robbery by mutual agreement; but it is still robbery, just as duelling, which is murder by mutual agreement, is still treated as murder. It is begotten of covetousness; it leads to idleness.
"(c) It is, moreover, an appeal to chance. If in any contest skill comes in, odds are given or handicaps arranged so as to equalize the chances as far as possible. To make chance the arbiter of conduct is to subvert the moral order and stability of life.
"(d) It concentrates attention upon lucre, and thereby withdraws attention from worthier objects of life" (Enc. Rel. Eth. vi. pp. 165-166).
e
5:91, 92.
261
Khamarush-Shai’a means, he veiled or covered up or concealed the thing. Wine is called Khamr because it covers or obscures or affects the intellect or the senses, or because it agitates and excites the brain so as to make it lose its power of control. The word is specifically used for wine prepared from grapes but signifies all intoxicants (Lane). "Alcoholism is an important factor in the causation of disease; and in all diseases alcoholics are bad patients. In epidemics the mortality among drinkers is excessive; and the general power of resistance to disease, injury, and fatigue is diminished.....Alcoholism lessens the chance of life; the English life-insurance companies found that the presumptive length of life of non-drinkers was about twice that of drinkers. The close relationship of alcoholism and crime is well- known; and the statistics of Baer, Kurella and Gallavardin and Sichart show that from 25 to 85 per cent of all malefactors are drunkards... "The evil effects of alcoholism are
262
Aisarar-Rajulu means, man became well off. Maisar is so called because the gambler seeks to become rich quickly and easily without undergoing the trouble of earning wealth by hard work. "The vicious tendency of gambling has never been called in question. It is essentially anti-social; it sears the sympathies, cultivates hard egoism and so produces a general deterioration of character. It is a habit intrinsically savage....Its motive is carefully disguised covetousness. It is an attempt to get property without paying the price for it. It is a violation of the law of equivalents. It is a kind of robbery by mutual agreement just as duelling which is murder by mutual agreement. It is begotten of covetousness; it leads to idleness. It is, moreover, an appeal to chance. To make chance the arbiter of conduct is to subvert the moral order and stability of life. It concentrates attention upon lucre and thereby withdraws attention from worthier objects of life" (Enc. Rel. Eth.).
263
Ithm means, sin; punishment of sin; the harm that might result from sin (Lane).
264
It is characteristic of Islam that it never condemns a thing wholesale but freely and frankly admits even the smallest good that may be found in it. Islam prohibits certain things not because it considers them to be devoid of all good, for there is nothing in the world, which is wholly bad, but because their evil outweighs their good. While prohibiting the use of intoxicants and games of chance because of their great harm, Islam has not failed to acknowledge the few advantages they possess.
265
‘Afw means, (a) what exceeds or remains over and above one’s requirements, and the spending of what does not cause hardship to the giver; (b) the best portion of a thing; (c) giving without being asked (Aqrab). Ordinary believers are required to spend what remains after their own legitimate needs have been met, and the higher class of believers are expected to spend the best portion of their possessions. If, however, the clause be applied collectively to all believers, it would mean that in times of war they should retain for themselves only such portion of their possessions as may suffice to meet their bare necessities of life.
لِّلَّذِينَ يُؤْلُونَ مِن نِّسَآئِهِمْ تَرَبُّصُ أَرْبَعَةِ أَشْهُرٍ ۖ فَإِن فَآءُو فَإِنَّ ٱللَّهَ غَفُورٌ رَّحِيمٌ
在述及立誓的那两节开头和插入的经文之后, «古兰经» 现在又回到夫妻关系的原题上来。这节经文谈到那些立誓要与自己妻子离异的人, 但实际上还没有同她们离婚 。有趣的是, 在谈到离婚的这一论题时可以看到, «古兰经» 先谈月经 (2:223), 这是一种暂时的和不完全的然而不是真正的分离, 然后 (像在这节经文中) 它谈及真正的然而是尚未完全肯定的分离。然后, 在随后的几节经文中谈及真正的然而是可撤回的离婚。最后, (2:231) 它谈及不可撤回的离婚。伊斯兰教认识并且坚持认为离婚必然是一种不好的事情, 在离婚的道路上确实巧妙地安排了尽可能多的一系列障碍。伊斯兰教给予一个立誓不再接近他妻子的人至多四个月的时间。在这段时间里, 他必须或者同妻子和解, 恢复夫妻关系, 或者双方实行离异。伊斯兰教绝不容许不离婚而无限期分离, 使那个女人好像是 “悬挂在那里。” اِيْلَاء (Ila’) 意指离异的誓言。根据这种誓言, 一个女人在那 “愚昧的时代” 处于一种悬挂的状态。她既不能嫁别人, 又不能和她的丈夫有夫妻关系。
اِیْـلَا ءً: اٰلٰی یُؤْلِیْ اِیْلَا ءً: قسم کھانا۔ یہ اَ لَا سے نکلا ہے جس کے معنے کسی کام میں کمی یا تاخیر کرنے کے ہیں اور اِیْـلَا ء قرآن کریم کے محاورہ میں اس قسم کو کہتے ہیں جو اس بات پر کھائی جائے کہ مرد اپنی بیوی سے کوئی تعلق نہ رکھے گا (مفردات) چونکہ اس قسم میں عورت کے حق کا اتلاف ہے اس لئے اسے اِیْـلَا ء کہا گیا۔
(۴) فَاءَ یَفِیْءُ فَـیْـئًا: لوٹ آیا۔ فَاءَ الْاَمْرَ رَجَعَ اِلَیْہِ: اس بات کی طرف لوٹ آیا (اقرب) فَاءَ کا لفظ نیک امور کی طرف لوٹنے کے متعلق استعمال ہوتا ہے (مفردات) اصل میں اس کے معنے تعاون اور امداد باہمی کے لئے ایک دوسرے کے ساتھ مل کر کام کرنے کے ہوتے ہیں اور سایہ کو بھی فَیْئٌ کہتے ہیں کیونکہ وہ سورج کے ساتھ اِدھر سے اُدھر ہوتا رہتا ہے۔ ان دونوں معنوں کو مدِّنظر رکھتے ہوئے فَاءَ بالعموم اچھے معنوں میں استعمال ہونے لگا ہے۔
عرب میں یہ رواج تھا کہ بعض لوگ اپنی بیویوں کو طلاق تو نہ دیتے مگر قسم کھا لیتے تھے کہ ہم ان سے تعلق نہیں رکھیں گے۔ اس
After the two introductory and intervening verses in which the subject of taking oaths has been dealt with, the Qur’an now reverts to the original subject of conjugal relations. The verse speaks of those men who vow abstinence from their wives without actually divorcing them. It is, interesting to note that while approaching the subject of divorce, the Qur’an first speaks of menstruation (2:223) which is a sort of temporary and partial, though unreal, separation. Then (as in the present verse), it speaks of real though indefinite separation. And then, in the succeeding verses, it speaks of real though revocable divorce. And finally (2:231) it speaks of irrevocable divorce. A really wonderful order designed to put as many obstacles as possible in the way of divorce, which Islam recognizes and retains as a sort of necessary evil. Islam allows four months at the most to a person who swears not to approach his wife. During this period, he must either get reconciled to his wife and restore conjugal relation
Important Words:
یؤلون (vow) is derived from the root لاآ meaning, he fell short; or he fell short of doing what he ought to have done; or he was remiss. آلی means, he swore. آلیت علی الشیء means, I swore to do the thing. آلیت لا افعل کذا means, I swore that I would not do such a thing. آلی من زوجه شھرا means, he swore he would not go near his wife (i.e. not go in unto her) for a month. ائتلی also gives the same meaning as آلی i.e. he swore, as in 24:23. ایلاء means, an oath or the act of swearing; and technically it means, a vow taken by a husband not to go near his wife (Aqrab & Lane).
تربص (waiting) is derived from ربص. They say ربص به i.e. he waited for a good or an evil to befall him. تربص means, he waited or he awaited, or he tarried waiting. تربص عن الامر means, he remained waiting and did not do the thing, i.e. he abstained from doing it (Aqrab).
Commentary:
After the two introductory and intervening verses in which the subject of taking oaths has been dealt with, the Quran now reverts to the original subject of conjugal relations. The verse under comment speaks of those men who vow abstinence from their wives without actually divorcing them. It is, in this connection, interesting to note that while approaching the subject of divorce, dealt with in the succeeding verses, the Quran first speaks of menstruation (2:223) which is a sort of temporary and partial, though unreal, separation. Then (as in the present verse) it speaks of real though indefinite separation. And then, as in the succeeding verses, it speaks of real though revocable divorce. And finally (2:231) it speaks of irrevocable divorce. A really wonderful order designed to put as many obstacles as possible in the way of divorce which Islam recognizes and retains as a sort of necessary evil.
As clearly stated in the verse under comment, Islam allows four months at the most to a person who swears not to approach his wife. During this period, he must either get reconciled to his wife and restore conjugal relations, or separation will be effected between the two. Islam would in no case permit indefinite separation without divorce, leaving the woman "suspended" as it were.
The words if they go back from the vow, surely Allah is Most Forgiving, Merciful indicate that swearing abstinence from one’s wife is reprehensible in the sight of God Who loves to see reconciliation between husband and wife. The verse thus abolishes the custom of ایلاءwhich was prevalent among the Arabs before the advent of Islam and by which it was sought to deprive women of their conjugal rights for long and indefinite periods.
165
在述及立誓的那两节开头和插入的经文之后, «古兰经» 现在又回到夫妻关系的原题上来。这节经文谈到那些立誓要与自己妻子离异的人, 但实际上还没有同她们离婚 。有趣的是, 在谈到离婚的这一论题时可以看到, «古兰经» 先谈月经 (2:223), 这是一种暂时的和不完全的然而不是真正的分离, 然后 (像在这节经文中) 它谈及真正的然而是尚未完全肯定的分离。然后, 在随后的几节经文中谈及真正的然而是可撤回的离婚。最后, (2:231) 它谈及不可撤回的离婚。伊斯兰教认识并且坚持认为离婚必然是一种不好的事情, 在离婚的道路上确实巧妙地安排了尽可能多的一系列障碍。伊斯兰教给予一个立誓不再接近他妻子的人至多四个月的时间。在这段时间里, 他必须或者同妻子和解, 恢复夫妻关系, 或者双方实行离异。伊斯兰教绝不容许不离婚而无限期分离, 使那个女人好像是 “悬挂在那里。” اِيْلَاء (Ila’) 意指离异的誓言。根据这种誓言, 一个女人在那 “愚昧的时代” 处于一种悬挂的状态。她既不能嫁别人, 又不能和她的丈夫有夫妻关系。
3
اِیْـلَا ءً: اٰلٰی یُؤْلِیْ اِیْلَا ءً: قسم کھانا۔ یہ اَ لَا سے نکلا ہے جس کے معنے کسی کام میں کمی یا تاخیر کرنے کے ہیں اور اِیْـلَا ء قرآن کریم کے محاورہ میں اس قسم کو کہتے ہیں جو اس بات پر کھائی جائے کہ مرد اپنی بیوی سے کوئی تعلق نہ رکھے گا (مفردات) چونکہ اس قسم میں عورت کے حق کا اتلاف ہے اس لئے اسے اِیْـلَا ء کہا گیا۔
4
(۴) فَاءَ یَفِیْءُ فَـیْـئًا: لوٹ آیا۔ فَاءَ الْاَمْرَ رَجَعَ اِلَیْہِ: اس بات کی طرف لوٹ آیا (اقرب) فَاءَ کا لفظ نیک امور کی طرف لوٹنے کے متعلق استعمال ہوتا ہے (مفردات) اصل میں اس کے معنے تعاون اور امداد باہمی کے لئے ایک دوسرے کے ساتھ مل کر کام کرنے کے ہوتے ہیں اور سایہ کو بھی فَیْئٌ کہتے ہیں کیونکہ وہ سورج کے ساتھ اِدھر سے اُدھر ہوتا رہتا ہے۔ ان دونوں معنوں کو مدِّنظر رکھتے ہوئے فَاءَ بالعموم اچھے معنوں میں استعمال ہونے لگا ہے۔
عرب میں یہ رواج تھا کہ بعض لوگ اپنی بیویوں کو طلاق تو نہ دیتے مگر قسم کھا لیتے تھے کہ ہم ان سے تعلق نہیں رکھیں گے۔ اس
233
Important Words:
یؤلون (vow) is derived from the root لاآ meaning, he fell short; or he fell short of doing what he ought to have done; or he was remiss. آلی means, he swore. آلیت علی الشیء means, I swore to do the thing. آلیت لا افعل کذا means, I swore that I would not do such a thing. آلی من زوجه شھرا means, he swore he would not go near his wife (i.e. not go in unto her) for a month. ائتلی also gives the same meaning as آلی i.e. he swore, as in 24:23. ایلاء means, an oath or the act of swearing; and technically it means, a vow taken by a husband not to go near his wife (Aqrab & Lane).
تربص (waiting) is derived from ربص. They say ربص به i.e. he waited for a good or an evil to befall him. تربص means, he waited or he awaited, or he tarried waiting. تربص عن الامر means, he remained waiting and did not do the thing, i.e. he abstained from doing it (Aqrab).
Commentary:
After the two introductory and intervening verses in which the subject of taking oaths has been dealt with, the Quran now reverts to the original subject of conjugal relations. The verse under comment speaks of those men who vow abstinence from their wives without actually divorcing them. It is, in this connection, interesting to note that while approaching the subject of divorce, dealt with in the succeeding verses, the Quran first speaks of menstruation (2:223) which is a sort of temporary and partial, though unreal, separation. Then (as in the present verse) it speaks of real though indefinite separation. And then, as in the succeeding verses, it speaks of real though revocable divorce. And finally (2:231) it speaks of irrevocable divorce. A really wonderful order designed to put as many obstacles as possible in the way of divorce which Islam recognizes and retains as a sort of necessary evil.
As clearly stated in the verse under comment, Islam allows four months at the most to a person who swears not to approach his wife. During this period, he must either get reconciled to his wife and restore conjugal relations, or separation will be effected between the two. Islam would in no case permit indefinite separation without divorce, leaving the woman "suspended" as it were.
The words if they go back from the vow, surely Allah is Most Forgiving, Merciful indicate that swearing abstinence from one’s wife is reprehensible in the sight of God Who loves to see reconciliation between husband and wife. The verse thus abolishes the custom of ایلاءwhich was prevalent among the Arabs before the advent of Islam and by which it was sought to deprive women of their conjugal rights for long and indefinite periods.
275
After the two introductory and intervening verses in which the subject of taking oaths has been dealt with, the Qur’an now reverts to the original subject of conjugal relations. The verse speaks of those men who vow abstinence from their wives without actually divorcing them. It is, interesting to note that while approaching the subject of divorce, the Qur’an first speaks of menstruation (2:223) which is a sort of temporary and partial, though unreal, separation. Then (as in the present verse), it speaks of real though indefinite separation. And then, in the succeeding verses, it speaks of real though revocable divorce. And finally (2:231) it speaks of irrevocable divorce. A really wonderful order designed to put as many obstacles as possible in the way of divorce, which Islam recognizes and retains as a sort of necessary evil. Islam allows four months at the most to a person who swears not to approach his wife. During this period, he must either get reconciled to his wife and restore conjugal relation
وَإِن طَلَّقْتُمُوهُنَّ مِن قَبْلِ أَن تَمَسُّوهُنَّ وَقَدْ فَرَضْتُمْ لَهُنَّ فَرِيضَةً فَنِصْفُ مَا فَرَضْتُمْ إِلَّآ أَن يَعْفُونَ أَوْ يَعْفُوَا۟ ٱلَّذِى بِيَدِهِۦ عُقْدَةُ ٱلنِّكَاحِ ۚ وَأَن تَعْفُوٓا۟ أَقْرَبُ لِلتَّقْوَىٰ ۚ وَلَا تَنسَوُا۟ ٱلْفَضْلَ بَيْنَكُمْ ۚ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ بِمَا تَعْمَلُونَ بَصِيرٌ
如果已定了聘礼但夫妻还没有同过房以前要离婚, 丈夫必须付出聘礼的一半。
“掌握婚约的人” 这几个字, 可以意指丈夫或离婚妇女的监护人, 因为婚后的婚约掌握在丈夫手中, 而婚前掌握在监护人手中。
يَعْفُ (Ya‘fu) 可以意指 “宽免或增加”。妻子 (或她的监护人) 可以给她的全部或部分聘礼, 或者丈夫可以多付些比他应该拿出来的聘礼。不过, 丈夫肯定要多付些聘礼以表示他比较慷慨。
یعنی خاوند یا بعض فقہاء کے نزدیک عورت کا وکیل۔ اِلَّا اَنْ یَّعْفُوْنَ سے یہ مراد ہے کہ یا تو عورتیں طلاق کے وقت اپنا نصف مہر اپنے خاوندوں کو معاف کردیں یا ان کے وکلاء معاف کر دیں۔ اور یَعْفُوَ الَّذِیْ بِیَدِہٖ عُقْدَۃُ النِّـکَاحِ سے اگر خاوند مراد لیا جائے تو آیت کے معنے یہ ہوں گے کہ خاوندنصف مہر کی بجائے پورا مہر دے دے۔ گویا اس جگہ پورا مہر دینے کا نام بھی عفو رکھا گیا ہے جیسا کہ قرآن کریم میں اللہ تعالیٰ فرماتا ہے کہ یَسْئَلُوْنَکَ مَاذَا یُنْفِقُوْنَ۔ قُلِ الْعَفْوَ (بقرۃ آیت۲۲۰) یعنی لوگ تجھ سے یہ پوچھتے ہیں کہ کیا خرچ کریں‘ تو کہہ دے جو تمہار
If the divorce occurs after the dowry has been fixed but before the husband has gone in unto his wife, the husband shall pay half of the fixed dowry.
The clause, he in whose hand is the tie of marriage, may signify either the husband or the guardian of the divorced woman, because whereas after marriage the tie of marriage is in the hands of the husband, before marriage the guardian of the woman holds it.
Ya‘fu may mean, "remits or increases." The wife (or her guardian) may remit the whole or a part of what is due to her, or the husband may pay more than what is due from him. But the husband is certainly desired to make a greater show of generosity.
Important Words:
یعفو (should remit) is derived from عفا meaning: (1) he gave more than what was due; or (2) he relinquished his right or remitted it in whole or in part (Taj). See also 2:220.
Commentary:
If the divorce occurs after the dowry has been fixed but before the husband has gone in unto his wife, the husband shall pay half of the fixed dowry. The clause, he in whose hand is the tie of marriage, may signify either the husband or the guardian of the divorced woman, because whereas after marriage the tie of marriage is in the hands of the husband, before marriage the guardian of the woman also holds it in his hands. In the former case, the word یعفو would mean that the husband should try to give more than half the dowry, or if he has already paid the whole dowry, he should try not to demand its return. If, however, the clause, he in whose hand is the tie of marriage, be considered to apply to the guardian of the divorced woman, the word یعفو would mean that he should try to remit or relinquish her right, i.e. he should, so far as possible, strive to give up, even that which he is entitled to receive on behalf of the divorced woman. But God certainly prefers that the husband should make a greater show of generosity.
This is how each party is exhorted to vie with the other in acting generously toward the other, the husband by paying more than what is obligatory on him, and the wife or her guardian by relinquishing what is due to her. If people truly inculcated such a spirit of sacrifice, the earth would indeed become a heaven.
The expression, And that you should remit is nearer to righteousness, applies to the husband particularly; but it may, in its broader significance, apply to all__husbands, wives and guardians.
184
如果已定了聘礼但夫妻还没有同过房以前要离婚, 丈夫必须付出聘礼的一半。
185
“掌握婚约的人” 这几个字, 可以意指丈夫或离婚妇女的监护人, 因为婚后的婚约掌握在丈夫手中, 而婚前掌握在监护人手中。
186
يَعْفُ (Ya‘fu) 可以意指 “宽免或增加”。妻子 (或她的监护人) 可以给她的全部或部分聘礼, 或者丈夫可以多付些比他应该拿出来的聘礼。不过, 丈夫肯定要多付些聘礼以表示他比较慷慨。
1
یعنی خاوند یا بعض فقہاء کے نزدیک عورت کا وکیل۔ اِلَّا اَنْ یَّعْفُوْنَ سے یہ مراد ہے کہ یا تو عورتیں طلاق کے وقت اپنا نصف مہر اپنے خاوندوں کو معاف کردیں یا ان کے وکلاء معاف کر دیں۔ اور یَعْفُوَ الَّذِیْ بِیَدِہٖ عُقْدَۃُ النِّـکَاحِ سے اگر خاوند مراد لیا جائے تو آیت کے معنے یہ ہوں گے کہ خاوندنصف مہر کی بجائے پورا مہر دے دے۔ گویا اس جگہ پورا مہر دینے کا نام بھی عفو رکھا گیا ہے جیسا کہ قرآن کریم میں اللہ تعالیٰ فرماتا ہے کہ یَسْئَلُوْنَکَ مَاذَا یُنْفِقُوْنَ۔ قُلِ الْعَفْوَ (بقرۃ آیت۲۲۰) یعنی لوگ تجھ سے یہ پوچھتے ہیں کہ کیا خرچ کریں‘ تو کہہ دے جو تمہار
244
Important Words:
یعفو (should remit) is derived from عفا meaning: (1) he gave more than what was due; or (2) he relinquished his right or remitted it in whole or in part (Taj). See also 2:220.
Commentary:
If the divorce occurs after the dowry has been fixed but before the husband has gone in unto his wife, the husband shall pay half of the fixed dowry. The clause, he in whose hand is the tie of marriage, may signify either the husband or the guardian of the divorced woman, because whereas after marriage the tie of marriage is in the hands of the husband, before marriage the guardian of the woman also holds it in his hands. In the former case, the word یعفو would mean that the husband should try to give more than half the dowry, or if he has already paid the whole dowry, he should try not to demand its return. If, however, the clause, he in whose hand is the tie of marriage, be considered to apply to the guardian of the divorced woman, the word یعفو would mean that he should try to remit or relinquish her right, i.e. he should, so far as possible, strive to give up, even that which he is entitled to receive on behalf of the divorced woman. But God certainly prefers that the husband should make a greater show of generosity.
This is how each party is exhorted to vie with the other in acting generously toward the other, the husband by paying more than what is obligatory on him, and the wife or her guardian by relinquishing what is due to her. If people truly inculcated such a spirit of sacrifice, the earth would indeed become a heaven.
The expression, And that you should remit is nearer to righteousness, applies to the husband particularly; but it may, in its broader significance, apply to all__husbands, wives and guardians.
293
If the divorce occurs after the dowry has been fixed but before the husband has gone in unto his wife, the husband shall pay half of the fixed dowry.
294
The clause, he in whose hand is the tie of marriage, may signify either the husband or the guardian of the divorced woman, because whereas after marriage the tie of marriage is in the hands of the husband, before marriage the guardian of the woman holds it.
294A
Ya‘fu may mean, "remits or increases." The wife (or her guardian) may remit the whole or a part of what is due to her, or the husband may pay more than what is due from him. But the husband is certainly desired to make a greater show of generosity.
وَٱلَّذِينَ يُتَوَفَّوْنَ مِنكُمْ وَيَذَرُونَ أَزْوَٰجًا وَصِيَّةً لِّأَزْوَٰجِهِم مَّتَٰعًا إِلَى ٱلْحَوْلِ غَيْرَ إِخْرَاجٍ ۚ فَإِنْ خَرَجْنَ فَلَا جُنَاحَ عَلَيْكُمْ فِى مَا فَعَلْنَ فِىٓ أَنفُسِهِنَّ مِن مَّعْرُوفٍ ۗ وَٱللَّهُ عَزِيزٌ حَكِيمٌ
وَصِیَّۃً مصدر ہے۔ اس کے پہلے یُوْصُوْنَ محذوف سمجھا جائے گا‘ یعنی وہ وصیت کر جائیں۔ مَتَاعًا دوسرا مصدر ہے۔ اس سے پہلے بھی اَنْ مَتِّعُوْھُنَّ محذوف ہے اور معنے یہ ہیں کہ یہ وصیت کر جائیں کہ بعد میں وہ لوگ جن کے ہاتھ میں وصیت کا اجرا ہے انہیں ایک سال تک فائدہ پہنچائیں۔ اس کے بعد غَیْرَ اِخْرَاجٍ کے الفاظ ہیں جو بدل ہیں متاع کا۔ پس معنے یہ ہوئے کہ فائدہ پہنچانے سے مراد ہماری یہ ہے کہ ان کو گھروں سے نہ نکالیں بلکہ باوجود اس کے کہ مکان کسی اور وارث کے حصہ میں آیا ہو بیویوں کو ایک سال تک اس میں رہنے کا حق حاصل رہے۔ اس کے یہ معنے نہیں کہ عورت خود بھی
مَعْرُوْف کے معنے قانون یا فطرت یا قومی رواج کے مطابق کے ہیں‘ یعنی جسے لوگ جانتے ہیں۔ اس جگہ اس کے معنے پسندیدہ کے اور بہتر کے ہیں۔ مطلب یہ ہے کہ خواہ عدت کے بعد عورتیں نکاح کریں خواہ اپنے والدین یا دوسرے رشتہ داروں کے ہاں چلی جائیں یا کوئی نوکری اختیار کریں تم پر کوئی اعتراض نہیں۔ اور اس حکم کے رو سے تمہیں نہیں چاہییٔ کہ انہیں روکو۔
2:235.
The period of waiting laid down for a widow in 2:235 is four months and ten days in which time she can, as of right, claim residence and maintenance from the heirs of her deceased husband. The period of one year mentioned here is only a concession or a favour for a widow in addition to her right of residence and maintenance mentioned in 2:235. The concession forms no part of her share in the inheritance, nor is it an obligatory injunction.
2:235.
Commentary:
The middle verses, which came in like the middle Prayer, having ended, the Quran reverts to the original subject of conjugal relations. The verse under comment is erroneously believed by some to have been abrogated by 2:235 and 4:13. Apart from the fact that the abrogation theory is based on lack of the knowledge of true teaching of the Quran, there is nothing in the verses referred to above which contradicts the provision contained in the present verse. The period of waiting laid down for a widow in 2:235 is four months and ten days in which time she can, as of right, claim residence and maintenance from the heirs of her deceased husband. The period of one year mentioned in the present verse has nothing to do with the above-mentioned period of waiting, as the words, but if they themselves go out, there shall be no blame upon you; clearly show. The present verse only contains a concession or a favour for a widow in addition to her right of residence and maintenance mentioned in 2:235. One year is about the time conveniently required by a widow for making suitable arrangements about her future. It is also the requisite time for a pregnant widow to be delivered of the child and relieved of the encumbrances attending thereto. Nor has this verse anything to do with the share of a widow in the property left by her husband as stated in 4:13. The concession about residence and maintenance for one year mentioned in the present verse forms no part of her share in the inheritance. The verse contains no obligatory injunction, but only an additional exhortation to the heirs of the deceased person to show special kindness to the widow for a period of one year, just as the following verse embodies an identical exhortation in favour of a divorced woman.
d
2:235.
190
2:235经文中为寡妇所制定的四个月零十天的待婚期中, 她有权要求她亡夫的那些继承人给她住所和生活费。这里谈的一年, 只是在2:235节经文中所提到她的住所和生活费权利以外为期一年的同样权利是特殊的优惠。
3
وَصِیَّۃً مصدر ہے۔ اس کے پہلے یُوْصُوْنَ محذوف سمجھا جائے گا‘ یعنی وہ وصیت کر جائیں۔ مَتَاعًا دوسرا مصدر ہے۔ اس سے پہلے بھی اَنْ مَتِّعُوْھُنَّ محذوف ہے اور معنے یہ ہیں کہ یہ وصیت کر جائیں کہ بعد میں وہ لوگ جن کے ہاتھ میں وصیت کا اجرا ہے انہیں ایک سال تک فائدہ پہنچائیں۔ اس کے بعد غَیْرَ اِخْرَاجٍ کے الفاظ ہیں جو بدل ہیں متاع کا۔ پس معنے یہ ہوئے کہ فائدہ پہنچانے سے مراد ہماری یہ ہے کہ ان کو گھروں سے نہ نکالیں بلکہ باوجود اس کے کہ مکان کسی اور وارث کے حصہ میں آیا ہو بیویوں کو ایک سال تک اس میں رہنے کا حق حاصل رہے۔ اس کے یہ معنے نہیں کہ عورت خود بھی
4
مَعْرُوْف کے معنے قانون یا فطرت یا قومی رواج کے مطابق کے ہیں‘ یعنی جسے لوگ جانتے ہیں۔ اس جگہ اس کے معنے پسندیدہ کے اور بہتر کے ہیں۔ مطلب یہ ہے کہ خواہ عدت کے بعد عورتیں نکاح کریں خواہ اپنے والدین یا دوسرے رشتہ داروں کے ہاں چلی جائیں یا کوئی نوکری اختیار کریں تم پر کوئی اعتراض نہیں۔ اور اس حکم کے رو سے تمہیں نہیں چاہییٔ کہ انہیں روکو۔
a
2:235.
247
Commentary:
The middle verses, which came in like the middle Prayer, having ended, the Quran reverts to the original subject of conjugal relations. The verse under comment is erroneously believed by some to have been abrogated by 2:235 and 4:13. Apart from the fact that the abrogation theory is based on lack of the knowledge of true teaching of the Quran, there is nothing in the verses referred to above which contradicts the provision contained in the present verse. The period of waiting laid down for a widow in 2:235 is four months and ten days in which time she can, as of right, claim residence and maintenance from the heirs of her deceased husband. The period of one year mentioned in the present verse has nothing to do with the above-mentioned period of waiting, as the words, but if they themselves go out, there shall be no blame upon you; clearly show. The present verse only contains a concession or a favour for a widow in addition to her right of residence and maintenance mentioned in 2:235. One year is about the time conveniently required by a widow for making suitable arrangements about her future. It is also the requisite time for a pregnant widow to be delivered of the child and relieved of the encumbrances attending thereto. Nor has this verse anything to do with the share of a widow in the property left by her husband as stated in 4:13. The concession about residence and maintenance for one year mentioned in the present verse forms no part of her share in the inheritance. The verse contains no obligatory injunction, but only an additional exhortation to the heirs of the deceased person to show special kindness to the widow for a period of one year, just as the following verse embodies an identical exhortation in favour of a divorced woman.
a
2:235.
298
The period of waiting laid down for a widow in 2:235 is four months and ten days in which time she can, as of right, claim residence and maintenance from the heirs of her deceased husband. The period of one year mentioned here is only a concession or a favour for a widow in addition to her right of residence and maintenance mentioned in 2:235. The concession forms no part of her share in the inheritance, nor is it an obligatory injunction.
۞ أَلَمْ تَرَ إِلَى ٱلَّذِينَ خَرَجُوا۟ مِن دِيَٰرِهِمْ وَهُمْ أُلُوفٌ حَذَرَ ٱلْمَوْتِ فَقَالَ لَهُمُ ٱللَّهُ مُوتُوا۟ ثُمَّ أَحْيَٰهُمْ ۚ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ لَذُو فَضْلٍ عَلَى ٱلنَّاسِ وَلَٰكِنَّ أَكْثَرَ ٱلنَّاسِ لَا يَشْكُرُونَ
5:27.
اَلَّذِیْنَ خَرَجُوْا مِنْ دِیَارِھِمْ سے مراد بنی اسرائیل ہیں جو فرعون کے ڈر کی وجہ سے مصر سے نکل آئے تھے۔ وَھُمْ اُلُوْفٌ میں بتایا کہ وہ ہزاروں تھے۔ اس سے بائیبل کے اس بیان کی تردید ہو جاتی ہے کہ بنی اسرائیل کی تعداد جو مصر سے نکلے تھے چھ لاکھ تین ہزار پانچ سو پچاس تھی۔ کیونکہ چھ لاکھ کا قافلہ بغیر زیادہ سامان کے بے آب و گیاہ جنگل میں سے سینکڑوں میل تک نہیں گزر سکتا۔
’’مرجاؤ‘‘ سے یہ مراد ہے کہ تمہاری نافرمانی کی وجہ سے تم سے فاتحانہ طاقتیں واپس لی جاتی ہیں۔ مگر بعد میں خداتعالیٰ نے معاف کر دیا اور ان کے غالب آنے کی قوتیں انہیں واپس دے دیں۔
5:27.
When, being persecuted by Pharaoh, the Israelites left Egypt and crossed over to Asia, Moses wanted them to enter the Promised Land, but they were afraid of the people that dwelt there and refused to march ahead (5:25).
The Bible represents the number of the Israelites migrating from Egypt as six hundred thousand. Recent researches favour the Quranic view according to which they were only several thousand (History of the People of Israel, by Ernest Renan. p. 145, 1888, and History of Palestine and the Jews, i. 174, by John Kitto). See also 2:61.
The Israelites left Egypt because their further stay in that country would have meant their total annihilation. Pharaoh had recourse to all sorts of means to destroy their manhood. See 2:50.
The reference is to the wandering in the wilderness of Sinai of the Israelites who had refused to march with Moses into Canaan until they perished in the wilderness and a new generation arose who, inspired with a new life, marched into the Promised Land under Joshua. Elsewhere the Qur’an says, "Then we raised you up after your death" (2:57).
5:27.
Commentary:
The commandments relating to conjugal relations were mentioned as an offshoot of the subject of جھاد (holy war) dealt with in 2:217 and the following verses. The Quran now reverts to the original subject and by way of re-introduction cites the example of the Israelites who had left the land of the Pharaohs for fear of death. Trodden under the foot of the tyrant, the children of Israel were then in a most abject condition, and the wise God, in His eternal wisdom, decreed that they should lead a life of ordeals in the wilderness before becoming fit for the great life that awaited them in the Promised Land. The words, Allah said to them: 'Die', point to the great truth that all life must be preceded by death, i.e. great trials and extraordinary sacrifices.
As mentioned above, the clause, those who went forth from their homes, refers to the Israelites who had gone forth from Egypt to escape persecution by Pharaoh. It was the fear of death which had made the Israelites migrate from the land (2:50).
The words, they were thousands, contradict the Bible which represents the number of the Israelites migrating from Egypt as six hundred thousand. Recent researches favour the Quranic view (See History of the People of Israel, p. 145, by Ernest Renan, London, 1888, and History of Palestine and the Jews, i. 174 by John Kitto, London, 1844). See also. 2:55.
The story of the exodus of the Israelites is briefly this. When, being persecuted by Pharaoh, they left Egypt and crossed over to Asia, Moses wanted them to enter the Promised Land, but they were afraid of the people that dwelt there and refused to march ahead, saying Go thou and thy Lord and fight and here we sit (5:25). The result was that they drew upon themselves the wrath of God, Who said to Moses, Verily, it shall be forbidden them for forty years; in distraction shall they wander through the land (5:27). The promise was thus put off for forty years and the children of Israel were left to wander in the wilderness until those who had refused to fight perished in the desert, whereafter the younger generation led by Joshua conquered the land. Thus it was that the people whom God had caused to perish had new life breathed into them. It is with reference to these events that the Quran uses the word "die" in the verse under comment. This very death, i.e. destruction of the rebellious and training of the youth through trials and ordeals, proved the forerunner of life. Elsewhere, the Quran says about the Israelites: Then We raised you up after your death (2:57).
It may also be noted here that from this verse onward, the Quran begins the description of تزکیة or means of national progress spoken of in 2:130, reference to "Signs" and "the Book" and "Wisdom" having already been made.
a
5:27.
5
اَلَّذِیْنَ خَرَجُوْا مِنْ دِیَارِھِمْ سے مراد بنی اسرائیل ہیں جو فرعون کے ڈر کی وجہ سے مصر سے نکل آئے تھے۔ وَھُمْ اُلُوْفٌ میں بتایا کہ وہ ہزاروں تھے۔ اس سے بائیبل کے اس بیان کی تردید ہو جاتی ہے کہ بنی اسرائیل کی تعداد جو مصر سے نکلے تھے چھ لاکھ تین ہزار پانچ سو پچاس تھی۔ کیونکہ چھ لاکھ کا قافلہ بغیر زیادہ سامان کے بے آب و گیاہ جنگل میں سے سینکڑوں میل تک نہیں گزر سکتا۔
6
’’مرجاؤ‘‘ سے یہ مراد ہے کہ تمہاری نافرمانی کی وجہ سے تم سے فاتحانہ طاقتیں واپس لی جاتی ہیں۔ مگر بعد میں خداتعالیٰ نے معاف کر دیا اور ان کے غالب آنے کی قوتیں انہیں واپس دے دیں۔
b
5:27.
250
Commentary:
The commandments relating to conjugal relations were mentioned as an offshoot of the subject of جھاد (holy war) dealt with in 2:217 and the following verses. The Quran now reverts to the original subject and by way of re-introduction cites the example of the Israelites who had left the land of the Pharaohs for fear of death. Trodden under the foot of the tyrant, the children of Israel were then in a most abject condition, and the wise God, in His eternal wisdom, decreed that they should lead a life of ordeals in the wilderness before becoming fit for the great life that awaited them in the Promised Land. The words, Allah said to them: 'Die', point to the great truth that all life must be preceded by death, i.e. great trials and extraordinary sacrifices.
As mentioned above, the clause, those who went forth from their homes, refers to the Israelites who had gone forth from Egypt to escape persecution by Pharaoh. It was the fear of death which had made the Israelites migrate from the land (2:50).
The words, they were thousands, contradict the Bible which represents the number of the Israelites migrating from Egypt as six hundred thousand. Recent researches favour the Quranic view (See History of the People of Israel, p. 145, by Ernest Renan, London, 1888, and History of Palestine and the Jews, i. 174 by John Kitto, London, 1844). See also. 2:55.
The story of the exodus of the Israelites is briefly this. When, being persecuted by Pharaoh, they left Egypt and crossed over to Asia, Moses wanted them to enter the Promised Land, but they were afraid of the people that dwelt there and refused to march ahead, saying Go thou and thy Lord and fight and here we sit (5:25). The result was that they drew upon themselves the wrath of God, Who said to Moses, Verily, it shall be forbidden them for forty years; in distraction shall they wander through the land (5:27). The promise was thus put off for forty years and the children of Israel were left to wander in the wilderness until those who had refused to fight perished in the desert, whereafter the younger generation led by Joshua conquered the land. Thus it was that the people whom God had caused to perish had new life breathed into them. It is with reference to these events that the Quran uses the word "die" in the verse under comment. This very death, i.e. destruction of the rebellious and training of the youth through trials and ordeals, proved the forerunner of life. Elsewhere, the Quran says about the Israelites: Then We raised you up after your death (2:57).
It may also be noted here that from this verse onward, the Quran begins the description of تزکیة or means of national progress spoken of in 2:130, reference to "Signs" and "the Book" and "Wisdom" having already been made.
a
5:27.
300
When, being persecuted by Pharaoh, the Israelites left Egypt and crossed over to Asia, Moses wanted them to enter the Promised Land, but they were afraid of the people that dwelt there and refused to march ahead (5:25).
301
The Bible represents the number of the Israelites migrating from Egypt as six hundred thousand. Recent researches favour the Quranic view according to which they were only several thousand (History of the People of Israel, by Ernest Renan. p. 145, 1888, and History of Palestine and the Jews, i. 174, by John Kitto). See also 2:61.
302
The Israelites left Egypt because their further stay in that country would have meant their total annihilation. Pharaoh had recourse to all sorts of means to destroy their manhood. See 2:50.
303
The reference is to the wandering in the wilderness of Sinai of the Israelites who had refused to march with Moses into Canaan until they perished in the wilderness and a new generation arose who, inspired with a new life, marched into the Promised Land under Joshua. Elsewhere the Qur’an says, "Then we raised you up after your death" (2:57).
أَلَمْ تَرَ إِلَى ٱلْمَلَإِ مِنۢ بَنِىٓ إِسْرَٰٓءِيلَ مِنۢ بَعْدِ مُوسَىٰٓ إِذْ قَالُوا۟ لِنَبِىٍّ لَّهُمُ ٱبْعَثْ لَنَا مَلِكًا نُّقَٰتِلْ فِى سَبِيلِ ٱللَّهِ ۖ قَالَ هَلْ عَسَيْتُمْ إِن كُتِبَ عَلَيْكُمُ ٱلْقِتَالُ أَلَّا تُقَٰتِلُوا۟ ۖ قَالُوا۟ وَمَا لَنَآ أَلَّا نُقَٰتِلَ فِى سَبِيلِ ٱللَّهِ وَقَدْ أُخْرِجْنَا مِن دِيَٰرِنَا وَأَبْنَآئِنَا ۖ فَلَمَّا كُتِبَ عَلَيْهِمُ ٱلْقِتَالُ تَوَلَّوْا۟ إِلَّا قَلِيلًا مِّنْهُمْ ۗ وَٱللَّهُ عَلِيمٌۢ بِٱلظَّٰلِمِينَ
4:78.
دیکھئے پرانا عہدنامہ کتاب قاضیوں باب۶ آیت ۷ و ۸۔
عَسَیْتُمْ کے معنے ہیں ’’تم قریب ہو‘‘ اور ھَلْ عَسَیْتُمْ کے معنے ہوئے ’’کیا تم اس امر کے قریب ہو‘‘ مگر اردو میں اس ترجمہ کے کوئی معنے نہیں بنتے۔ اس لئے لفظی ترجمہ کی بجائے اس کا بامحاورہ ترجمہ کر دیا گیا ہے۔
عربی میں صرف قَلِیْل کا لفظ ہے مگر عربی کے قاعدہ کی رو سے یہاں جماعت وغیرہ کے ہم معنی کوئی لفظ محذوف ہے۔ اردو میں اگر صرف قلیل رکھا جائے تو بے معنے ہو جاتا ہے۔ اس لئے ’’جماعت‘‘ کا لفظ عام قاعدہ کے خلاف خطوط میں نہیں لکھا گیا۔ بلکہ ظاہر میں لکھا گیا ہے۔
استثناء میں ’’سب‘‘ کا لفظ پہلے حصہ جملہ میں مقدر ہوتا ہے۔ اس جگہ اس کے ظاہر کرنے کے بغیر معنے واضح نہیں ہوتے۔
4:78.
The incident mentioned indicates an improvement in the condition of the Israelites at the time to which this verse relates compared with the time of Moses himself. In 5:25 the Qur’an relates that when Moses exhorted his followers to fight the enemy in the cause of Allah, they replied, Go thou and thy Lord and fight, and here we sit. On the contrary, in the present verse they are reported to have said, What reason have we that we should not fight in the cause of Allah when we have been driven forth from our homes and our sons. The improvement, however, was only verbal rather than real; for when the time of actual fighting came, many of them wavered and refused to fight. The incident thus serves as a grim warning to Muslims to beware of treading the same path.
4:78.
Important Words:
الملاء (chiefs) is derived from ملاء. They say ملاء الاناء بالماء i.e. he filled the vessel with water. ملی رعبا means, he was filled with fright. الملاء means: (1) assembly of persons; (2) chiefs and nobles, for they fill the eyes and hearts of the commoners withawe and admiration; or because with them a meeting becomes full and appears to be properly attended. الملاء الاعلی means, the community of high placed angels (Aqrab).
Commentary:
The Quran now proceeds to give the story of how the different tribes of Israel were welded into one great nation, also noting incidentally the weaknesses displayed by them, so that their example may serve as a lesson to Muslims.
The incident mentioned in the verse under comment indicates an improvement in the condition of the Israelites in the time to which this verse relates over that of the time of Moses himself. In 5:25 the Quran relates that when Moses exhorted his followers to fight the enemy in the cause of Allah, they replied, Go thou and thy Lord and fight, and here we sit. On the contrary, in the present verse the Israelites are reported to have said, What reason have we to abstain from fighting in the cause of Allah when we have been driven forth from our homes and our sons? The improvement, however, was more verbal than real; for when the time of actual fighting came, many of these people wavered and refused to fight. The incident thus serves as a grim warning to Muslims to beware of treading the same path.
d
4:78.
3
دیکھئے پرانا عہدنامہ کتاب قاضیوں باب۶ آیت ۷ و ۸۔
4
عَسَیْتُمْ کے معنے ہیں ’’تم قریب ہو‘‘ اور ھَلْ عَسَیْتُمْ کے معنے ہوئے ’’کیا تم اس امر کے قریب ہو‘‘ مگر اردو میں اس ترجمہ کے کوئی معنے نہیں بنتے۔ اس لئے لفظی ترجمہ کی بجائے اس کا بامحاورہ ترجمہ کر دیا گیا ہے۔
5
عربی میں صرف قَلِیْل کا لفظ ہے مگر عربی کے قاعدہ کی رو سے یہاں جماعت وغیرہ کے ہم معنی کوئی لفظ محذوف ہے۔ اردو میں اگر صرف قلیل رکھا جائے تو بے معنے ہو جاتا ہے۔ اس لئے ’’جماعت‘‘ کا لفظ عام قاعدہ کے خلاف خطوط میں نہیں لکھا گیا۔ بلکہ ظاہر میں لکھا گیا ہے۔
6
استثناء میں ’’سب‘‘ کا لفظ پہلے حصہ جملہ میں مقدر ہوتا ہے۔ اس جگہ اس کے ظاہر کرنے کے بغیر معنے واضح نہیں ہوتے۔
a
4:78.
253
Important Words:
الملاء (chiefs) is derived from ملاء. They say ملاء الاناء بالماء i.e. he filled the vessel with water. ملی رعبا means, he was filled with fright. الملاء means: (1) assembly of persons; (2) chiefs and nobles, for they fill the eyes and hearts of the commoners withawe and admiration; or because with them a meeting becomes full and appears to be properly attended. الملاء الاعلی means, the community of high placed angels (Aqrab).
Commentary:
The Quran now proceeds to give the story of how the different tribes of Israel were welded into one great nation, also noting incidentally the weaknesses displayed by them, so that their example may serve as a lesson to Muslims.
The incident mentioned in the verse under comment indicates an improvement in the condition of the Israelites in the time to which this verse relates over that of the time of Moses himself. In 5:25 the Quran relates that when Moses exhorted his followers to fight the enemy in the cause of Allah, they replied, Go thou and thy Lord and fight, and here we sit. On the contrary, in the present verse the Israelites are reported to have said, What reason have we to abstain from fighting in the cause of Allah when we have been driven forth from our homes and our sons? The improvement, however, was more verbal than real; for when the time of actual fighting came, many of these people wavered and refused to fight. The incident thus serves as a grim warning to Muslims to beware of treading the same path.
a
4:78.
306
The incident mentioned indicates an improvement in the condition of the Israelites at the time to which this verse relates compared with the time of Moses himself. In 5:25 the Qur’an relates that when Moses exhorted his followers to fight the enemy in the cause of Allah, they replied, Go thou and thy Lord and fight, and here we sit. On the contrary, in the present verse they are reported to have said, What reason have we that we should not fight in the cause of Allah when we have been driven forth from our homes and our sons. The improvement, however, was only verbal rather than real; for when the time of actual fighting came, many of them wavered and refused to fight. The incident thus serves as a grim warning to Muslims to beware of treading the same path.
أَيَوَدُّ أَحَدُكُمْ أَن تَكُونَ لَهُۥ جَنَّةٌ مِّن نَّخِيلٍ وَأَعْنَابٍ تَجْرِى مِن تَحْتِهَا ٱلْأَنْهَٰرُ لَهُۥ فِيهَا مِن كُلِّ ٱلثَّمَرَٰتِ وَأَصَابَهُ ٱلْكِبَرُ وَلَهُۥ ذُرِّيَّةٌ ضُعَفَآءُ فَأَصَابَهَآ إِعْصَارٌ فِيهِ نَارٌ فَٱحْتَرَقَتْ ۗ كَذَٰلِكَ يُبَيِّنُ ٱللَّهُ لَكُمُ ٱلْءَايَٰتِ لَعَلَّكُمْ تَتَفَكَّرُونَ
By means of this similitude the believer is warned that, if he spends his property for show, or follows up his charity with reproaches and injury, all that he has spent will be wasted.
Important Words:
ذریة (offspring) is derived from ذر or ذرأ. The verb ذر means, he sprinkled or scattered. They say ذرالحب فی الارض i.e. he scattered the seed in the soil. ذرالنبات means the vegetation sprouted forth from the ground. Similarly ذرأ means, he increased a thing, etc.; or He (God) created. ذرة of which the plural is ذر means, small ant; motes or dust particles that float about in the air. ذریة means, children, offspring or progeny; human or other race descended from a common ancestor (Aqrab & Taj).
Commentary:
By means of the similitude contained in this verse, a believer is reminded that if he spends his property for show or follows up his charity with taunts and injury, all that he has spent will be wasted, and on the Day of Judgement he will find nothing good in store for him. His case will be as wretched as that of an old man with little children and large property which, as the result of an accident, is suddenly destroyed, leaving him not only without means of sustenance for himself but also without provision for his children. When a man cannot bear to see himself and his little children go unprovided for in this life, which is after all a very short period, how can he bear that his work for the cause of Allah—a provision for his everlasting life in the next world—should be undone by his own action?
273
Important Words:
ذریة (offspring) is derived from ذر or ذرأ. The verb ذر means, he sprinkled or scattered. They say ذرالحب فی الارض i.e. he scattered the seed in the soil. ذرالنبات means the vegetation sprouted forth from the ground. Similarly ذرأ means, he increased a thing, etc.; or He (God) created. ذرة of which the plural is ذر means, small ant; motes or dust particles that float about in the air. ذریة means, children, offspring or progeny; human or other race descended from a common ancestor (Aqrab & Taj).
Commentary:
By means of the similitude contained in this verse, a believer is reminded that if he spends his property for show or follows up his charity with taunts and injury, all that he has spent will be wasted, and on the Day of Judgement he will find nothing good in store for him. His case will be as wretched as that of an old man with little children and large property which, as the result of an accident, is suddenly destroyed, leaving him not only without means of sustenance for himself but also without provision for his children. When a man cannot bear to see himself and his little children go unprovided for in this life, which is after all a very short period, how can he bear that his work for the cause of Allah—a provision for his everlasting life in the next world—should be undone by his own action?
336
By means of this similitude the believer is warned that, if he spends his property for show, or follows up his charity with reproaches and injury, all that he has spent will be wasted.
يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوٓا۟ أَنفِقُوا۟ مِن طَيِّبَٰتِ مَا كَسَبْتُمْ وَمِمَّآ أَخْرَجْنَا لَكُم مِّنَ ٱلْأَرْضِ ۖ وَلَا تَيَمَّمُوا۟ ٱلْخَبِيثَ مِنْهُ تُنفِقُونَ وَلَسْتُم بِـَٔاخِذِيهِ إِلَّآ أَن تُغْمِضُوا۟ فِيهِ ۚ وَٱعْلَمُوٓا۟ أَنَّ ٱللَّهَ غَنِىٌّ حَمِيدٌ
The verse implies that believers should spend in the cause of God what is good and pure; for even a lawfully earned property might include things that are bad. Old and used things may be given to the poor, but worn out articles of use alone should not be singled out for that purpose.
Important Words:
تیمموا (seek) is derived from یم or ام. They say یمه i.e. he sought it. یمم فلانابرمح means, he sought and singled out that person for attacking with his spear. تیمم الامر means, he sought and singled out the affair. تیمم للصلوة means, he performed what is termed تیمم for his Prayers, i.e. instead of performing the prescribed ablution with water he sought dust and touching it with his hands passed them over his face, etc. (Aqrab & Mufradat).
خبیث (bad) is derived from خبث i.e. he or it was or became bad or foul or abominable or wicked or filthy or impure (Lane).
تغمضوا (connive) is derived from اغمض which again is derived from غمض i.e. it became hidden and concealed. غمض فی الکلامmeans, he made his speech obscure, and abstained from making it clear in meaning. اغمض means, he closed, or shut his eyes; he connived at something so as to practically treat it as something unseen or hidden. اغمض فی البیع means, he demanded a lowering of the price of a thing owing to its badness. اغمض عنه فی البیع means, he connived at the bad quality of the thing and was not strict settling its price (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
The verse implies that believers should not only spend in the cause of Allah but should spend what is good and pure; for even a lawfully-earned property might include things that are bad. They should not deliberately select worthless and worn out things for the purpose of charity. Old and second-hand things may indeed be given to the poor, but such things should not be specially selected or singled out for this purpose. Indeed, a believer can be said to have properly discharged his duty for "spending" in the cause of Allah only if he spends "good things".
274
Important Words:
تیمموا (seek) is derived from یم or ام. They say یمه i.e. he sought it. یمم فلانابرمح means, he sought and singled out that person for attacking with his spear. تیمم الامر means, he sought and singled out the affair. تیمم للصلوة means, he performed what is termed تیمم for his Prayers, i.e. instead of performing the prescribed ablution with water he sought dust and touching it with his hands passed them over his face, etc. (Aqrab & Mufradat).
خبیث (bad) is derived from خبث i.e. he or it was or became bad or foul or abominable or wicked or filthy or impure (Lane).
تغمضوا (connive) is derived from اغمض which again is derived from غمض i.e. it became hidden and concealed. غمض فی الکلامmeans, he made his speech obscure, and abstained from making it clear in meaning. اغمض means, he closed, or shut his eyes; he connived at something so as to practically treat it as something unseen or hidden. اغمض فی البیع means, he demanded a lowering of the price of a thing owing to its badness. اغمض عنه فی البیع means, he connived at the bad quality of the thing and was not strict settling its price (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
The verse implies that believers should not only spend in the cause of Allah but should spend what is good and pure; for even a lawfully-earned property might include things that are bad. They should not deliberately select worthless and worn out things for the purpose of charity. Old and second-hand things may indeed be given to the poor, but such things should not be specially selected or singled out for this purpose. Indeed, a believer can be said to have properly discharged his duty for "spending" in the cause of Allah only if he spends "good things".
337
The verse implies that believers should spend in the cause of God what is good and pure; for even a lawfully earned property might include things that are bad. Old and used things may be given to the poor, but worn out articles of use alone should not be singled out for that purpose.
يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوٓا۟ إِذَا تَدَايَنتُم بِدَيْنٍ إِلَىٰٓ أَجَلٍ مُّسَمًّى فَٱكْتُبُوهُ ۚ وَلْيَكْتُب بَّيْنَكُمْ كَاتِبٌۢ بِٱلْعَدْلِ ۚ وَلَا يَأْبَ كَاتِبٌ أَن يَكْتُبَ كَمَا عَلَّمَهُ ٱللَّهُ ۚ فَلْيَكْتُبْ وَلْيُمْلِلِ ٱلَّذِى عَلَيْهِ ٱلْحَقُّ وَلْيَتَّقِ ٱللَّهَ رَبَّهُۥ وَلَا يَبْخَسْ مِنْهُ شَيْـًٔا ۚ فَإِن كَانَ ٱلَّذِى عَلَيْهِ ٱلْحَقُّ سَفِيهًا أَوْ ضَعِيفًا أَوْ لَا يَسْتَطِيعُ أَن يُمِلَّ هُوَ فَلْيُمْلِلْ وَلِيُّهُۥ بِٱلْعَدْلِ ۚ وَٱسْتَشْهِدُوا۟ شَهِيدَيْنِ مِن رِّجَالِكُمْ ۖ فَإِن لَّمْ يَكُونَا رَجُلَيْنِ فَرَجُلٌ وَٱمْرَأَتَانِ مِمَّن تَرْضَوْنَ مِنَ ٱلشُّهَدَآءِ أَن تَضِلَّ إِحْدَىٰهُمَا فَتُذَكِّرَ إِحْدَىٰهُمَا ٱلْأُخْرَىٰ ۚ وَلَا يَأْبَ ٱلشُّهَدَآءُ إِذَا مَا دُعُوا۟ ۚ وَلَا تَسْـَٔمُوٓا۟ أَن تَكْتُبُوهُ صَغِيرًا أَوْ كَبِيرًا إِلَىٰٓ أَجَلِهِۦ ۚ ذَٰلِكُمْ أَقْسَطُ عِندَ ٱللَّهِ وَأَقْوَمُ لِلشَّهَٰدَةِ وَأَدْنَىٰٓ أَلَّا تَرْتَابُوٓا۟ ۖ إِلَّآ أَن تَكُونَ تِجَٰرَةً حَاضِرَةً تُدِيرُونَهَا بَيْنَكُمْ فَلَيْسَ عَلَيْكُمْ جُنَاحٌ أَلَّا تَكْتُبُوهَا ۗ وَأَشْهِدُوٓا۟ إِذَا تَبَايَعْتُمْ ۚ وَلَا يُضَآرَّ كَاتِبٌ وَلَا شَهِيدٌ ۚ وَإِن تَفْعَلُوا۟ فَإِنَّهُۥ فُسُوقٌۢ بِكُمْ ۗ وَٱتَّقُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ ۖ وَيُعَلِّمُكُمُ ٱللَّهُ ۗ وَٱللَّهُ بِكُلِّ شَىْءٍ عَلِيمٌ
4:30.
96:5.
口授的人应该是债务人而不是债权人, 因为: (1) 负责任的是债务人; 有关决定性的话, 应该由他来选择才公正; (2) 借据由债权人而不是由债务人保存。因此要求债务人口授, 使他口授的事情可以作为借款数目和付款条件准确的证明。他就没有原因和根据来否认这笔借款。
这里含有这样的意思, 即使在这种情况下, 还是写一张像现款便笺或收条之类的字据比较好。
这里指的是大笔交易。
اِلٰی اَجَلٍ مُّسَمًّی۔ اس میں اِلٰی یا تو لام کے معنوں میں ہے اور معنے یہ ہیں کہ مقررہ میعاد کے لئے قرض لو اور اِلٰی ان معنوں میں عربی میں استعمال ہوتا ہے۔ جیسے قرآن کریم میں آتا ہے وَ الْاَمْرُ اِلَیْکِ یعنی حکم دینے کا اختیار تجھے حاصل ہے۔ یا کہتے ہیں اَحْمَدُ اِلَیْکَ اللّٰہَ: تیرے لئے اللہ کی حمد کرتا ہوں (مغنی) اور یہ بھی ہو سکتا ہے کہ اِلٰی‘ مَعَ کے معنے دیتا ہو۔ یہ معنے عربی میں مستعمل ہیں۔ قرآن کریم میں بھی آتا ہے مَنْ اَنْصَارِیْ اِلَی اللّٰہِ یعنی کون اللہ کے ساتھ ہو کر میری مدد کرتا ہے۔ اس اِلٰی کے لئے یہ شرط ہوتی ہے ک
’’تمہارے درمیان‘‘ اس کے یہ معنے بھی ہو سکتے ہیں کہ جو معاہدہ تمہارے درمیان ہوا ہے وہ لکھ دے اور یہ بھی کہ کاتب تمہارے اپنے آدمیوں میں سے ہو۔ اور یہ بھی کہ وہ دونوں فریق کی موجودگی میں ان کے سامنے بیٹھ کر لکھے۔
یہ آیت ترجمہ کے لحاظ سے بہت پیچیدہ ہے کیونکہ اس میں شُھَدَآء کا لفظ موقع پر موجود ہونے والوں کے لئے استعمال کیا گیا ہے اور ایک ہی فقرہ میں دو معنوں میں گواہ کے لفظ نے ترجمہ میں پیچیدگی پیدا کر دی ہے۔ مطلب یہ ہے کہ جس وقت تحریر لکھی جا رہی ہو اگر لکھنے والے کے سوا جو مرد و عورت وہاں موجود ہوں ان میں سے وہ دو مردوں کو گواہ مقرر نہ کرنا چاہتا ہو بلکہ کسی عورت کو بھی شامل کرنا چاہتا ہو تو اس صورت میں جو لوگ موقع پر ہوں ان میں سے دونوں فریق کے اعتباری لوگوں میں سے ایک مرد اور دو عورتوں کی شہادت ڈلوائی جائے۔
حَاضِرَۃً کا ترجمہ ’’دست بدست‘‘ کیا گیا ہے۔ یعنی جب مال پر اسی وقت قبضہ کر لیا گیا ہو اور قیمت نقد ادا کر دی گئی ہو۔
اس میں اشارہ ہے کہ اس صورت میں بھی لکھنا اچھا ہے جیسا انگریزی دکان دار ووچر (Voucher) دیتا ہے۔ اس سے جھگڑے کم ہو جاتے ہیں۔
یہ بہت بڑے سَودوں کے متعلق ہے کہ ان کو لکھنا بھی چاہیے اور گواہ بھی رکھنے چاہئیں تا فتنہ نہ پیدا ہو۔
4:30.
96:5.
The borrower, and not the lender, is to dictate because; (1) it is the borrower who incurs the liability; and justice demands that the words defining the liability should be selected by him; (2) the document is to be deposited with the lender and not the borrower. So the borrower has been asked to dictate so that the fact of his having dictated may serve as a proof of the correctness of the amount and the conditions about payment, and he may have no cause or ground to deny it.
The implication is that it would be better to have a writing even in such a case like cash memo or voucher.
This refers to big transactions.
96:5.
4:30.
Important Words:
ولیه (someone who can watch his interest). ولی means, friend; helper; guardian of one’s affairs; he who protects or watches one’s interests (Aqrab). See also 2:108.
Commentary:
As the preceding verses prohibit interest and enjoin that only the original sum taken as a loan be returned to the creditor, the Quran now fittingly turns to the subject of loans not carrying interest. The verse enjoins that all transactions regarding loans should be committed to writing. It is really amazing, and is indeed a wonderful testimony to its Divine origin, that the Quran, which was revealed about 1,350 years ago when the art of writing was yet in its infancy, should lay so much stress on writing down all transactions.
The verse should not be interpreted to signify that only such transactions should be committed to writing as have a fixed term for the paying back of a loan. The injunction is general and is meant to obviate or minimize disputes so as to leave no room for doubt as to whether any amount has really been lent and as to the amount of the money lent. The words, for a fixed period, have been added to emphasize the additional fact that whenever a loan is advanced, a term must be fixed.
The verse further enjoins that when a transaction is made on credit, the document drawn up should be written by a third person so that there may be little chance of fraud and neither of the parties may have a cause of complaint against the other, both standing on the same level.
The borrower, and not the lender, is to dictate because: (1) it is the borrower who incurs the liability, and justice demands that words defining the liability should not only be well known to, but also selected by him; (2) the document is to be deposited with the lender and not the borrower. So the borrower has been asked to dictate so that the fact of his having dictated may serve as a proof of the correctness of the amount and the condition about payment, and he may have no ground to deny it.The clause, he should not diminish anything therefrom, have been added because loans may be of different kinds. They may not always be in cash and may be for long terms and there may also be certain conditions attached to them. In such cases it sometimes happens that in drawing up documents, people resort to trickery and leave loopholes. So borrowers (who have to dictate) have been warned against such evil practices and have been enjoined to fear God and dictate with honesty and justice.
In the clause, and call two witnesses from among your men, the word "your" has been most wisely added to imply that the witnesses should not be strangers but should be known men residing in the same locality so that, if need arises, they may be easily summoned to give evidence. The words "such as you like", point to the fact that the witnesses, whether men or women, should be desirable persons and should enjoy the confidence of both parties.
The clause, and let no harm be done to the scribe or the witness, signifies that if the scribe is a professional man, he should be duly paid for his services; otherwise wrong would be done to him. Similarly, a person should not be compelled, so far as possible, to become a witness if it causes him loss of any kind. Again, the scribe or the witnesses should also be paid their travelling and other necessary expenses when they are summoned before a Qadi or judge. The words also hint that the witnesses and the scribe should not be forced or threatened or bribed or otherwise influenced to suppress the truth or tell a falsehood when called upon to give evidence.
a
4:30.
b
96:5.
210
口授的人应该是债务人而不是债权人, 因为: (1) 负责任的是债务人; 有关决定性的话, 应该由他来选择才公正; (2) 借据由债权人而不是由债务人保存。因此要求债务人口授, 使他口授的事情可以作为借款数目和付款条件准确的证明。他就没有原因和根据来否认这笔借款。
211
这里含有这样的意思, 即使在这种情况下, 还是写一张像现款便笺或收条之类的字据比较好。
212
这里指的是大笔交易。
1
اِلٰی اَجَلٍ مُّسَمًّی۔ اس میں اِلٰی یا تو لام کے معنوں میں ہے اور معنے یہ ہیں کہ مقررہ میعاد کے لئے قرض لو اور اِلٰی ان معنوں میں عربی میں استعمال ہوتا ہے۔ جیسے قرآن کریم میں آتا ہے وَ الْاَمْرُ اِلَیْکِ یعنی حکم دینے کا اختیار تجھے حاصل ہے۔ یا کہتے ہیں اَحْمَدُ اِلَیْکَ اللّٰہَ: تیرے لئے اللہ کی حمد کرتا ہوں (مغنی) اور یہ بھی ہو سکتا ہے کہ اِلٰی‘ مَعَ کے معنے دیتا ہو۔ یہ معنے عربی میں مستعمل ہیں۔ قرآن کریم میں بھی آتا ہے مَنْ اَنْصَارِیْ اِلَی اللّٰہِ یعنی کون اللہ کے ساتھ ہو کر میری مدد کرتا ہے۔ اس اِلٰی کے لئے یہ شرط ہوتی ہے ک
2
’’تمہارے درمیان‘‘ اس کے یہ معنے بھی ہو سکتے ہیں کہ جو معاہدہ تمہارے درمیان ہوا ہے وہ لکھ دے اور یہ بھی کہ کاتب تمہارے اپنے آدمیوں میں سے ہو۔ اور یہ بھی کہ وہ دونوں فریق کی موجودگی میں ان کے سامنے بیٹھ کر لکھے۔
3
یہ آیت ترجمہ کے لحاظ سے بہت پیچیدہ ہے کیونکہ اس میں شُھَدَآء کا لفظ موقع پر موجود ہونے والوں کے لئے استعمال کیا گیا ہے اور ایک ہی فقرہ میں دو معنوں میں گواہ کے لفظ نے ترجمہ میں پیچیدگی پیدا کر دی ہے۔ مطلب یہ ہے کہ جس وقت تحریر لکھی جا رہی ہو اگر لکھنے والے کے سوا جو مرد و عورت وہاں موجود ہوں ان میں سے وہ دو مردوں کو گواہ مقرر نہ کرنا چاہتا ہو بلکہ کسی عورت کو بھی شامل کرنا چاہتا ہو تو اس صورت میں جو لوگ موقع پر ہوں ان میں سے دونوں فریق کے اعتباری لوگوں میں سے ایک مرد اور دو عورتوں کی شہادت ڈلوائی جائے۔
4
حَاضِرَۃً کا ترجمہ ’’دست بدست‘‘ کیا گیا ہے۔ یعنی جب مال پر اسی وقت قبضہ کر لیا گیا ہو اور قیمت نقد ادا کر دی گئی ہو۔
5
اس میں اشارہ ہے کہ اس صورت میں بھی لکھنا اچھا ہے جیسا انگریزی دکان دار ووچر (Voucher) دیتا ہے۔ اس سے جھگڑے کم ہو جاتے ہیں۔
6
یہ بہت بڑے سَودوں کے متعلق ہے کہ ان کو لکھنا بھی چاہیے اور گواہ بھی رکھنے چاہئیں تا فتنہ نہ پیدا ہو۔
a
96:5.
b
4:30.
289
Important Words:
ولیه (someone who can watch his interest). ولی means, friend; helper; guardian of one’s affairs; he who protects or watches one’s interests (Aqrab). See also 2:108.
Commentary:
As the preceding verses prohibit interest and enjoin that only the original sum taken as a loan be returned to the creditor, the Quran now fittingly turns to the subject of loans not carrying interest. The verse enjoins that all transactions regarding loans should be committed to writing. It is really amazing, and is indeed a wonderful testimony to its Divine origin, that the Quran, which was revealed about 1,350 years ago when the art of writing was yet in its infancy, should lay so much stress on writing down all transactions.
The verse should not be interpreted to signify that only such transactions should be committed to writing as have a fixed term for the paying back of a loan. The injunction is general and is meant to obviate or minimize disputes so as to leave no room for doubt as to whether any amount has really been lent and as to the amount of the money lent. The words, for a fixed period, have been added to emphasize the additional fact that whenever a loan is advanced, a term must be fixed.
The verse further enjoins that when a transaction is made on credit, the document drawn up should be written by a third person so that there may be little chance of fraud and neither of the parties may have a cause of complaint against the other, both standing on the same level.
The borrower, and not the lender, is to dictate because: (1) it is the borrower who incurs the liability, and justice demands that words defining the liability should not only be well known to, but also selected by him; (2) the document is to be deposited with the lender and not the borrower. So the borrower has been asked to dictate so that the fact of his having dictated may serve as a proof of the correctness of the amount and the condition about payment, and he may have no ground to deny it.The clause, he should not diminish anything therefrom, have been added because loans may be of different kinds. They may not always be in cash and may be for long terms and there may also be certain conditions attached to them. In such cases it sometimes happens that in drawing up documents, people resort to trickery and leave loopholes. So borrowers (who have to dictate) have been warned against such evil practices and have been enjoined to fear God and dictate with honesty and justice.
In the clause, and call two witnesses from among your men, the word "your" has been most wisely added to imply that the witnesses should not be strangers but should be known men residing in the same locality so that, if need arises, they may be easily summoned to give evidence. The words "such as you like", point to the fact that the witnesses, whether men or women, should be desirable persons and should enjoy the confidence of both parties.
The clause, and let no harm be done to the scribe or the witness, signifies that if the scribe is a professional man, he should be duly paid for his services; otherwise wrong would be done to him. Similarly, a person should not be compelled, so far as possible, to become a witness if it causes him loss of any kind. Again, the scribe or the witnesses should also be paid their travelling and other necessary expenses when they are summoned before a Qadi or judge. The words also hint that the witnesses and the scribe should not be forced or threatened or bribed or otherwise influenced to suppress the truth or tell a falsehood when called upon to give evidence.
a
4:30.
b
96:5.
354
The borrower, and not the lender, is to dictate because; (1) it is the borrower who incurs the liability; and justice demands that the words defining the liability should be selected by him; (2) the document is to be deposited with the lender and not the borrower. So the borrower has been asked to dictate so that the fact of his having dictated may serve as a proof of the correctness of the amount and the conditions about payment, and he may have no cause or ground to deny it.
354A
The implication is that it would be better to have a writing even in such a case like cash memo or voucher.
354B
This refers to big transactions.
ءَامَنَ ٱلرَّسُولُ بِمَآ أُنزِلَ إِلَيْهِ مِن رَّبِّهِۦ وَٱلْمُؤْمِنُونَ ۚ كُلٌّ ءَامَنَ بِٱللَّهِ وَمَلَٰٓئِكَتِهِۦ وَكُتُبِهِۦ وَرُسُلِهِۦ لَا نُفَرِّقُ بَيْنَ أَحَدٍ مِّن رُّسُلِهِۦ ۚ وَقَالُوا۟ سَمِعْنَا وَأَطَعْنَا ۖ غُفْرَانَكَ رَبَّنَا وَإِلَيْكَ ٱلْمَصِيرُ
2:137.
3:148, 194; 60:6.
善行确实是达到纯洁精神的主要手段, 但它们的起源却是纯洁的心灵, 这只有坚持正确的信念才能获得。因此, 这节经文详细叙述 «古兰经» 教导的基本信念, 即按照它们自然的程序排列: 信仰安拉、他所有的天使、他一切的经书和他全部的使者。
طلب کرنے کے الفاظ عربی میں محذوف ہیں‘ لیکن اردو میں ان کے ظاہر کیے بغیر کوئی چارہ نہیں۔ اس لئے مجبوراً خطوط سے باہر لکھنے پڑے ہیں۔
See 2:137.
3:148, 194; 60:6.
Good deeds are indeed the principal means for the attainment of spiritual purification, but they have their origin in the purity of the heart, which can be attained only by holding right beliefs. Hence the verse details the fundamental beliefs, which the Qur’an has taught, i.e. belief in God and His angels, His Books and His Messengers, in their natural order.
See 2:137.
3:148, 194; 60:6.
Important Words:
غفرانك (Thy forgiveness). غفران is the noun-infinitive from غفر for which see 2:59 and 2:200. غفران on the part of God signifies, covering man with mercy and forgiveness and saving him from the punishment of sins. It is used in the infinitive form for the sake of emphasis, words like "I or we implore" being understood before it.
Commentary:
The mention of the believers along with the Prophet has a special significance in the verse; the purifying influence of the Holy Prophet has brought into existence a class of men who have become purified both in belief and in deeds, thus fulfilling the object for which the Prophet for whom Abraham had prayed was to make his appearance.
Good deeds are indeed the principal means for the attainment of purification, but they have their origin in the purity of the heart, which can be attained only by holding true beliefs. Hence, the verse details the fundamental points of belief which the Holy Prophet taught his followers, i.e. belief in God and His angels and His Books and His Messengers, mentioned in their natural order.
Among the points of belief detailed here, one is that true believers say, We make no distinction between any of His Messengers. This means that true believers should accept all the Messengers of God, without exception, and should make no distinction between them by accepting some and rejecting others. There is in this, food for thought for those Muslims who reject the Promised Messiah, Founder of the Ahmadiyya Movement, whom God raised in fulfilment of the prophecies of the Holy Prophet and who came to demonstrate the truth of Islam, by cogent reasons and powerful signs.
Another very important means of attaining purification is prayer. The verse represents true believers as offering prayer to God in the ennobling words, We hear and we obey. We implore Thy forgiveness, O our Lord, and to Thee is the returning. This prayer contains four basic elements of purification: (1) man should ever be prepared to listen to God’s commandments; (2) he should be ever ready to obey His commandments, whatever the circumstances; (3) he should always be asking for God’s forgiveness for his sins and shortcomings; and (4) he should never forget that he will one day return to, and stand before, his Maker and will render an account of his works.
c
2:137.
d
3:148, 194; 60:6.
216
善行确实是达到纯洁精神的主要手段, 但它们的起源却是纯洁的心灵, 这只有坚持正确的信念才能获得。因此, 这节经文详细叙述 «古兰经» 教导的基本信念, 即按照它们自然的程序排列: 信仰安拉、他所有的天使、他一切的经书和他全部的使者。
1
طلب کرنے کے الفاظ عربی میں محذوف ہیں‘ لیکن اردو میں ان کے ظاہر کیے بغیر کوئی چارہ نہیں۔ اس لئے مجبوراً خطوط سے باہر لکھنے پڑے ہیں۔
a
See 2:137.
b
3:148, 194; 60:6.
292
Important Words:
غفرانك (Thy forgiveness). غفران is the noun-infinitive from غفر for which see 2:59 and 2:200. غفران on the part of God signifies, covering man with mercy and forgiveness and saving him from the punishment of sins. It is used in the infinitive form for the sake of emphasis, words like "I or we implore" being understood before it.
Commentary:
The mention of the believers along with the Prophet has a special significance in the verse; the purifying influence of the Holy Prophet has brought into existence a class of men who have become purified both in belief and in deeds, thus fulfilling the object for which the Prophet for whom Abraham had prayed was to make his appearance.
Good deeds are indeed the principal means for the attainment of purification, but they have their origin in the purity of the heart, which can be attained only by holding true beliefs. Hence, the verse details the fundamental points of belief which the Holy Prophet taught his followers, i.e. belief in God and His angels and His Books and His Messengers, mentioned in their natural order.
Among the points of belief detailed here, one is that true believers say, We make no distinction between any of His Messengers. This means that true believers should accept all the Messengers of God, without exception, and should make no distinction between them by accepting some and rejecting others. There is in this, food for thought for those Muslims who reject the Promised Messiah, Founder of the Ahmadiyya Movement, whom God raised in fulfilment of the prophecies of the Holy Prophet and who came to demonstrate the truth of Islam, by cogent reasons and powerful signs.
Another very important means of attaining purification is prayer. The verse represents true believers as offering prayer to God in the ennobling words, We hear and we obey. We implore Thy forgiveness, O our Lord, and to Thee is the returning. This prayer contains four basic elements of purification: (1) man should ever be prepared to listen to God’s commandments; (2) he should be ever ready to obey His commandments, whatever the circumstances; (3) he should always be asking for God’s forgiveness for his sins and shortcomings; and (4) he should never forget that he will one day return to, and stand before, his Maker and will render an account of his works.
a
See 2:137.
b
3:148, 194; 60:6.
358
Good deeds are indeed the principal means for the attainment of spiritual purification, but they have their origin in the purity of the heart, which can be attained only by holding right beliefs. Hence the verse details the fundamental beliefs, which the Qur’an has taught, i.e. belief in God and His angels, His Books and His Messengers, in their natural order.
لَا يُكَلِّفُ ٱللَّهُ نَفْسًا إِلَّا وُسْعَهَا ۚ لَهَا مَا كَسَبَتْ وَعَلَيْهَا مَا ٱكْتَسَبَتْ ۗ رَبَّنَا لَا تُؤَاخِذْنَآ إِن نَّسِينَآ أَوْ أَخْطَأْنَا ۚ رَبَّنَا وَلَا تَحْمِلْ عَلَيْنَآ إِصْرًا كَمَا حَمَلْتَهُۥ عَلَى ٱلَّذِينَ مِن قَبْلِنَا ۚ رَبَّنَا وَلَا تُحَمِّلْنَا مَا لَا طَاقَةَ لَنَا بِهِۦ ۖ وَٱعْفُ عَنَّا وَٱغْفِرْ لَنَا وَٱرْحَمْنَآ ۚ أَنتَ مَوْلَىٰنَا فَٱنصُرْنَا عَلَى ٱلْقَوْمِ ٱلْكَٰفِرِينَ
2:234.
3:148.
这一句有力驳斥了基督替世人赎罪而受难至死的教义。它体现了两个重要原则: (1) 安拉授予律令时, 对人类的能力和自然限制总是给以应有的关心的, (2) 道德上的纯洁并不一定要求完全没有一切种类的失误和缺点。期望人类所做的一切, 只是他们要诚意尽力争取做好事而避免罪恶的事。其他的可由永久仁慈的安拉来宽赦他们。因此, 不需要基督来替世人赎罪。
كَسَبَ (Kasaba) 这个字一般指做好事。اِكْتَسَبَ (Iktasaba) 一般指做恶事。两个字都出自相同词根, 而后者较着重地指行为一方。做好事的人, 即使他们是偶然或不是自觉地出力去做的, 将得到报答; 而做恶事的人, 只有在他们深思熟虑而有意识努力去犯这些罪行的, 才受到惩罚。
在一般情况下, نِسْيَان (Nisyan) 和 خَطِيْئَة (Khati’ah) 是不受惩罚的, 因为它们是无意的, 或缺少动机的; 而有意的或有动机的必须受到惩罚。但是, 这里这两个字的意思是 “忘记” 和 “错误”。如果加以应有的小心的话, 它们是可以避免的。
اِصْر (Isr) 的意思是: (1) 限制人们行动的一种负担; (2) 一种很重大的责任, 如果不能完成的话, 会使人受到应得的惩罚; (3) 一种罪恶或冒犯;以及 (4) 对罪恶行为的严厉惩罚。“ 求你使我们不致像前人一样担负重担!” 这句话, 并不意味着放在我们身上的负担要比前人身上的轻些。这句话的意思是, 求你保护我们不违背对你的许约, 这样可以使我们免于承担像前人所承担那样的背逆罪过。这是为保存和保护伊斯兰教以及保护穆斯林不会招致安拉不悦的一种集体的祈祷。
اَخَذَ : جب گناہ یا غلطی کے متعلق آئے تو اس کے معنے ہوتے ہیں عَاقَبَہٗ : اسے اس کے گناہ کی سزا دی (اقرب الموارد) یہاں پکڑنے کی بجائے سزا دینا ترجمہ کیا گیا ہے۔
اِصْرٌ کے معنے عہد‘ اقرار‘ ثقل‘ بوجھ اور اَلذَّنْبُ یعنی گناہ کے ہیں (اقرب) نیز وہ کام جو انسان کو نیکی سے روک دیں اور محروم کر دیں۔ جیسے قرآن کریم میں ہے وَ یَضَعُ عَنْھُمْ اِصْرَھُمْ (اعراف: ۱۵۸) نیز اِصْرٌ اس تاکیدی عہد کو بھی کہتے ہیں جو عہد شکن کو ثواب اور نیکیوں سے محروم کر دے (مفردات) اس آیت کا یہ مطلب نہیں کہ پہلے لوگوں پر زیادہ بوجھ تھا ہم پر کم ڈالیو۔ بلکہ مراد یہ ہے کہ جس طرح ان پر احکام الٰہی کے توڑنے پر ذمہ داری ڈالی گئی تھی اور وہ ثواب کے کاموں سے محروم ہو گئے تھے اسی طرح ہم پر ذمہ داری نہ ڈالی جائے۔ یعنی ہم عہد شکن ہو کر ثواب کے کاموں سے م
حَمَّلَہٗ: جَعَلَہٗ یَحْمِلُہٗ۔ اس سے بوجھ اٹھوایا (اقرب) اس سے مراد بھی عذاب ہے‘ یعنی ایسا عذاب ہم پر نہ آئے کہ ہم کچلے جائیں اور پھر اٹھنے کی طاقت نہ رہے۔ چنانچہ اس سے آگے ’’درگذر کر‘‘ کے الفاظ اس مفہوم کو واضح کر دیتے ہیں۔
قَوْمٌ کے معنے لوگوں کی ایک جماعت کے ہوتے ہیں۔ رشتہ داروں اور قریبیوں کے لئے بھی یہ لفظ بولا جاتا ہے (اقرب) پس قوم کے معنے لازما ً قوم کے نہیں ہوتے بلکہ ہر اس گروہ پر یہ لفظ بولا جاتا ہے جو ایک مقصد پر جمع ہوں۔ چونکہ کفار مسلمانوں کے خلاف جمع تھے اس لئے وہ ایک قوم کہلانے کے مستحق تھے۔ قَوْم کے معنے دشمنوں کے بھی ہوتے ہیں (اقرب) ان معنوں کی رو سے آیت کے یہ معنے ہوں گے کہ کافر دشمنوں کے خلاف ہماری مدد کر۔ یہ معنے زیادہ لطیف ہیں لیکن چونکہ عام طور پر لوگ ان معنوں سے واقف نہیں۔ میں نے ترجمہ مشہور معنوں کی رو سے کر دیا ہے تا طبائع پر گراں نہ گذرے۔
3:148.
See 2:234.
The clause constitutes a powerful refutation of the doctrine of Atonement. It embodies two important principles: (1) That the commandments of God are always given with due regard for man’s capacities and his natural limitations. (2) That moral purification in this world does not necessarily signify complete freedom from all kinds of failings and shortcomings. All that man is expected to do is sincerely to strive for good and avoid sin to the best of his power, and the rest will be forgiven him by the Merciful God. So no Atonement is needed.
The word Kasaba generally denotes the doing of good deeds and Iktasaba the doing of evil deeds. Both words are from the same root but the latter denotes greater exertion on the part of the doer. A man will be rewarded for good deeds even if they are done casually and without conscious effort, while he will be punished for his evil deeds only if they are committed deliberately and with conscious effort.
In ordinary circumstances, Nisyan and Khati’ah are not punishable for they lack intention or motive which are necessary for awarding punishment. But here the words denote forgetfulness and error which can be avoided if due care is taken.
Isr means, (1) a burden which restrains one from motion; (2) a heavy responsibility the breaking of which renders one deserving of punishment; (3) a sin or an offence; and (4) grievous punishment of a sin. The expression 'lay not on us a responsibility as Thou didst lay upon those before us,' does not mean that the burden to be laid upon us should be lighter than that which was laid upon those before us. The meaning is that we may be safeguarded against breaking Thy covenant and thus may be saved from incurring a heavy responsibility for disobedience as was incurred by those before us. This is a collective prayer for the preservation and protection of Islam and the safeguarding of Muslims against incurring the displeasure of God.
See 2:234.
3:148.
Important Words:
اصرا (responsibility). They say اصرالشیء i.e. he broke the thing. اصرہ means, be confined or detained or debarred him; he held him in custody or he restrained him. اصرالخیمة means, he provided the tent with a peg or a rope for tying. اصر (isr.) or اصر (asr) or اصر (usr) means: (1) a burden which restrains one from motion; (2) a burdensome covenant or a heavy responsibility the breaking of which makes one deserving of punishment; (3) a sin, or an offence; and (4) grievous punishment of a sin (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
The clause, Allah burdens not any soul beyond its capacity, is a powerful refutation of the doctrine of Atonement. It embodies two important principles: (1) That the commandments of God are always given with due regard for human capacities and weaknesses. (2) That purification in this world does not necessarily signify complete freedom from all kinds of failings and shortcomings. All that man is expected to do is sincerely to strive after good and avoid sin to the best of his power, and the rest will be forgiven him by the Merciful God. So no atonement is needed.
The word کسب (earns) has been used here with regard to the doing of good deeds and اکتسب (incurs) for the doing of evil deeds. They are from the same root but the latter denotes greater exertion. Thus the words hint that a man will be rewarded for good deeds even if they are done casually and without concentrated effort, while he will be punished for his evil deeds only if they are committed deliberately and with concentrated effort.
In ordinary circumstances, نسیان (forgetfulness) and خطاء (error) are not punishable, for they lack intention or motive which are necessary for punishment. But here the words denote a forgetfulness and an error which might have been avoided, if due care had been exercised.
As explained under Important Words above, the word اصر (responsibility) has several connot-ations, all of which are applicable here. Hence, the verse may also be translated as (a) Impose not on us a sin, i.e. enable us to avoid sin and prevent us from the doing of deeds which might make us stumble; (b) Do not punish us if we commit some sin or break some covenant; (c) Taking the expression لاتحمل علینا to mean, as it literally does, do not make it ride us or do not mount it on us, the clause may also be rendered as, do not make a responsibility or a covenant mount on us as Thou didst mount it on those before us. The simile is beautiful. divine covenants are meant to help the people in their onward march; but sometimes, through abuse or breach, they become a burden, instead of a help, thus turning into a rider in place of a riding beast. Muslims are taught to pray against such an eventuality.
The words, lay not on us a responsibility as Thou didst lay upon those before us, do not mean that Muslims have been taught to wish for lighter burdens. The facts of history belie that inference. The words only mean that God may help Muslims to fulfil their responsibilities and to avoid sins as well as the consequences thereof. The previous peoples were entrusted with some responsibilities and given certain commandments which were all for their own good, but many of them failed to fulfil them and also rejected Islam to which they had been invited and thus turned a blissful guidance into a veritable means of incurring God’s displeasure. Thus, they were virtually laid under an isr or a burdensome responsibility. Muslims, being the bearers of the final and universal Shari‘ah, have been exhorted to set a better example and pray to God for success in their great task and in the fulfilment of their heavy responsibilities. The laying of burden or burdensome responsibility has been attributed to God just as in the Quranic idiom ضلالة (misguidance) is sometimes attributed to Him for which see 2:7.
The clause, lay not on us a responsibility as Thou didst lay on those before us, may also refer to Christians particularly who, by declaring the Law to be a curse, converted a divine mercy into an isr, i.e. a burden and a punishment. Muslims are thus taught to pray that for them the Shari‘ah may always remain a mercy. In this case the verse comes as a fitting preamble to the succeeding Surah of which Christianity forms the special theme.
The clause, and efface our sins and grant us Forgiveness and have Mercy on us, comprises three important invocations placed in perfect order. They not only correspond to the preceding three prayers but also constitute a perfect manifestation of a perfect treatment on the part of a perfect Master. فاعف عنا means that God may efface our sins and leave out no trace of them to be seen by men. اغفرلنا means that He may not only efface our sins but also grant us forgiveness so that He Himself may treat them as non-existent. And ارحمنا means that God may not only efface our sins and forgive us but also show positive mercy to us.
The concluding clause, help us Thou against the disbelieving people, provides a fitting ending to the Surah. The Muslims are out for a great struggle. The entire world of کفر (disbelief) is arrayed against them and the field of work, as hinted in Abraham’s prayer (2:130), is wide and far-stretched, extending over (1) heavenly signs, (2) laws and covenants, (3) wisdom and philosophy, (4) morals and spirituality, and (5) general progress. This was a stupendous task and unless God came to their help, there was little hope for that tiny Muslim community that was just emerging into existence. But God did come to their help.
a
2:234.
b
3:148.
217
这一句有力驳斥了基督替世人赎罪而受难至死的教义。它体现了两个重要原则: (1) 安拉授予律令时, 对人类的能力和自然限制总是给以应有的关心的, (2) 道德上的纯洁并不一定要求完全没有一切种类的失误和缺点。期望人类所做的一切, 只是他们要诚意尽力争取做好事而避免罪恶的事。其他的可由永久仁慈的安拉来宽赦他们。因此, 不需要基督来替世人赎罪。
218
كَسَبَ (Kasaba) 这个字一般指做好事。اِكْتَسَبَ (Iktasaba) 一般指做恶事。两个字都出自相同词根, 而后者较着重地指行为一方。做好事的人, 即使他们是偶然或不是自觉地出力去做的, 将得到报答; 而做恶事的人, 只有在他们深思熟虑而有意识努力去犯这些罪行的, 才受到惩罚。
219
在一般情况下, نِسْيَان (Nisyan) 和 خَطِيْئَة (Khati’ah) 是不受惩罚的, 因为它们是无意的, 或缺少动机的; 而有意的或有动机的必须受到惩罚。但是, 这里这两个字的意思是 “忘记” 和 “错误”。如果加以应有的小心的话, 它们是可以避免的。
220
اِصْر (Isr) 的意思是: (1) 限制人们行动的一种负担; (2) 一种很重大的责任, 如果不能完成的话, 会使人受到应得的惩罚; (3) 一种罪恶或冒犯;以及 (4) 对罪恶行为的严厉惩罚。“ 求你使我们不致像前人一样担负重担!” 这句话, 并不意味着放在我们身上的负担要比前人身上的轻些。这句话的意思是, 求你保护我们不违背对你的许约, 这样可以使我们免于承担像前人所承担那样的背逆罪过。这是为保存和保护伊斯兰教以及保护穆斯林不会招致安拉不悦的一种集体的祈祷。
1
اَخَذَ : جب گناہ یا غلطی کے متعلق آئے تو اس کے معنے ہوتے ہیں عَاقَبَہٗ : اسے اس کے گناہ کی سزا دی (اقرب الموارد) یہاں پکڑنے کی بجائے سزا دینا ترجمہ کیا گیا ہے۔
2
اِصْرٌ کے معنے عہد‘ اقرار‘ ثقل‘ بوجھ اور اَلذَّنْبُ یعنی گناہ کے ہیں (اقرب) نیز وہ کام جو انسان کو نیکی سے روک دیں اور محروم کر دیں۔ جیسے قرآن کریم میں ہے وَ یَضَعُ عَنْھُمْ اِصْرَھُمْ (اعراف: ۱۵۸) نیز اِصْرٌ اس تاکیدی عہد کو بھی کہتے ہیں جو عہد شکن کو ثواب اور نیکیوں سے محروم کر دے (مفردات) اس آیت کا یہ مطلب نہیں کہ پہلے لوگوں پر زیادہ بوجھ تھا ہم پر کم ڈالیو۔ بلکہ مراد یہ ہے کہ جس طرح ان پر احکام الٰہی کے توڑنے پر ذمہ داری ڈالی گئی تھی اور وہ ثواب کے کاموں سے محروم ہو گئے تھے اسی طرح ہم پر ذمہ داری نہ ڈالی جائے۔ یعنی ہم عہد شکن ہو کر ثواب کے کاموں سے م
3
حَمَّلَہٗ: جَعَلَہٗ یَحْمِلُہٗ۔ اس سے بوجھ اٹھوایا (اقرب) اس سے مراد بھی عذاب ہے‘ یعنی ایسا عذاب ہم پر نہ آئے کہ ہم کچلے جائیں اور پھر اٹھنے کی طاقت نہ رہے۔ چنانچہ اس سے آگے ’’درگذر کر‘‘ کے الفاظ اس مفہوم کو واضح کر دیتے ہیں۔
4
قَوْمٌ کے معنے لوگوں کی ایک جماعت کے ہوتے ہیں۔ رشتہ داروں اور قریبیوں کے لئے بھی یہ لفظ بولا جاتا ہے (اقرب) پس قوم کے معنے لازما ً قوم کے نہیں ہوتے بلکہ ہر اس گروہ پر یہ لفظ بولا جاتا ہے جو ایک مقصد پر جمع ہوں۔ چونکہ کفار مسلمانوں کے خلاف جمع تھے اس لئے وہ ایک قوم کہلانے کے مستحق تھے۔ قَوْم کے معنے دشمنوں کے بھی ہوتے ہیں (اقرب) ان معنوں کی رو سے آیت کے یہ معنے ہوں گے کہ کافر دشمنوں کے خلاف ہماری مدد کر۔ یہ معنے زیادہ لطیف ہیں لیکن چونکہ عام طور پر لوگ ان معنوں سے واقف نہیں۔ میں نے ترجمہ مشہور معنوں کی رو سے کر دیا ہے تا طبائع پر گراں نہ گذرے۔
a
See 2:234.
b
3:148.
292A
Important Words:
اصرا (responsibility). They say اصرالشیء i.e. he broke the thing. اصرہ means, be confined or detained or debarred him; he held him in custody or he restrained him. اصرالخیمة means, he provided the tent with a peg or a rope for tying. اصر (isr.) or اصر (asr) or اصر (usr) means: (1) a burden which restrains one from motion; (2) a burdensome covenant or a heavy responsibility the breaking of which makes one deserving of punishment; (3) a sin, or an offence; and (4) grievous punishment of a sin (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
The clause, Allah burdens not any soul beyond its capacity, is a powerful refutation of the doctrine of Atonement. It embodies two important principles: (1) That the commandments of God are always given with due regard for human capacities and weaknesses. (2) That purification in this world does not necessarily signify complete freedom from all kinds of failings and shortcomings. All that man is expected to do is sincerely to strive after good and avoid sin to the best of his power, and the rest will be forgiven him by the Merciful God. So no atonement is needed.
The word کسب (earns) has been used here with regard to the doing of good deeds and اکتسب (incurs) for the doing of evil deeds. They are from the same root but the latter denotes greater exertion. Thus the words hint that a man will be rewarded for good deeds even if they are done casually and without concentrated effort, while he will be punished for his evil deeds only if they are committed deliberately and with concentrated effort.
In ordinary circumstances, نسیان (forgetfulness) and خطاء (error) are not punishable, for they lack intention or motive which are necessary for punishment. But here the words denote a forgetfulness and an error which might have been avoided, if due care had been exercised.
As explained under Important Words above, the word اصر (responsibility) has several connot-ations, all of which are applicable here. Hence, the verse may also be translated as (a) Impose not on us a sin, i.e. enable us to avoid sin and prevent us from the doing of deeds which might make us stumble; (b) Do not punish us if we commit some sin or break some covenant; (c) Taking the expression لاتحمل علینا to mean, as it literally does, do not make it ride us or do not mount it on us, the clause may also be rendered as, do not make a responsibility or a covenant mount on us as Thou didst mount it on those before us. The simile is beautiful. divine covenants are meant to help the people in their onward march; but sometimes, through abuse or breach, they become a burden, instead of a help, thus turning into a rider in place of a riding beast. Muslims are taught to pray against such an eventuality.
The words, lay not on us a responsibility as Thou didst lay upon those before us, do not mean that Muslims have been taught to wish for lighter burdens. The facts of history belie that inference. The words only mean that God may help Muslims to fulfil their responsibilities and to avoid sins as well as the consequences thereof. The previous peoples were entrusted with some responsibilities and given certain commandments which were all for their own good, but many of them failed to fulfil them and also rejected Islam to which they had been invited and thus turned a blissful guidance into a veritable means of incurring God’s displeasure. Thus, they were virtually laid under an isr or a burdensome responsibility. Muslims, being the bearers of the final and universal Shari‘ah, have been exhorted to set a better example and pray to God for success in their great task and in the fulfilment of their heavy responsibilities. The laying of burden or burdensome responsibility has been attributed to God just as in the Quranic idiom ضلالة (misguidance) is sometimes attributed to Him for which see 2:7.
The clause, lay not on us a responsibility as Thou didst lay on those before us, may also refer to Christians particularly who, by declaring the Law to be a curse, converted a divine mercy into an isr, i.e. a burden and a punishment. Muslims are thus taught to pray that for them the Shari‘ah may always remain a mercy. In this case the verse comes as a fitting preamble to the succeeding Surah of which Christianity forms the special theme.
The clause, and efface our sins and grant us Forgiveness and have Mercy on us, comprises three important invocations placed in perfect order. They not only correspond to the preceding three prayers but also constitute a perfect manifestation of a perfect treatment on the part of a perfect Master. فاعف عنا means that God may efface our sins and leave out no trace of them to be seen by men. اغفرلنا means that He may not only efface our sins but also grant us forgiveness so that He Himself may treat them as non-existent. And ارحمنا means that God may not only efface our sins and forgive us but also show positive mercy to us.
The concluding clause, help us Thou against the disbelieving people, provides a fitting ending to the Surah. The Muslims are out for a great struggle. The entire world of کفر (disbelief) is arrayed against them and the field of work, as hinted in Abraham’s prayer (2:130), is wide and far-stretched, extending over (1) heavenly signs, (2) laws and covenants, (3) wisdom and philosophy, (4) morals and spirituality, and (5) general progress. This was a stupendous task and unless God came to their help, there was little hope for that tiny Muslim community that was just emerging into existence. But God did come to their help.
a
3:148.
c
See 2:234.
359
The clause constitutes a powerful refutation of the doctrine of Atonement. It embodies two important principles: (1) That the commandments of God are always given with due regard for man’s capacities and his natural limitations. (2) That moral purification in this world does not necessarily signify complete freedom from all kinds of failings and shortcomings. All that man is expected to do is sincerely to strive for good and avoid sin to the best of his power, and the rest will be forgiven him by the Merciful God. So no Atonement is needed.
360
The word Kasaba generally denotes the doing of good deeds and Iktasaba the doing of evil deeds. Both words are from the same root but the latter denotes greater exertion on the part of the doer. A man will be rewarded for good deeds even if they are done casually and without conscious effort, while he will be punished for his evil deeds only if they are committed deliberately and with conscious effort.
361
In ordinary circumstances, Nisyan and Khati’ah are not punishable for they lack intention or motive which are necessary for awarding punishment. But here the words denote forgetfulness and error which can be avoided if due care is taken.
362
Isr means, (1) a burden which restrains one from motion; (2) a heavy responsibility the breaking of which renders one deserving of punishment; (3) a sin or an offence; and (4) grievous punishment of a sin. The expression 'lay not on us a responsibility as Thou didst lay upon those before us,' does not mean that the burden to be laid upon us should be lighter than that which was laid upon those before us. The meaning is that we may be safeguarded against breaking Thy covenant and thus may be saved from incurring a heavy responsibility for disobedience as was incurred by those before us. This is a collective prayer for the preservation and protection of Islam and the safeguarding of Muslims against incurring the displeasure of God.
مِن قَبْلُ هُدًى لِّلنَّاسِ وَأَنزَلَ ٱلْفُرْقَانَ ۗ إِنَّ ٱلَّذِينَ كَفَرُوا۟ بِـَٔايَٰتِ ٱللَّهِ لَهُمْ عَذَابٌ شَدِيدٌ ۗ وَٱللَّهُ عَزِيزٌ ذُو ٱنتِقَامٍ
5:96; 14:48; 39:38.
2:54, 186; 8:42; 21:49; 25:2.
Al-Furqan may refer to the Qur’an or to the heavenly signs vouchsafed to the Holy Prophet which establish his truth.
2:54, 186; 8:42; 21:49; 25:2.
5:96; 14:48; 39:38.
Important Words:
ذوانتقام (Possessor of the power to requite). انتقام is the noun-infinitive from نقم i.e. he took vengeance. They say نقم منه or انتقم منه meaning, he wreaked vengeance on him; he punished him; he inflicted penal retribution on him for what he had done. نقمة and انتقام both mean, vengeance or penal retribution or punishment (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
The words, and He has sent down the Discrimination, placed at the end of the verse refer to the Quran, the coming down of which has already been mentioned in the beginning of the verse. The idea has been repeated here to point out that the Quran has come to take the place of the previous scriptures, the word "Discrimination" also pointing to the same fact. The word may also refer to the heavenly signs vouchsafed to Islam to establish its truth.
For an explanation of the term مصدق (fulfilling) see 2:42.
After the coming down of the Quran as a "Discrimination" and as "fulfilling" what is in the previous scriptures, the persistent rejection of the Holy Prophet becomes indeed deserving of great punishment, and the verse points out that the God of Islam being "Mighty" and "Possessor of the power to requite", those who have rejected the truth must be prepared for divine requital.
e
2:54, 186; 8:42; 21:49; 25:2.
f
5:96; 14:48; 39:38.
223
اَلْفُرْقَانْ (Al-Furqan) 可能指«古兰经», 或指惠予穆圣创立其真理的安拉的迹象。
a
2:54, 186; 8:42; 21:49; 25:2.
b
5:96; 14:48; 39:38.
296
Important Words:
ذوانتقام (Possessor of the power to requite). انتقام is the noun-infinitive from نقم i.e. he took vengeance. They say نقم منه or انتقم منه meaning, he wreaked vengeance on him; he punished him; he inflicted penal retribution on him for what he had done. نقمة and انتقام both mean, vengeance or penal retribution or punishment (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
The words, and He has sent down the Discrimination, placed at the end of the verse refer to the Quran, the coming down of which has already been mentioned in the beginning of the verse. The idea has been repeated here to point out that the Quran has come to take the place of the previous scriptures, the word "Discrimination" also pointing to the same fact. The word may also refer to the heavenly signs vouchsafed to Islam to establish its truth.
For an explanation of the term مصدق (fulfilling) see 2:42.
After the coming down of the Quran as a "Discrimination" and as "fulfilling" what is in the previous scriptures, the persistent rejection of the Holy Prophet becomes indeed deserving of great punishment, and the verse points out that the God of Islam being "Mighty" and "Possessor of the power to requite", those who have rejected the truth must be prepared for divine requital.
a
5:96; 14:48; 39:38.
b
2:54, 186; 8:42; 21:49; 25:2.
367
Al-Furqan may refer to the Qur’an or to the heavenly signs vouchsafed to the Holy Prophet which establish his truth.
رَبَّنَا لَا تُزِغْ قُلُوبَنَا بَعْدَ إِذْ هَدَيْتَنَا وَهَبْ لَنَا مِن لَّدُنكَ رَحْمَةً ۚ إِنَّكَ أَنتَ ٱلْوَهَّابُ
只有那些心灵纯洁的人才能正确理解 «古兰经» (56:80)。
The right knowledge of the Qur’an is vouchsafed only to those who are pure of heart (56:80).
Important Words:
الوھاب (Bestower) is derived from وھب i.e. he gave or he bestowed. وھب له مالا means, he gave or bestowed property on him. ھبة which is the noun-infinitive from وھب means: (1) the act of giving a person something without receiving anything in return; (2) the thing so given. الوھاب which is the intensive form of واھب (giver) means, one who gives greatly and extensively (Aqrab). The word is used about God because He gives to each and every one of His creatures according to his deserts and none is overlooked (Mufradat).
Commentary:
The verse, which comprises a very important prayer, comes as a fitting sequel to the preceding verse. It points out the great truth that not unoften a people receive a favour or blessing from God, which sometimes later proves a means of stumbling for them. They abuse the favour of God or misinterpret divine guidance and thus bring about their ruin. This is what happened to the Christians; and Muslims are warned to be watchful against this source of error and ever to pray to God to protect them against it. See also 1:7.
The verse also hints that dissension and straying away from the truth would be the lot of Muslims if they subordinated decisive verses to those ambiguous, and fundamentals to matters of secondary importance. This is why the Holy Prophetsaused to recite this prayer constantly, which fact implied an instruction to his followers to do the same. Indeed, there could be no greater tragedy than, having once found the right path, to go astray, and, having once received Divine favour, to become the object of His anger.
The verse also draws attention to the fact that the error of interpreting متشابھات in a manner which is at variance with محکمات (see preceding verse) can only be avoided through the purification of the heart and through prayer. The right knowledge of the Quran is vouchsafed only to those who are pure of heart. In this connection see also 56:80.
229
只有那些心灵纯洁的人才能正确理解 «古兰经» (56:80)。
300
Important Words:
الوھاب (Bestower) is derived from وھب i.e. he gave or he bestowed. وھب له مالا means, he gave or bestowed property on him. ھبة which is the noun-infinitive from وھب means: (1) the act of giving a person something without receiving anything in return; (2) the thing so given. الوھاب which is the intensive form of واھب (giver) means, one who gives greatly and extensively (Aqrab). The word is used about God because He gives to each and every one of His creatures according to his deserts and none is overlooked (Mufradat).
Commentary:
The verse, which comprises a very important prayer, comes as a fitting sequel to the preceding verse. It points out the great truth that not unoften a people receive a favour or blessing from God, which sometimes later proves a means of stumbling for them. They abuse the favour of God or misinterpret divine guidance and thus bring about their ruin. This is what happened to the Christians; and Muslims are warned to be watchful against this source of error and ever to pray to God to protect them against it. See also 1:7.
The verse also hints that dissension and straying away from the truth would be the lot of Muslims if they subordinated decisive verses to those ambiguous, and fundamentals to matters of secondary importance. This is why the Holy Prophetsaused to recite this prayer constantly, which fact implied an instruction to his followers to do the same. Indeed, there could be no greater tragedy than, having once found the right path, to go astray, and, having once received Divine favour, to become the object of His anger.
The verse also draws attention to the fact that the error of interpreting متشابھات in a manner which is at variance with محکمات (see preceding verse) can only be avoided through the purification of the heart and through prayer. The right knowledge of the Quran is vouchsafed only to those who are pure of heart. In this connection see also 56:80.
374
The right knowledge of the Qur’an is vouchsafed only to those who are pure of heart (56:80).
كَدَأْبِ ءَالِ فِرْعَوْنَ وَٱلَّذِينَ مِن قَبْلِهِمْ ۚ كَذَّبُوا۟ بِـَٔايَٰتِنَا فَأَخَذَهُمُ ٱللَّهُ بِذُنُوبِهِمْ ۗ وَٱللَّهُ شَدِيدُ ٱلْعِقَابِ
8:53, 55.
8:53, 55.
Important Words:
دأب (case) is the noun-infinitive from دأب. They say دأب فی العمل i.e. (1) he laboured and strove hard and exerted and wearied himself in the work; (2) he remained constant in it. دأب means, working hard and constantly; habit, custom or manner; case, affair or condition (Aqrab).
Commentary:
In the previous verse disbelievers were warned that their wealth and their numbers would prove of no avail against God’s punishment. The present verse points to the fact that this warning was no idle threat. Disbelievers in the past had met with a similar fate. Just as the efforts of Pharaoh and his people against Moses proved futile and their wealth, numbers and power could not save them from destruction, so would the endeavours of those who rejected the Holy Prophet not only fail to retard the progress of Islam but would pave the way for their own ruin.
a
8:53, 55.
a
8:53, 55.
303
Important Words:
دأب (case) is the noun-infinitive from دأب. They say دأب فی العمل i.e. (1) he laboured and strove hard and exerted and wearied himself in the work; (2) he remained constant in it. دأب means, working hard and constantly; habit, custom or manner; case, affair or condition (Aqrab).
Commentary:
In the previous verse disbelievers were warned that their wealth and their numbers would prove of no avail against God’s punishment. The present verse points to the fact that this warning was no idle threat. Disbelievers in the past had met with a similar fate. Just as the efforts of Pharaoh and his people against Moses proved futile and their wealth, numbers and power could not save them from destruction, so would the endeavours of those who rejected the Holy Prophet not only fail to retard the progress of Islam but would pave the way for their own ruin.
c
8:53, 55.
376
Da’b means, habit, custom or manner; case, affair or condition (Aqrab).
۞ قُلْ أَؤُنَبِّئُكُم بِخَيْرٍ مِّن ذَٰلِكُمْ ۚ لِلَّذِينَ ٱتَّقَوْا۟ عِندَ رَبِّهِمْ جَنَّٰتٌ تَجْرِى مِن تَحْتِهَا ٱلْأَنْهَٰرُ خَٰلِدِينَ فِيهَا وَأَزْوَٰجٌ مُّطَهَّرَةٌ وَرِضْوَٰنٌ مِّنَ ٱللَّهِ ۗ وَٱللَّهُ بَصِيرٌۢ بِٱلْعِبَادِ
8:47; 19:77.
See 2:26.
3:163, 175; 5:3; 9:72; 48:30; 59:9.
18:47; 19:77.
See 2:26.
3:163, 175; 5:3; 9:72; 48:30; 59:9.
Important Words:
رضوان (pleasure) is derived from رضی i.e. he was pleased; he was well pleased; he was satisfied or contented; he regarded (him) with good-will or favour. رضوان which is the noun-infinitive from رضی means, the state of being well pleased; satisfaction; good-will (Lane). As رضوان signifies abundant pleasure or satisfaction, the word has come to be used in the Quran in connection with God only (Mufradat). رضوان is also the name of the keeper or guardian angel of Paradise (Lane).
Commentary:
Though Islam does not object to the acquisition of the good things of this world, yet the good things of the life to come are far greater and nobler for man. And greater still is the pleasure or good-will of God which the Quran mentions as the greatest blessing (9:72). For one who succeeds in attaining it, even worldly things become a source of peace of mind. The Companions of the Holy Prophet attained it (9:100) and so they have been rightly called "the best people" (3:111).
g
8:47; 19:77.
h
2:26.
i
3:163, 175; 5:3; 9:72; 48:30; 59:9.
a
18:47; 19:77.
b
See 2:26.
c
3:163, 175; 5:3; 9:72; 48:30; 59:9.
307
Important Words:
رضوان (pleasure) is derived from رضی i.e. he was pleased; he was well pleased; he was satisfied or contented; he regarded (him) with good-will or favour. رضوان which is the noun-infinitive from رضی means, the state of being well pleased; satisfaction; good-will (Lane). As رضوان signifies abundant pleasure or satisfaction, the word has come to be used in the Quran in connection with God only (Mufradat). رضوان is also the name of the keeper or guardian angel of Paradise (Lane).
Commentary:
Though Islam does not object to the acquisition of the good things of this world, yet the good things of the life to come are far greater and nobler for man. And greater still is the pleasure or good-will of God which the Quran mentions as the greatest blessing (9:72). For one who succeeds in attaining it, even worldly things become a source of peace of mind. The Companions of the Holy Prophet attained it (9:100) and so they have been rightly called "the best people" (3:111).
a
8:47; 19:77.
b
See 2:26.
c
3:163, 175; 5:3; 9:72; 48:30; 59:9.
لَّا يَتَّخِذِ ٱلْمُؤْمِنُونَ ٱلْكَٰفِرِينَ أَوْلِيَآءَ مِن دُونِ ٱلْمُؤْمِنِينَ ۖ وَمَن يَفْعَلْ ذَٰلِكَ فَلَيْسَ مِنَ ٱللَّهِ فِى شَىْءٍ إِلَّآ أَن تَتَّقُوا۟ مِنْهُمْ تُقَىٰةً ۗ وَيُحَذِّرُكُمُ ٱللَّهُ نَفْسَهُۥ ۗ وَإِلَى ٱللَّهِ ٱلْمَصِيرُ
3:119; 4:140, 145.
3:119; 4:140, 145.
With the accession of political power to Islam, as promised in the preceding verses, forging of political alliances became necessary for the Muslim State. The verse under comment embodies the guiding principle that no Muslim State should enter into treaty or alliance with a non-Muslim State which should in any way injure, or conflict with, the interests of other Muslim States. The interests of Islam should transcend all other interests.
Muslims are warned to be on their guard against the plots and machinations of disbelievers. The expression, except that you guard yourselves fully against them, refers not to the power of the enemy but to his cunning of which Muslims should always be on their guard.
Nafs means, a person’s self; purpose; will or desire; punishment, etc. (Aqrab).
3:119; 4:140, 145.
Important Words:
نفسه (His punishment). نفس is the noun-infinitive from نفس (nafusa) which literally means, it was or became loved and highly esteemed. نفس به (nafisa) means, he was tenacious or niggardly of it. نفس means, the soul; the spirit; the mind; the body; a person or being; a person’s or being’s self; brother or relative, or one belonging to one’s own religion; purpose, will or desire; punishment, etc. (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
With the advent of political power to Islam, as promised in the preceding verses, the contracting of political alliances became necessary for the Muslim State. The verse under comment embodies the guiding principle that no Muslim state should enter into any treaty or alliance with a non-Muslim state which should in any way injure, or conflict with, the interests of other Muslim states. The interests of Islam should transcend all other interests.
The phrase, in preference to believers, means: (1) that Muslims should not form friendly relations with disbelievers in preference to believers, shunning the latter and seeking the former; (2) that they should not form any connection with disbelievers in a way that may harm the interests of Muslims. They are, however, free to contract friendly relations with such non-Muslims as are friendly to them, according to the exigencies of time and circumstances (60:9, 10).
The verse also instructs Muslims to be on their guard against the plots and machinations of disbelievers. The expression, except that you cautiously guard against them, refers not to the power of the enemy but to his cunning against which Muslims should always be on their guard.
The clause ویحذرکم الله نفسه rendered as And Allah cautions you against His punishment, may also be translated as "and Allah cautions or warns you concerning Himself", meaning that if you do not faithfully accept the guidance of God, and make friends with disbelievers in preference to believers, you will lose God, Who will in that case have no connection with you.
e
3:119; 4:140, 145.
a
3:119; 4:140, 145.
319
Important Words:
نفسه (His punishment). نفس is the noun-infinitive from نفس (nafusa) which literally means, it was or became loved and highly esteemed. نفس به (nafisa) means, he was tenacious or niggardly of it. نفس means, the soul; the spirit; the mind; the body; a person or being; a person’s or being’s self; brother or relative, or one belonging to one’s own religion; purpose, will or desire; punishment, etc. (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
With the advent of political power to Islam, as promised in the preceding verses, the contracting of political alliances became necessary for the Muslim State. The verse under comment embodies the guiding principle that no Muslim state should enter into any treaty or alliance with a non-Muslim state which should in any way injure, or conflict with, the interests of other Muslim states. The interests of Islam should transcend all other interests.
The phrase, in preference to believers, means: (1) that Muslims should not form friendly relations with disbelievers in preference to believers, shunning the latter and seeking the former; (2) that they should not form any connection with disbelievers in a way that may harm the interests of Muslims. They are, however, free to contract friendly relations with such non-Muslims as are friendly to them, according to the exigencies of time and circumstances (60:9, 10).
The verse also instructs Muslims to be on their guard against the plots and machinations of disbelievers. The expression, except that you cautiously guard against them, refers not to the power of the enemy but to his cunning against which Muslims should always be on their guard.
The clause ویحذرکم الله نفسه rendered as And Allah cautions you against His punishment, may also be translated as "and Allah cautions or warns you concerning Himself", meaning that if you do not faithfully accept the guidance of God, and make friends with disbelievers in preference to believers, you will lose God, Who will in that case have no connection with you.
a
3:119; 4:140, 145.
395
With the accession of political power to Islam, as promised in the preceding verses, forging of political alliances became necessary for the Muslim State. The verse under comment embodies the guiding principle that no Muslim State should enter into treaty or alliance with a non-Muslim State which should in any way injure, or conflict with, the interests of other Muslim States. The interests of Islam should transcend all other interests.
396
Muslims are warned to be on their guard against the plots and machinations of disbelievers. The expression, except that you guard yourselves fully against them, refers not to the power of the enemy but to his cunning of which Muslims should always be on their guard.
397
Nafs means, a person’s self; purpose; will or desire; punishment, etc. (Aqrab).
يَوْمَ تَجِدُ كُلُّ نَفْسٍ مَّا عَمِلَتْ مِنْ خَيْرٍ مُّحْضَرًا وَمَا عَمِلَتْ مِن سُوٓءٍ تَوَدُّ لَوْ أَنَّ بَيْنَهَا وَبَيْنَهُۥٓ أَمَدًۢا بَعِيدًا ۗ وَيُحَذِّرُكُمُ ٱللَّهُ نَفْسَهُۥ ۗ وَٱللَّهُ رَءُوفٌۢ بِٱلْعِبَادِ
18:50.
18:50.
18:50.
Important Words:
رؤوف (Most Compassionate) is one of the attributes of God. It is derived from رأف meaning, he pitied him or had compassion on him; he pitied or compassionated him tenderly or in the utmost degree (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
For the meaning of the clause, And Allah cautions you against His punishment, see 3:29 above.
b
18:50.
a
18:50.
321
Important Words:
رؤوف (Most Compassionate) is one of the attributes of God. It is derived from رأف meaning, he pitied him or had compassion on him; he pitied or compassionated him tenderly or in the utmost degree (Lane & Aqrab).
Commentary:
For the meaning of the clause, And Allah cautions you against His punishment, see 3:29 above.
a
18:50.
هُنَالِكَ دَعَا زَكَرِيَّا رَبَّهُۥ ۖ قَالَ رَبِّ هَبْ لِى مِن لَّدُنكَ ذُرِّيَّةً طَيِّبَةً ۖ إِنَّكَ سَمِيعُ ٱلدُّعَآءِ
19:6-7; 21:90-91.
19:6-7; 21:90-91.
The pious reply of the child made a deep impression on the mind of Zachariah and awakened in the depths of his soul the latent and natural desire of possessing a similarly virtuous child of his own. He prayed to God to be blessed with a child like Mary. The prayer was probably repeated over a length of period as it is mentioned in varying words in different parts of the Qur’an (3:39; 19:4-7; 21:90).
19:6, 7; 21: 90, 91.
Commentary:
Deeply touched by the little girl’s reply, Zachariah was moved there and then to pray to God to be blessed with a pious child like Mary. The prayer was probably repeated over a length of period as it is mentioned in varying words in different parts of the Quran (3:39; 19:5-7; 21:90). This finds further support in the fact that whereas the first prayer was offered when Mary was yet a child, the birth of a son to Zachariah actually took place when Mary had grown up to womanhood, Jesus and John (Yahya) being nearly of the same age. Or what is equally probable, the prayer of Zachariah was accepted at the very beginning and God gave him the promise of a child at the very first prayer offered; but, after the manner of pious men, he still continued to pray for the bestowal of the promised gift.
a
19:6-7; 21:90-91.
a
19:6, 7; 21: 90, 91.
329
Commentary:
Deeply touched by the little girl’s reply, Zachariah was moved there and then to pray to God to be blessed with a pious child like Mary. The prayer was probably repeated over a length of period as it is mentioned in varying words in different parts of the Quran (3:39; 19:5-7; 21:90). This finds further support in the fact that whereas the first prayer was offered when Mary was yet a child, the birth of a son to Zachariah actually took place when Mary had grown up to womanhood, Jesus and John (Yahya) being nearly of the same age. Or what is equally probable, the prayer of Zachariah was accepted at the very beginning and God gave him the promise of a child at the very first prayer offered; but, after the manner of pious men, he still continued to pray for the bestowal of the promised gift.
a
19:6-7; 21:90-91.
405
The pious reply of the child made a deep impression on the mind of Zachariah and awakened in the depths of his soul the latent and natural desire of possessing a similarly virtuous child of his own. He prayed to God to be blessed with a child like Mary. The prayer was probably repeated over a length of period as it is mentioned in varying words in different parts of the Qur’an (3:39; 19:4-7; 21:90).
إِنَّ مَثَلَ عِيسَىٰ عِندَ ٱللَّهِ كَمَثَلِ ءَادَمَ ۖ خَلَقَهُۥ مِن تُرَابٍ ثُمَّ قَالَ لَهُۥ كُن فَيَكُونُ
阿丹原来要代表人类,即阿丹的子孙。因而说伊撒像其他从泥土中创造出来的凡人 (40:68), 所以他不可能是上帝 (安拉)。然而, 如果 “阿丹” 这字用来指人类的祖先, 那么, 此节经文就能用来说明伊撒和阿丹之间的相似之处: 他们没有父亲就可降生。既然是这样, 伊撒有个母亲这一事实不会影响如上所述的这种相似性, 它不需要在各方面都完全相似。
«古兰经» 中另外一处说人是从泥土中生出来的 (6:3)。“尘土” 和 “泥土” 两词所表示的不同概念是: 用 “尘土” 这词时, 不含有启示 (精神的水) 的意思; 而用 “泥土” 这词时, 同时也表示有启示的概念。
معلوم ہوا کہ باقی وجودوں کی طرح قرآن کریم کے رو سے عیسٰیؑ بھی مٹی سے پیدا ہوئے تھے اور ان کو کوئی غیر معمولی اہمیت حاصل نہ تھی۔ کیونکہ جتنے لوگ ماں باپ سے پیدا ہوتے ہیں قرآن کریم کے محاورہ میں وہ بھی مٹی سے پیدا ہوتے ہیں۔
شیطان کے ذکر میں اور کئی دوسری آیات میں آدم کی پیدائش طِیْن سے بتائی گئی ہے یعنی ایسی مٹی جس میں الہام کا پانی ملا ہوا تھا۔ لیکن ان آیات میں آدمؑ اور عیسٰیؑ دونوں کی پیدائش تُرَاب سے بتائی گئی ہے یعنی ایسی مٹی جس میں الہام کی آمیزش نہ تھی۔ ان دونوں بیانات میں کوئی اختلاف نہیں کیونکہ آدم سے مراد یہاں آدم نہیں اور عیسیٰ سے مراد صرف عیسیٰ نہیں بلکہ آدم اور ابنائے آدم اور عیسیٰ اور اَتباعِ عیسیٰ مراد ہیں اور ان لوگوں میں سے ایک جماعت الہام کو نظر انداز کرنے والی تھی۔ پس بحیثیت جماعت دونوں کی پیدائش تُرَاب سے قرار دی گئی۔
Adam primarily stands for man, i.e. the sons of Adam generally. Jesus is thus declared to be like other mortals who have all been created from dust (40:68), and so there can be no Divinity about him. If, however, the word "Adam" be taken to refer to the progenitor of the human race, then the verse would be taken to point to the resemblance between Jesus and Adam in being born without the agency of a male parent. In this case, the fact that Jesus had a mother would not affect the likeness which, as stated above, need not be complete in all respects.
Elsewhere, man is stated to have been born out of clay (6:3). The difference sought to be indicated by the use of 'dust' and 'clay' is that when the word 'dust' is used, the idea of revelation (heavenly water) is not implied, but where 'clay' is used the idea of revelation is also indicated.
Commentary:
The word مثل (case) is used to express resemblance, which may be of different kind and different degrees. Sometimes, the thing likened is equal to that to which it is likened, sometimes the former is superior to the latter, and sometimes the latter is superior to the former. So it is not necessary that the thing likened to another should be equal, or ever similar, to the latter in all respects. The likeness between Adam and Jesus referred to in this verse, may, therefore, not be stretched too far.
In the verse the word 'Adam' primarily stands for man, i.e. the sons of Adam generally. Jesus is thus declared to be like other mortals who have all been created from dust (40:68), and so there can be no divinity about him. If, however, the word 'Adam' be taken to refer to the progenitor of the human race, then the verse would be taken to point to the resemblance between Jesus and Adam in being born without the agency of a male parent. In this case, the fact that Jesus had a mother would not affect the likeness which, as stated above, need not be complete in all respects.
The words, then He said to him, "Be" and he was, show that the command refers not to the birth of Jesus (for the fact of his creation has already been mentioned in the words خلقه i.e. He created him, occurring in the preceding part of the verse), but to his death. The use of the word کن (Be) in relation to death should not sound odd, for, according to the teaching of Islam, death is not the end of life but simply a change, the beginning of a new life. The meaning in this case would be that after having created Jesus and having allowed him the prescribed lease of life in this world, God caused him to die and took his soul away to the next world. The expression, "Be" and he was, may also refer to the creation or birth of Jesus in the sense that, after giving him the human form in the womb of his mother, God said to him "Be", i.e. become quickened with life, whereupon he became alive. Again, the reference may also be to the spiritual life, i.e. after creating Jesus in the form of a man, God called upon him to become a Prophet, which was the ultimate end of his creation, and consequently he became a Prophet. Whatever the interpretation, the verse constitutes a clear refutation of the Christian belief in the divinity of Jesus on the plea of his unusual birth.
As for the creation of man from تراب (dust), we shall give a suitable note when we come to the verses directly dealing with the subject.
251
阿丹原来要代表人类,即阿丹的子孙。因而说伊撒像其他从泥土中创造出来的凡人 (40:68), 所以他不可能是上帝 (安拉)。然而, 如果 “阿丹” 这字用来指人类的祖先, 那么, 此节经文就能用来说明伊撒和阿丹之间的相似之处: 他们没有父亲就可降生。既然是这样, 伊撒有个母亲这一事实不会影响如上所述的这种相似性, 它不需要在各方面都完全相似。
252
«古兰经» 中另外一处说人是从泥土中生出来的 (6:3)。“尘土” 和 “泥土” 两词所表示的不同概念是: 用 “尘土” 这词时, 不含有启示 (精神的水) 的意思; 而用 “泥土” 这词时, 同时也表示有启示的概念。
1
معلوم ہوا کہ باقی وجودوں کی طرح قرآن کریم کے رو سے عیسٰیؑ بھی مٹی سے پیدا ہوئے تھے اور ان کو کوئی غیر معمولی اہمیت حاصل نہ تھی۔ کیونکہ جتنے لوگ ماں باپ سے پیدا ہوتے ہیں قرآن کریم کے محاورہ میں وہ بھی مٹی سے پیدا ہوتے ہیں۔
2
شیطان کے ذکر میں اور کئی دوسری آیات میں آدم کی پیدائش طِیْن سے بتائی گئی ہے یعنی ایسی مٹی جس میں الہام کا پانی ملا ہوا تھا۔ لیکن ان آیات میں آدمؑ اور عیسٰیؑ دونوں کی پیدائش تُرَاب سے بتائی گئی ہے یعنی ایسی مٹی جس میں الہام کی آمیزش نہ تھی۔ ان دونوں بیانات میں کوئی اختلاف نہیں کیونکہ آدم سے مراد یہاں آدم نہیں اور عیسیٰ سے مراد صرف عیسیٰ نہیں بلکہ آدم اور ابنائے آدم اور عیسیٰ اور اَتباعِ عیسیٰ مراد ہیں اور ان لوگوں میں سے ایک جماعت الہام کو نظر انداز کرنے والی تھی۔ پس بحیثیت جماعت دونوں کی پیدائش تُرَاب سے قرار دی گئی۔
348
Commentary:
The word مثل (case) is used to express resemblance, which may be of different kind and different degrees. Sometimes, the thing likened is equal to that to which it is likened, sometimes the former is superior to the latter, and sometimes the latter is superior to the former. So it is not necessary that the thing likened to another should be equal, or ever similar, to the latter in all respects. The likeness between Adam and Jesus referred to in this verse, may, therefore, not be stretched too far.
In the verse the word 'Adam' primarily stands for man, i.e. the sons of Adam generally. Jesus is thus declared to be like other mortals who have all been created from dust (40:68), and so there can be no divinity about him. If, however, the word 'Adam' be taken to refer to the progenitor of the human race, then the verse would be taken to point to the resemblance between Jesus and Adam in being born without the agency of a male parent. In this case, the fact that Jesus had a mother would not affect the likeness which, as stated above, need not be complete in all respects.
The words, then He said to him, "Be" and he was, show that the command refers not to the birth of Jesus (for the fact of his creation has already been mentioned in the words خلقه i.e. He created him, occurring in the preceding part of the verse), but to his death. The use of the word کن (Be) in relation to death should not sound odd, for, according to the teaching of Islam, death is not the end of life but simply a change, the beginning of a new life. The meaning in this case would be that after having created Jesus and having allowed him the prescribed lease of life in this world, God caused him to die and took his soul away to the next world. The expression, "Be" and he was, may also refer to the creation or birth of Jesus in the sense that, after giving him the human form in the womb of his mother, God said to him "Be", i.e. become quickened with life, whereupon he became alive. Again, the reference may also be to the spiritual life, i.e. after creating Jesus in the form of a man, God called upon him to become a Prophet, which was the ultimate end of his creation, and consequently he became a Prophet. Whatever the interpretation, the verse constitutes a clear refutation of the Christian belief in the divinity of Jesus on the plea of his unusual birth.
As for the creation of man from تراب (dust), we shall give a suitable note when we come to the verses directly dealing with the subject.
425
Adam primarily stands for man, i.e. the sons of Adam generally. Jesus is thus declared to be like other mortals who have all been created from dust (40:68), and so there can be no Divinity about him. If, however, the word "Adam" be taken to refer to the progenitor of the human race, then the verse would be taken to point to the resemblance between Jesus and Adam in being born without the agency of a male parent. In this case, the fact that Jesus had a mother would not affect the likeness which, as stated above, need not be complete in all respects.
425A
Elsewhere, man is stated to have been born out of clay (6:3). The difference sought to be indicated by the use of 'dust' and 'clay' is that when the word 'dust' is used, the idea of revelation (heavenly water) is not implied, but where 'clay' is used the idea of revelation is also indicated.
ٱلْحَقُّ مِن رَّبِّكَ فَلَا تَكُن مِّنَ ٱلْمُمْتَرِينَ
2:148; 6:115; 10:95.
2:148; 6:115; 10:95.
2:148; 6:115; 10:95.
Important Words:
مـمترین (those who doubt) means: (1) those who doubt; (2) those who contest and raise objections (see also 2:148). Both meanings are applicable here.
Commentary:
As حق (truth) also signifies an established fact or an established truth (2:148 & 3:4), the verse hints that as now the fact has been established beyond doubt or controversy that there was nothing in Jesus above an ordinary mortal, so there is truly no possibility of doubt or difference of opinion in the matter.
a
2:148; 6:115; 10:95.
a
2:148; 6:115; 10:95.
349
Important Words:
مـمترین (those who doubt) means: (1) those who doubt; (2) those who contest and raise objections (see also 2:148). Both meanings are applicable here.
Commentary:
As حق (truth) also signifies an established fact or an established truth (2:148 & 3:4), the verse hints that as now the fact has been established beyond doubt or controversy that there was nothing in Jesus above an ordinary mortal, so there is truly no possibility of doubt or difference of opinion in the matter.
b
2:148; 6:115; 10:95.
مَا كَانَ لِبَشَرٍ أَن يُؤْتِيَهُ ٱللَّهُ ٱلْكِتَٰبَ وَٱلْحُكْمَ وَٱلنُّبُوَّةَ ثُمَّ يَقُولَ لِلنَّاسِ كُونُوا۟ عِبَادًا لِّى مِن دُونِ ٱللَّهِ وَلَٰكِن كُونُوا۟ رَبَّٰنِيِّۦنَ بِمَا كُنتُمْ تُعَلِّمُونَ ٱلْكِتَٰبَ وَبِمَا كُنتُمْ تَدْرُسُونَ
5:117, 118.
5:117, 118.
The expression ma Kana la-hu is used in three senses: (a) It does not become him to do so. (b) It is not possible for him to do so; or, it does not stand to reason that he should have done so; (c) he cannot possibly do so, i.e. it is physically impossible for him to do so.
Rabbaniyyin is the plural of Rabbaniy which means, (1) one who devotes himself to religious service or applies himself to acts of devotion; (2) one who possesses knowledge of God; (3) one who is learned in religious lore, or a good or righteous man; (4) a teacher who begins to nourish people with the small matters of knowledge or science before taking the great ones; (5) a lord or master or a leader; (6) a reformer (Lane, Sibawaih & Mubarrad).
The words, because you teach the Book and because you study it, show that it is the duty of all those who themselves have acquired spiritual knowledge that they should impart it to others and should not let men grope in the darkness of ignorance.
5:117, 118.
Important Words:
ربانیین (solely devoted to the Lord) is the plural of ربانی which is a relative noun derived from رب (Lord) just as لحیانی (long-bearded) and شعرانی (having long hair) are derived from لحیة (beard) and شعر (hair) respectively. Keeping in view the different meanings of رب (see 1:2 and 3:65) the word ربانی would mean, one who devotes himself to religious service, or applies himself to acts of devotion; one who possesses knowledge of God; one who is learned in religious matters; a good or righteous man; a worshipper of the Lord; a teacher of others who begins to nourish people with the small matters of knowledge or science before taking the great ones; a learned man who not only practises what he knows but also instructs others; one of high rank in knowledge; a lord or master; a leader; a reformer (Lane, Sibawaih & Mubarrad).
The expression ماکان له (it is not possible for him) is, according to Arabic idiom, used in three senses: (1) it does not become him; as in the hadith ماکان لا بن ابی قحافة ان یصلی بین یدی رسول الله صلعم i.e. it does not become the son of Abu Quhafah, (i.e. AbuBakr) to lead the Faithful in Prayers in the presence of the Prophet of God (Bukhari); (2) it is rationally impossible for him to do so; or, it does not stand to reason that he should have done so; (3) he cannot possibly do so, i.e. it is physically impossible for him to do so. It is in the second sense that the expression has been used in this verse. See also 2:35.
Commentary:
It is quite inconceivable that a man whom God has raised as a Prophet and to whom He has given a revealed Book for the guidance of men should teach them to take him as God beside Allah. Such a supposition would imply a serious reflection on God Himself Who chose for His Messenger a man who undid the very work which he had been commissioned to do, and who, instead of calling upon men to worship God, set himself up as God and called upon them to adore him. Such a thing can never occur. A Prophet would always exhort men to become the devotees of God only.
The words, because you teach the Book and because you study it, show that it is the duty of all those who succeed in acquiring spiritual knowledge to impart it to others and not to let men grope in the darkness of ignorance.
e
5:117, 118.
a
5:117, 118.
368
Important Words:
ربانیین (solely devoted to the Lord) is the plural of ربانی which is a relative noun derived from رب (Lord) just as لحیانی (long-bearded) and شعرانی (having long hair) are derived from لحیة (beard) and شعر (hair) respectively. Keeping in view the different meanings of رب (see 1:2 and 3:65) the word ربانی would mean, one who devotes himself to religious service, or applies himself to acts of devotion; one who possesses knowledge of God; one who is learned in religious matters; a good or righteous man; a worshipper of the Lord; a teacher of others who begins to nourish people with the small matters of knowledge or science before taking the great ones; a learned man who not only practises what he knows but also instructs others; one of high rank in knowledge; a lord or master; a leader; a reformer (Lane, Sibawaih & Mubarrad).
The expression ماکان له (it is not possible for him) is, according to Arabic idiom, used in three senses: (1) it does not become him; as in the hadith ماکان لا بن ابی قحافة ان یصلی بین یدی رسول الله صلعم i.e. it does not become the son of Abu Quhafah, (i.e. AbuBakr) to lead the Faithful in Prayers in the presence of the Prophet of God (Bukhari); (2) it is rationally impossible for him to do so; or, it does not stand to reason that he should have done so; (3) he cannot possibly do so, i.e. it is physically impossible for him to do so. It is in the second sense that the expression has been used in this verse. See also 2:35.
Commentary:
It is quite inconceivable that a man whom God has raised as a Prophet and to whom He has given a revealed Book for the guidance of men should teach them to take him as God beside Allah. Such a supposition would imply a serious reflection on God Himself Who chose for His Messenger a man who undid the very work which he had been commissioned to do, and who, instead of calling upon men to worship God, set himself up as God and called upon them to adore him. Such a thing can never occur. A Prophet would always exhort men to become the devotees of God only.
The words, because you teach the Book and because you study it, show that it is the duty of all those who succeed in acquiring spiritual knowledge to impart it to others and not to let men grope in the darkness of ignorance.
b
5:117, 118.
432
The expression ma Kana la-hu is used in three senses: (a) It does not become him to do so. (b) It is not possible for him to do so; or, it does not stand to reason that he should have done so; (c) he cannot possibly do so, i.e. it is physically impossible for him to do so.
432A
Rabbaniyyin is the plural of Rabbaniy which means, (1) one who devotes himself to religious service or applies himself to acts of devotion; (2) one who possesses knowledge of God; (3) one who is learned in religious lore, or a good or righteous man; (4) a teacher who begins to nourish people with the small matters of knowledge or science before taking the great ones; (5) a lord or master or a leader; (6) a reformer (Lane, Sibawaih & Mubarrad).
432B
The words, because you teach the Book and because you study it, show that it is the duty of all those who themselves have acquired spiritual knowledge that they should impart it to others and should not let men grope in the darkness of ignorance.
قُلْ ءَامَنَّا بِٱللَّهِ وَمَآ أُنزِلَ عَلَيْنَا وَمَآ أُنزِلَ عَلَىٰٓ إِبْرَٰهِيمَ وَإِسْمَٰعِيلَ وَإِسْحَٰقَ وَيَعْقُوبَ وَٱلْأَسْبَاطِ وَمَآ أُوتِىَ مُوسَىٰ وَعِيسَىٰ وَٱلنَّبِيُّونَ مِن رَّبِّهِمْ لَا نُفَرِّقُ بَيْنَ أَحَدٍ مِّنْهُمْ وَنَحْنُ لَهُۥ مُسْلِمُونَ
2:137, 286.
2:137, 286.
The Jews refused to believe in non-Israelite Prophets as the words, obey none but him who follows your religion (3:74) show. The charge has been pressed home to them that while they rejected all but the Israelite Prophets, Islam requires its followers to believe in all the Prophets of God, irrespective of the country or the race or the community to which they belonged or of the time in which they lived. This constitutes Islam’s great superiority over all other religions.
The words do not mean that there is no difference of rank or status between various Prophets which view is contrary to 2:254. What they really signify is that there can be no discrimination between them as Divine Messengers.
2:137; 2:286
Commentary:
The Jews refused to believe in non-Israelite Prophets as the words, obey none but him who follows your religion (3:74) show. In the present verse, the charge has been pressed home to Jews that whereas they rejected all but the Israelite Prophets, Islam requires its followers to believe in all the Prophets of God, irrespective of the country or the race or the community to which they belonged or of the time in which they lived. Again, Islam requires them not only to believe in the Prophets that have passed away but also in any that may appear in future. A great contrast indeed, between the catholicity of Islam and the narrow-mindedness of Judaism!
The words, We make no distinction between any of them, should not be understood to mean that Islam considers all Prophets to be of equal spiritual rank. This view is contrary to 2:254 in which some Prophets have been declared to possess a higher spiritual rank than others.
So the words refer only to discrimination as regards believing in them and not as regards their rank.
a
2:137, 286.
b
2:137; 2:286
373
Commentary:
The Jews refused to believe in non-Israelite Prophets as the words, obey none but him who follows your religion (3:74) show. In the present verse, the charge has been pressed home to Jews that whereas they rejected all but the Israelite Prophets, Islam requires its followers to believe in all the Prophets of God, irrespective of the country or the race or the community to which they belonged or of the time in which they lived. Again, Islam requires them not only to believe in the Prophets that have passed away but also in any that may appear in future. A great contrast indeed, between the catholicity of Islam and the narrow-mindedness of Judaism!
The words, We make no distinction between any of them, should not be understood to mean that Islam considers all Prophets to be of equal spiritual rank. This view is contrary to 2:254 in which some Prophets have been declared to possess a higher spiritual rank than others.
So the words refer only to discrimination as regards believing in them and not as regards their rank.
a
2:137, 286.
435
The Jews refused to believe in non-Israelite Prophets as the words, obey none but him who follows your religion (3:74) show. The charge has been pressed home to them that while they rejected all but the Israelite Prophets, Islam requires its followers to believe in all the Prophets of God, irrespective of the country or the race or the community to which they belonged or of the time in which they lived. This constitutes Islam’s great superiority over all other religions.
435A
The words do not mean that there is no difference of rank or status between various Prophets which view is contrary to 2:254. What they really signify is that there can be no discrimination between them as Divine Messengers.
لَن تَنَالُوا۟ ٱلْبِرَّ حَتَّىٰ تُنفِقُوا۟ مِمَّا تُحِبُّونَ ۚ وَمَا تُنفِقُوا۟ مِن شَىْءٍ فَإِنَّ ٱللَّهَ بِهِۦ عَلِيمٌ
9:34, 111; 63:11.
In order to attain true faith, which is the essence of all righteousness and is the highest form of good, one must be prepared to sacrifice everything that one holds dear. The highest stage of righteousness can be attained only by spending in the way of God that which one loves best. High morals (Birr) cannot be attained without imbibing a true spirit of sacrifice.
9:34, 111; 63:11.
Important Words:
البر (righteousness) means, goodness of a high order (Mufradat). The Holy Prophet has explained the word بر as حسن الخلق i.e.the excellence of moral qualities (Muslim & Musnad). See also 2:45, 178. As true belief is the basis of all goodness, so the word البر may also be taken to mean true belief.
Commentary:
Since the word البر means, goodness or righteousness of a high order or excellence of morals, the verse purports to say that though God is cognizant of, and suitably rewards, each and every thing that one spends in the cause of Allah, yet the goodness of a high order, most acceptable in His sight, can be achieved only by spending out of things, be they material or otherwise, which one loves most for the obvious reason that such spending involves the greatest sacrifice.
In the preceding verse it is said, there shall not be accepted from anyone of them even an earthful of gold, though he offer it in ransom. From this some people might conclude that spending in the cause of God was of no use. To remove this possible misunderstanding, it is pointed out here that spending in the cause of God is a highly meritorious act and spending what is best naturally brings the highest good. The preceding verse refers only to such disbelievers as die in their disbelief.
The verse may be interpreted in three ways: (1) If البر is taken to mean true faith, the verse would mean that as disbelievers think more of their worldly interests than of God, they are unable to recognize the truth of Islam. Thus the verse signifies that in order to attain true faith, which is the essence of all righteousness and the highest form of good, one must be prepared to sacrifice everything that one holds dear. (2) If البر is taken in the sense of goodness of a high order, the verse would mean that though whatever is spent in the cause of God is an act of righteousness, yet the highest stage of righteousness can be attained only by spending in the way of God that which one loves best. (3) If, however, the word البرis taken to mean high morals, the verse would signify that high morals cannot be attained without inculcating a true spirit of sacrifice.
It is on record in the Hadith that when this verse was revealed, Abu Talhah, a Companion of the Holy Prophet, stood up and addressing him said, "O Messenger of God, my garden known as Bi’r Rauha’ (this garden was situated opposite to the Mosque at Medina) is to me the dearest of my property and I hereby give it in charity" (Bukhari, ch. on Tafsir). This illustrates how the early converts to Islam strove to practise the highest good as the Quran enjoined upon them.
d
9:34, 111; 63:11.
261
为了达到真正的信仰,--------一切至善中的精华和完好的最高形式,--------一个人必须准备牺牲他所心爱的一切。只有为安拉而献出自己最爱的东西, 才能达到善的最高阶段。不吸收真正的牺牲精神, 就不能获得高尚的道德 بِرّ (Birr)。
a
9:34, 111; 63:11.
379
Important Words:
البر (righteousness) means, goodness of a high order (Mufradat). The Holy Prophet has explained the word بر as حسن الخلق i.e.the excellence of moral qualities (Muslim & Musnad). See also 2:45, 178. As true belief is the basis of all goodness, so the word البر may also be taken to mean true belief.
Commentary:
Since the word البر means, goodness or righteousness of a high order or excellence of morals, the verse purports to say that though God is cognizant of, and suitably rewards, each and every thing that one spends in the cause of Allah, yet the goodness of a high order, most acceptable in His sight, can be achieved only by spending out of things, be they material or otherwise, which one loves most for the obvious reason that such spending involves the greatest sacrifice.
In the preceding verse it is said, there shall not be accepted from anyone of them even an earthful of gold, though he offer it in ransom. From this some people might conclude that spending in the cause of God was of no use. To remove this possible misunderstanding, it is pointed out here that spending in the cause of God is a highly meritorious act and spending what is best naturally brings the highest good. The preceding verse refers only to such disbelievers as die in their disbelief.
The verse may be interpreted in three ways: (1) If البر is taken to mean true faith, the verse would mean that as disbelievers think more of their worldly interests than of God, they are unable to recognize the truth of Islam. Thus the verse signifies that in order to attain true faith, which is the essence of all righteousness and the highest form of good, one must be prepared to sacrifice everything that one holds dear. (2) If البر is taken in the sense of goodness of a high order, the verse would mean that though whatever is spent in the cause of God is an act of righteousness, yet the highest stage of righteousness can be attained only by spending in the way of God that which one loves best. (3) If, however, the word البرis taken to mean high morals, the verse would signify that high morals cannot be attained without inculcating a true spirit of sacrifice.
It is on record in the Hadith that when this verse was revealed, Abu Talhah, a Companion of the Holy Prophet, stood up and addressing him said, "O Messenger of God, my garden known as Bi’r Rauha’ (this garden was situated opposite to the Mosque at Medina) is to me the dearest of my property and I hereby give it in charity" (Bukhari, ch. on Tafsir). This illustrates how the early converts to Islam strove to practise the highest good as the Quran enjoined upon them.
b
9:34, 111; 63:11.
438
In order to attain true faith, which is the essence of all righteousness and is the highest form of good, one must be prepared to sacrifice everything that one holds dear. The highest stage of righteousness can be attained only by spending in the way of God that which one loves best. High morals (Birr) cannot be attained without imbibing a true spirit of sacrifice.